Subaru WRX 2017 User Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL

WRX

WRX STI

2017

2017 WRX / WRX STI Owner’s Manual

A1270BE-A

Issued March 2016

Printed in USA 03/16

2017A

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

TOKYO, JAPAN

Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza,

P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please see

your Subaru dealer for a Product Brochure

detailing all currently available models.

MSA5M1705A

Love. It’s what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.

2271137_17a_WRX_STi_OM.indd 1 5/17/16 5:00 PM

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY

INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail

by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the

United States come with the following

warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control Systems Warranty

. Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by

an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Anti-Corrosion Warranty

. Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Service Booklet” . Read

these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A.

and Canada

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

& Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed o f fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS

airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

– CONTINUED –

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform

tire quality grading standards and Report-

ing safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understand-

ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle

safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to y ou r

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation list

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditioner

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

ABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA

Blind Spot Detection/Rear

Cross Traffic Alert

CVT

Continuously variable trans-

mission

C.DIFF/

DCCD

Driver’s control center differ-

ential

DRL Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

Abbreviation Meaning

INT Intermittent

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

LED Light emitting diode

LSD Limited slip differential

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

MT Manual transmission

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Braking

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive

SRF

Steering responsive fog lights

system

SRS

Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

Vehicle symbols

These are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” F23.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Safety precautions when

driving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-

mental Restraint System) airbag

does not do away with the need

to fasten seatbelts. In combina-

tion with the seatbelts, it offers

the best combined protection in

case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

consider able speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” F1-11.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restrai nt

System airbag)” F1-33.

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in-

fants and small children should

always be placed in the REAR

seat in an infant or child restraint

system which is appropriate for

the child’s age, height and

weight. If a child is too big for a

child restraint system, the child

should sit in the REAR seat and

be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. Never allow a child

to stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Put children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD

OR REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-

JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’ S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-

BAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK” position when

children sit in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opens the door

and falls out. Refer to “Chil d

safety locks” F2-32.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows ” F2-32.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

the temperature in a closed ve-

hicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or pos-

sibly fatal injuries.

. Help prevent children, adults or

animals from locking themselves

in the trunk. On hot or sunny

days, the temperature in the

trunk could quickly become high

enough to cause death or serious

heat-related injuries including

brain damage to anyone locked

inside, particularly for small chil-

dren.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

Also make certain that the trunk

is closed.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” F1-11.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child restraint systems” F1-21.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)” F1-33.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorle ss

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

– CONTINUED –

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction time

and impairs your perception, judg-

ment and attentiveness. If you drive

after drinking – even if you drink just

a little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most

frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-

hol affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-

tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or

fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can

make you drowsy or otherwise affect your

ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

you have a medical condition that requires

you to take drugs, please consult with

your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction time will be delayed and

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness will be impaired. If you

drive when ti red or sleepy, your,

your passengers’ and other per-

sons’ chances of being involved in

a serious accident may increase.

Please do n ot continue to drive but

instead find a safe place to rest if you

are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you

should make periodic rest stops to refresh

yourself before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the

driving with others.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

NOTE

This vehicle is equipped with a function

that will record certain vehicle data in

the event the vehicle is operated or

maintained in a manner that exceeds or

varies from routine normal use.

That data may be used as a means of

determining whether or not a vehicle

condition is eligible for repair under

warranty.

& Car phone/cell phone and

driving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and can lead

to an accident. If you use a car

phone/cell phone, pull off the road

and park in a safe place before

using your phone. In some States/

Provinces, only hands-free phones

may legally be used while driving.

& Driving vehicles equipped

with navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while dri ving.

The loss of attenti on to driving

could lead to an accident. If you

wish to operate the controls of the

navigation system, first take the

vehicle off the road and stop it in a

safe place.

& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling

harness which can be secured to the rear

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier

which can be secured to the rear seat by

routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers

in the front passenger’s seat. For further

information, consult your veterinarian,

local animal protection society or pet

shop.

& Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the spare)

at least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard. For detailed information, refer

to “Tires and wheels” F11-31.

– CONTINUED –

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

& Attaching accessories

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than

properly placed inspection stick-

ers) to the windshield. Such

items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

General information

& California proposition 65

warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-

tuents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

& California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

Certain vehicle components such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the vehicle

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the engine is turned off. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

This noise is caused by the operation

of the fuel evaporation leakage check-

ing system and the operation is normal.

The noise will stop after approximately

15 minutes.

& Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,

data that will assist in understanding how

a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

isdesignedtorecorddatarelatedto

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for

a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

————————————————————————————————————————

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood (page 11-9)

2) Front wiper (page 3-103)

3) Headlight (page 3-97)

4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-44)

5) Moonroof (page 2-39)

6) Door locks (page 2-5)

7) Outside mirrors (page 3-113)

8) Tire pressure (page 11-33)

9) Flat tires (page 9-4)

10) Snow tires (page 8-9)

11) Fog light (page 3-101)

12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-12)

13) Towing hook (page 9-12)

1) Rear window defogger (page 3-114)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-32)

4) Tie-down hole (page 9-12)

5) Trunk lid (page 2-37)

6) Towing hook (page 9-12)

– CONTINUED –

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-29)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-11)

3) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

4) Front seat (page 1-2)

5) Rear seat (page 1-7)

NOTE

For models with SUBARU STARLINK

(U.S.-spec. models only): Refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for

SUBARU STARLINK.

(STI)

1) Center console (page 6-5)

2) Seat heater (page 1-6)

3) Cup holder (page 6-6)

4) Parking brake lever (page 7-44)

5) Power windows (page 2-32)

6) Door locks (page 2-5)

7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-113)

8) Glove box (page 6-5)

9) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)

10) Shift lever (page 7-17)

11) SI-DRIVE (page 7-29)

12) Driver’s Control Center Differential

(C.DIFF/DCCD) (page 7-19)

– CONTINUED –

(Except STI) (models without the EyeSight system)

1) Center console (page 6-5)

2) Seat heater (page 1-6)

3) Cup holder (page 6-6)

4) Parking brake lever (page 7-44)

5) Power windows (page 2-32)

6) Door locks (page 2-5)

7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-113)

8) Glove box (page 6-5)

9) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)

10) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-17)/Select lever

(CVT) (page 7-25)

(Except STI) (models with the EyeSight system)

1) Center console (page 6-5)

2) Seat heater (page 1-6)

3) Cup holder (page 6-6)

4) Parking brake switch (page 7-44)

5) Power windows (page 2-32)

6) Door locks (page 2-5)

7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-113)

8) Glove box (page 6-5)

9) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)

10) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-17)/Select lever

(CVT) (page 7-25)

11) Hill Holder switch (page 7-47)

– CONTINUED –

& Instrument panel

1) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-100)

2) Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-37)

3) Combination meter (page 3-8)

4) Multi function display (page 3-49)

5) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)

6) Multi function display control switches

(page 3-49)

7) Audio (page 5-1)

8) Climate control (page 4-1)

9) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-115)

10) Horn (page 3-116)

11) SRS airbag (page 1-33)

12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 7-40)

13) Fuse box (page 11-42)

14) Hood lock release knob (page 11-9)

15) S teering responsive fog lights OFF

switch (if equipped) (page 3-101)

16) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (if equipped)

(page 7-55)

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

& Steering wheel

1) Audio control buttons (page 5-62)

2) Cruise control (page 7-52)

3) Shift paddle (page 7-26)

4) Hands-free switches (page 5-70)/Voice

command system (page 5-80)

5) Multi information display control switches

(page 3-38)

6) SRS airbag (page 1-33)

7) Horn (page 3-116)

8) SI-DRIVE switches (except STI)

(page 7-29)

– CONTINUED –

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

1) Windshield wiper (page 3-103)

2) Mist (page 3-104)

3) Windshield washer (page 3-105)

4) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-104)

5) Wiper control lever (page 3-104)

6) Light control switch (page 3-96)

7) Fog light switch (page 3-101)

8) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-97)

9) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-98)

10) Turn signal lever (page 3-99)

& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. models

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter

may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-10)

2) Multi information display (page 3-38)

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-34)

4) Speedometer (page 3-9)

5) Trip knob (page 3-9)

6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

– CONTINUED –

! Except U.S.-spec. models

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter

may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-10)

2) Multi information display (page 3-38)

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-34)

4) Speedometer (page 3-9)

5) Trip knob (page 3-9)

6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

& Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-14

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light

3-14

SRS airbag system

warning light

3-15

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag ON indi-

cator

3-16

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag OFF in-

dicator

3-16

CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Malfunc-

tion indicator light

3-16

Charge warning light 3-17

Oil pressure warning

light

3-17

Engine oil level warn-

ing indicator (except

STI)

3-17

AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

3-18

Mark Name Page

Rear differential oil

temperature warning

light (STI)

3-18

ABS warning light 3-20

Brake system warning

light

3-21

Electronic parking

brake indicator light

(models with electro-

nic parking brake sys-

tem)

3-23

Door open warning

light

3-25

AWD warning light

(if equipped)

3-25

Power steering warn-

ing light (except STI)

3-25

Hill start assist warn-

ing light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light

(models without elec-

tronic parking brake

system)

3-24

Hill holder indicator

light (models with

electronic parking

brake system)

3-24

Mark Name Page

Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light

3-26

Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator

light

3-27

Turn signal indicator

lights

3-35

LED headlight warning

light (if equipped)

3-25

High beam indicator

light

3-35

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (if equipped)

3-35

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

3-35

Access key warning

light (if equipped)

3-28

Security indicator light 3-33

Headlight indicator

light

3-35

– CONTINUED –

Mark Name Page

Cruise control indica-

tor

3-35

Cruise control set in-

dicator

3-35

Traction mode indica-

tor

3-27

Low fuel warning light 3-24

Low tire pressure

warning light

(U.S.-spec. models)

3-19

Windshield washer

fluid warning indicator

3-18

Sport (S) mode indi-

cator (if equipped)

3-34

Intelligent (I) mode in-

dicator (if equipped)

3-34

Sport Sharp (S#)

mode indicator (if

equipped)

3-34

Shift-up indicator (STI) 3-34

Driver’s control center

differential auto indi-

cator (STI)

3-35

Mark Name Page

Auto [+] mode indica-

tor (STI)

3-36

Auto [−] mode indica-

tor (STI)

3-36

Driver’s control center

differential indicator

and warning (STI)

3-36

REV indicator light

(STI)

3-37

Steering responsive

fog lights warning in-

dicator/Steering re-

sponsive fog lights

OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-37

BSD/RCTA warning

indicator (if equipped)

3-37

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

3-37

RAB warning light (if

equipped)

3-37

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-37

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. If your

vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the display. Contact the

nearest SUBARU dealer for details. For details, refer to “Multi function display” F3-49.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation

Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Impact sensor operation (only models with shock

sensors (dealer option))

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Passive arming (models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Dome light and map lights (models with moonroof)

illumination

ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher* Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume* Level 1 - 7 Level 5

Door unlock selection function (driver’s door unlock) Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher* Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume* Level 1 - 7 Level 5

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Defogger and deicer system for models

with the automatic climate control sys-

tem*

Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and

windshield wiper deicer

Operation for 15 minutes/

Continuous operation

Operation for 15

minutes

Dome light Operation of dome light/map light OFF delay timer OFF/10 seconds/20 sec-

onds/30 seconds

30 seconds

Map light (models with moonroof)

– CONTINUED –

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto on/off headlights (if equipped)* Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off headlights Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal

Welcome lighting* Approaching (operation of timer) OFF/30 seconds/60 sec-

onds/90 seconds

30 seconds

Exiting (operation of timer)

One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer Operation/Non-operation Operation

*: The settings can be changed by the customer using the multi function display.

Front seats........................................................... 1-2

Manual seat ........................................................ 1-4

Power seat (driver’s seat – if equipped) ............... 1-5

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6

Rear seats............................................................ 1-7

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8

Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-11

Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-11

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-13

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ......................................... 1-13

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-13

Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-13

Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-16

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-17

Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ............. 1-17

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt

pretensioners................................................... 1-19

System monitors ................................................ 1-20

System servicing ................................................ 1-20

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-21

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-21

Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-23

Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-24

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR

seatbelt ........................................................... 1-25

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-28

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-29

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-32

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................................................ 1-33

Models with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder

restraints for driver, front passenger, and

window-side rear passengers........................... 1-33

Components...................................................... 1-36

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-38

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-50

SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-59

SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-60

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-61

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-

trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers and cargo are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. After adjusting the seat, push it

slightly to make sure it is se-

curely locked. If the seat is not

securely locked, it may move or

the seatbelt may not operate

properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with

front seat locking and cause an

accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce t he risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks ar e not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

consider able speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

Put children in the rear seat properly

restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because c hildren are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. Consequently, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child seats

and those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all times

in a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

1-2

for the child’s age, height and

weight. Secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including forward

facing child seat) in the REAR seats

at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

chil dren are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” F1-21.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, observe the following

precautions:

. Keep the seatback in the upright

position while the vehicle is in

motion.

. Do not place objects such as

cushions between the passenger

and the seatback.

Otherwise, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will increase,

and both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may lead to

improper operation of the following

systems and could result in serious

injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. Seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

– CONTINUED –

1-3

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

& Manual seat

! Forward and backward adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and try to move the seat back and

forth to make sure that it is securely locked

into place.

! Reclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then

release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

the lever is pulled. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

! Seat cushion height adjustment

(driver’s seat)

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat

rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat cushion adjustment lever

up and down.

1-4

& Power seat (driver’s seat – if

equipped)

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion angle or seat cushion

height.

2) Seat cushion angle control switch

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

3) Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

4) Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback,

move the control switch.

& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints the opposite

way round. Doing so will prevent

the head restraints from func-

tioning as intended. Therefore,

when you remove the head re-

straints, you must reinstall all

head restraints correctly to pro-

tect vehicle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat are equipped with head re-

straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-

ble in the following ways.

! Head restraint height adjustment

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

– CONTINUED –

1-5

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

! Head restraint angle adjustment

The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-

ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back

of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the

preferred position. A click will be audible

when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward

as it can go. The head restraint will

automatically return to the fully upright

position. Then, adjust the head restraint

again to the preferred angle.

Seat heater (if equipped)

The front seats are equipped with a seat

heater.

The seat heater operates when the igni-

tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

CAUTION

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

. When the vehicle’sinterioris

warmed enough or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

off the seat heater.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

1-6

can cause battery discharge.

Type A

Type B

1) HIGH (HI) – Rapid heating

2) LOW (LO) – Normal heating

3) Off

A) Left-hand side

B) Right-hand side

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LOW”

(“LO”)or“HIGH” (“HI”) position on the

switch, as desired, depending on the

temperature.

Selecting the “HIGH” (“HI”) position will

cause the seat to heat up quicker.

To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the

opposite side of the current position.

The indicator located on the switch illumi-

nates when the seat heater is in operation.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

enough or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the switch off.

Rear seats

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

– CONTINUED –

1-7

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

& Head restraint adjustment

Both the rear window side seats and the

rear center seat are equipped with head

restraints.

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Therefore, when

you have removed the head re-

straints, you must reinstall all

head restraints to protect vehicle

occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

! Rear windows side seating position

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

After installing the head restraint, make

sure it is securely locked.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

1-8

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

! Rear center seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used in the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

1) Incorrect (retracted position)

2) Correct (extended position)

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibi-

lity.

& Folding down the rear seat-

back

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat-

back, check that there are no

passengers or objects on the

rear seat. Not doing so creates

a risk of injury or property da-

mage if the seatback suddenly

folds down.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded rear seatback or in

the trunk. Doing so may result in

serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially

long items properly to prevent

them from being thrown around

inside the vehicle and causing

serious injury during a sudden

stop, a sudden steering maneu-

ver or a rapid acceleration.

. When you return the seatback to

its original position, shake the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

– CONTINUED –

1-9

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

seatback slightly to confirm that

it is securely fixed in place. If the

seatback is not securely fixed in

place, the seatback may sud-

denly fold down in the event of

sudden braking, or objects may

move out from the trunk, which

could cause serious injury or

death.

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

1) Securing hook

WARNING

When the seatback is returned to its

original position, observe the follow-

ing precautions. Failure to do so

may lead to serious injury or an

accident because the operation effi-

ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.

. The seatbelt should not be

caught in the seatback and it

should be fully visible.

. The seatbelt should not pass

behind the securing hook for

the seatback.

CAUTION

Do not hang luggage etc. on the

securing hook. The possibility ex-

ists that the seatback may not be

able to be fixed firmly in place. This

could lead to unexpected accidents.

1. Lower the head restraint of the rear

center seating position.

1-10

Release knob

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock

release knob then fold the seatback down.

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that the unlock-

ing marker on the lock release knob is no

longer visible.

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

After returning the seatback to its

original position, confirm that the

unlocking marker of the lock release

knob is no longer visible. Failure to

do so could lead to serious injury or

death in the event of an accident.

When you return the seatback to its

original position, shake the seat-

back to confirm that it is securely

fixed in place.

Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to

support only one person. Never

use a single belt for two or more

persons – even children. Other-

wise, in an accident, serious

injury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. Also, be sure to

replace seatbelt assemblies that

show signs of severe fraying or

having been cut. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

– CONTINUED –

1-11

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

if damage is not obvious.

. Put children in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. For that

reason, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including

those in child seats and those

that have outgrown child re-

straint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbelt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s height

and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in the

REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD

OR REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-

JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’ S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-

BAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. For instructions

and precautions concerning the

child restraint system, refer to

“Child restraint systems” F1-21.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is

suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child

restraint systems” F1-21.

! Children

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, move the child closer to

the belt buckle to help provide a good

shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

securely place the lap belt as low as

possible on the hips and not on the child’s

waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt

cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

1-12

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

& Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic

Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/

ELR has an additional locking mode

“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode” intended to secure a child restraint

system. When the seatbelt is once drawn

out completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,

the seatbelt must be changed over to the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the seatbelt

retracts fully and the retractor returned to

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode.

For instructions on how to convert the

retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child

restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”

F1-25.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and

chime” F3-14.

& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of a cross the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks ar e not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or

death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

– CONTINUED –

1-13

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that

has been closed up in sunny weath-

er; they could burn an occupant. Do

not touch such hot parts until they

cool.

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position according to

the following procedure.

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

1-14

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger. Always adjust the

anchor height so that the shoulder belt

passes over the middle of the shoulder

without touching the neck.

To raise:

Slide the anchor up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Allow the seatbelt to retract slowly to

avoid the seatbelt being tangled or

twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

NOTE

The center seatbelt buckle is marked

as “CENTER”.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

– CONTINUED –

1-15

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Allow the seatbelt to retract slowly to

avoid the seatbelt being tangled or

twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

& Seatbelt maintenance

To clea n the seatbelts, use lukewarm

water with mild soap. Do not use the

seatbelts until they are dry. Never bleach

or dye the belts because this could

seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for crac ks, cuts, gashes,

tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.

Replace the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

1-16

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-

belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The

seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in the event of an accident

involving moderate to severe frontal and

side collisions, and rollover accidents.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as

follows.

. SRS frontal airbag sensor

. Side impact sensor (front door impact

sensor)

. Rollover sensor

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

pretensioner

NOTE

This section is applicable to the dri-

ver’s side seatbelt.

Front seatbelt pretensioner

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions, the front seatbelt is quickly

drawn back in by the retractor to take up

the slack so that the belt more effectively

restrains the driver.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor impacts or

in rear impacts.

. In cases of frontal collisions, the

following components will operate si-

multaneously.

– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver

– Seatbelt pretensioner for front

passenger

– SRS frontal airbag for driver

– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-

senger*

– SRS curtain airbags (both sides)

(if an offset frontal collision occurs)

*: This does not operate if the occupant

detection system deactivates airbag op-

eration. For details, ref er to “Front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-40

. In cases of side collisions, the

following components will operate si-

multaneously.

– SRS curtain airbag (impacted

side)

– SRS side airbag (impacted side)

(when both the satellite safing sen-

sor and any of the center pillar

impact sensors/front door impact

sensors sense an impact force)

– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver

(when both the satellite safing sen-

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

– CONTINUED –

1-17

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

sor and the driver’s side front door

impact sensor sense an impact

force)

However, when a center pillar im-

pact sensor detects a signal faster

than the front door impact sensor,

or both sensors detect signals

simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-

sioner does not activate.

– Seatbelt pretensioner for front

passenger (shoulder belt preten-

sioner only) (when both the satellite

safing sensor and the front passen-

ger’s side front door impact sensor

sense an impact force)

However, when a center pillar im-

pact sensor detects a signal faster

than the front door impact sensor,

or both sensors detect signals

simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-

sioner does not activate.

. In the event of a rollover accident

When the curtain airbags deploy, the

driver’s side seatbelt pretensioner and

front passenger’s side shoulder belt

pretensioner are activated simulta-

neously.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies should

be replaced only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If either front seatbelt does not

retract or cannot be pulled out due to

a malfunction or activation of the

pretensioner, contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been

damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it has

seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the

buyer to the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an

upright position with their seat-

belts properly fastened. Refer to

“Seatbelts” F1-11.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the front seatbelt retractor as-

semblies or surrounding area.

This could result in accidental

activation of the seatbelt preten-

sioners or could make the sys-

tem inoperative, possibly result-

ing in serious injury. Seatbelt

pretensioners have no user-ser-

viceable parts. For required ser-

vicing of front seatbelt retractors

equipped with seatbelt pre ten-

sioners, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt

retractor assemblies or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

1-18

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

and lap belt pretensioners

NOTE

This section is applicable to the front

passenger’s side seatbelt.

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder

belt pretensioner)

2) Lap belt pretensioner

On the front passenger ’s side, the

shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-

ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is

located at the base of the center pillar.

Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap

belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in

the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level

of frontal or side collision force is detected.

As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front

seat occupant more effectively.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-

mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt

cannot be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor impacts or

in rear impacts.

. In cases of frontal collisions, the

following components will operate si-

multaneously.

– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver

– Seatbelt pretensioners for front

passenger (shoulder belt preten-

sioner only)

– SRS frontal airbag for driver

– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-

senger*

– SRS curtain airbags (both sides)

(if an offset frontal collision occurs)

*: This does not operate if the occupant

detection system deactivates airbag op-

eration. For details, refer to “Fron t

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-40

. In cases of side collisions, the

following components will operate si-

multaneously.

– SRS curtain airbag (impacted

side)

– SRS side airbag (impacted side)

(when both the satellite safing sen-

sor and any of the center pillar

impact sensors/front door impact

sensors sense an impact force)

– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver

(when both the satellite safing sen-

sor and the driver’s side front door

impact sensor sense an impact

force)

However, when a center pillar im-

pact sensor detects a signal faster

than the front door impact sensor,

or both sensors detect signals

simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-

sioner does not activate.

– Seatbelt pretensioner for front

passenger (shoulder belt preten-

sioner only) (when both the satellite

safing sensor and the front passen-

ger’s side front door impact sensor

sense an impact force)

However, when a center pillar im-

pact sensor detects a signal faster

than the front door impact sensor,

or both sensors detect signals

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

– CONTINUED –

1-19

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-

sioner does not activate.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies should

be replaced only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If either front seatbelt does not

retract or cannot be pulled out due to

a malfunction or activation of the

pretensioner, contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been

damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it has

seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the

buyer to the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an

upright position with their seat-

belts properly fastened. Refer to

“Seatbelts” F1-11.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the front seatbelt retractor as-

semblies or surrounding area.

This could result in accidental

activation of the seatbelt preten-

sioners or could make the sys-

tem inoperative, possibly result-

ing in serious injury. Seatbelt

pretensioners have no user-ser-

viceable parts. For required ser-

vicing of front seatbelt retractors

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt

retractor assemblies or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

& System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

while the vehicle is being driven. The

seatbelt pretensioners share the control

module with the SRS airbag system.

Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a

seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag

system warning light will illuminate. For

details, refer to “SRS airbag system

monitors” F1-59.

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in accidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or

SRS airbag or could make the

system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury. Do not

use electrical test equipment on

any circuit related to the seatbelt

pretensioner and SRS airbag

systems. For required servicing

of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

CAUTION

The sensors and SRS airbag control

modules are located in the following

locations.

1-20

. Front sub sensors: on both the

right and left side at the front of

the vehicle

. Front door impact sensors: on

both front doors

. Satellite safing sensor: under the

rear center seat

. Side airba g sensors: on both

center pillars

. Curtain airbag sensors: on both

rear wheel houses

. SRS airbag control module (in-

cluding the impact sensors): un-

der the center of the instrument

panel

If you need service or repair in those

areas or near the front seatbelt

retractors, have the work performed

by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to

your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifi cations

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment

other than genuine SUBARU ac-

cessory parts to the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er ’s Manual.

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint

system in the rear seat while riding in the

vehicle. You should use an infant or child

restraint system that meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-

patible with your vehicle and is appro-

priate for the child’s age and size. All child

restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those described in “Installation of

child restraint systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-29).

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraints are not

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

– CONTINUED –

1-21

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, care-

fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child

on his or her lap or in his or her

arms while the vehicle is moving.

The passenger cannot protect the

child from injury in a collision,

because the child will be caught

between the passenger and objects

inside the vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your

lap or arms in the front seat exposes

that child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or

kneeling on or in front of the front

1-22

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

& Where to place a child re-

straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint

system (including a booster seat) due to

the hazard to children p osed by the

passenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating

positions

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, the following equip-

ment is provided for installing a child

restraint system.

. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-

belts

. Lower anchorages (bars)

. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper

anchorage (tether anchorage, if equipped)

are provided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

When you install a child restraint system in

the rear seat’s center seating position,

raise the center head restraint.

Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side

seating positions may be used for a seat

in the center seating position if a child

restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions permit and specify using anchors as

far apart as those in this vehicle.

If a child restraint system is not correctly

fixed in place (for example, if a child

restraint system can be moved more than

1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you

should install the child restraint system in

a rear seat, window-side seating position.

WARNING

. Even with advanced airbags, chil-

dren can be seriously injured by

the airbag. Put children in the

rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

– CONTINUED –

1-23

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to se-

cure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing

child seats) in the REAR seats at

all times. You should choose a

restraint device which is appro-

priate for the child’s age, height

and weight. According to acci-

dent statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the

front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages

(bars) for a seat in the center

seating position unless a child

restraint system manufacturer’s

instructions permit and specify

using anchors spaced as far

apart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two or more

lower hooks onto the same an-

chorage (bar).

WARNING

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S

SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A

FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING

CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE

FRONT PASSENGER’ SSEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY

OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’SHEADTOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

& Choosing a child restraint

system

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protection. The chi ld

restraint system should meet all applic-

able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards for the United States

or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards for Canada. It can be identified by

looking for the label on the child restraint

system or the manufacturer’s statement of

compliance in the document attached to

the system.

Also it is important for you to make sure

that the child restraint system is compa-

tible with the vehicle in which it will be

used.

1-24

& Installing child restraint sys-

tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint

1. Shake the seatback to confirm that it is

securely locked into place.

– It is possible to check whether the

seatback is locked visually. If the

seatback is locked into place, the red

colored unlocking marker which is

attached to the bottom of the lock

release knob is invisible. For details,

refer to “Folding down the rear seat-

back” F1-9.

2. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

6. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

– CONTINUED –

1-25

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

7. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to side to

check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a

child restraint can be more firmly secured

by pushing it down into the seat cushion

and then tightening the seatbelt.

8. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

9. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing forward facing child re-

straint

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Shake the seatback to confirm that it is

securely locked into place.

– It is possible to check whether the

seatback is locked visually. If t he

seatback is locked into place, the red

colored unlocking marker which is

attached to the bottom of the lock

release knob is invisible. For details,

refer to “Folding down the rear seat-

back” F1-9.

2. Remove the head restraint of the rear

seating position where the child restraint

system is to be installed. For details, refer

to “Head restraint adjustment” F1-8.

1-26

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has

been removed in the cargo area.

Avoid placing the head restraint in

the passenger compartment to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in

the passenger compartment in a

sudden stop or a sharp turn.

3. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system on the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system on the window-side seating

position to be safe. For details, refer

to “Where to place a child restraint

system” F1-23.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

8. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint can

be more firmly secured by pushing it down

into the seat cushion and then tightening

the seatbelt.

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

– CONTINUED –

1-27

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

10. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located behind

the rear seat and tighten the top tether

firmly. For additional instructions, refer to

“Top tether anchorages” F1-32.

11. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

1. Place the booster seat in the rear

seating position and sit the child on it. The

child should sit well back on the booster

seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

1-28

4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child ’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it i s held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

– CONTINUED –

1-29

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your

vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such

child restraint systems are secured to the

designated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body. The lower and tether an-

chorages are sometimes referred to as the

LATCH system (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper an-

chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-

modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for

installing a child restraint system only on

the rear seat window-side seating posi-

tions. For each window-side seating posi-

tion, two lower anchorages are provided.

Each lower anchorage is located behind

the cover of the seatback bottom.

The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided at the locations

shown in the above illustration. For de-

tails, refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-

32.

To install a child restraint system using

lower and tether anchorages, perform the

following procedure.

1. Shake the seatback to confirm that it is

securely locked into place.

– It is possible to check whether the

seatback is locked visually. If t he

seatback is locked into place, the red

1-30

colored unlocking marker which is

attached to the bottom of the lock

release knob is invisible. For details,

refer to “Folding down the rear seat-

back” F1-9.

2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of

the rear seat seatbacks. These marks

indicate the positions of the lower an-

chorages (bars).

Remove the covers and locate the lower

anchorages (bars).

3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.

For details, refer to “Head restraint adjust-

ment” F1-8.

CAUTION

. When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions supplied with

it. After installing the child re-

straint system, check to ensure

that it is held securely in posi-

tion. If it is not held tight and

secure, the danger of your child

suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be

increased.

. Store the head restraint that has

been removed in the cargo area.

Avoid placing the head restraint

in the passenger compartment to

prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger com-

partment in a sudden stop or a

sharp turn.

4. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “

” marks on

the bottom of the rear seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

– CONTINUED –

1-31

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

5. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses

tether belts to connect the child restraint

system properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

6. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located on the

rear shelf and tighten the top tether firmly.

For additional instructions, refer to “Top

tether anchorages” F1-32.

7. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to verify that it is

held securely in position.

8. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a top tethe r can be

installed in the rear seat. When installing

a child restraint system using top tether,

proceed as follows, while observing the

instructions by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

1-32

! Anchorage location

1) For left seat

2) For center seat

3) For right seat

These upper anchorages are installed on

the rear shelf behind the rear seat.

! To hook the top tether

CAUTION

Remove the head restraint when

mounting a child restraint system.

Otherwise, it might be possible that

the top tether cannot be fastened

tightly.

1. Open the cover and attach the top

tether hook to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

2. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if

you have any question regardin g the

installation of a child restraint system.

*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used be-

cause the airbag system supplements the

vehicle’s seatbelts.

& Models with SRS airbags and

lap/shoulder restraints for

driver, front passenger, and

window-side rear passengers

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a

lap/shoulder belt at each front seating

position and each rear window-side seat-

ing positions. The supplemental restraint

system (SRS) consists of seven airbags.

The configurations are as follows.

. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal

airbags

. Driver’s and front passenger’s side

airbags

. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-

senger, and window-side rear passen-

gers)

. Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-33

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-

tensioners” F1-17.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS airbag is

designed only to be a supple-

ment to the primary protection

provided by the seatbelt. It does

not eliminate the need to fasten

seatbelts. In combination with

the seatbelts, it offers the best

combined protection in case of a

serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

refer to “Seatbelts” F1-11.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed – faster than

the blink of an eye – and force to

protect in high speed collisions,

the force of an airbag can injure

an occupant whose body is too

close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries

that can result when the SRS

airbag contacts an occupant not

in proper position such as one

thrown forward during pre-acci-

dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injury such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms

because of the SRS airbag de-

ployment force.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

consider able speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, those

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

WARNING

. Put children in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

1-34

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

For that reason, we strongly

recommend that ALL children

(including those in child seats

and those that have outgrown

child restraint devices) sit in the

REAR seat properly restrained at

all times in a child restraint

device or in a seatbelt, whichever

is appropriate for the child’s age,

height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in the

REAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint

system, refer to “Child restraint

systems” F1-21.

. NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD

OR REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT I N THE FRONT SEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-

JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-

BAG.

. Never allow a child to stand up,

or to kneel on the front passen-

ger’s seat, or never hold a child

on your lap or in your arms. The

SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other

breathing trouble. If you or your

passengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it is

equipped with SRS airbags by alerting

the buyer to the applicable section in

this Owner’s Manual.

. If the S RS airbag deploys, fuel

supply will be cut off to reduce the risk

of fire caused by leaking fuel. For

details about restarting of the engine,

refer to “If your vehicle is involved in

an accident” F9-18.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-35

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

& Components

1) SRS frontal airbag

2) SRS side airbag

3) SRS curtain airbag

4) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.

Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center

portion of the steering wheel

Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:

near the top of the dashboard under an

“SRS AIRBAG” mark

SRS side airbag: in the door side of each

front seat seatback which bears an “SRS

AIRBAG” label

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side

(between the f ront pillar and a point

behind the rear quarter glass)

An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the

top of each center pillar and rear pillar.

SRS knee airbag: under the steering

column

1-36

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensor)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

19) Front passenger’s occupant detection

system sensor

20) Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

22) SRS airbag system warning light

23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)

25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand

side)

26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-37

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

& SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system automatically determines the de-

ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the

SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-

ment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag

attached to the glove box lid beginning

with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed

in the center portion of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is stowed near the top of the dashboard

under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark. Also, the

driver’s knee airba g is stowed in the

bottom of the steering column.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the following components deploy.

. SRS frontal airbag for driver

. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

. Knee airbag for driver

. SRS curtain airbag

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat-

belts by reducing the impact to the

occupant’s head, chest and knees.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

1-38

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

WARNING

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper position

when the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer very serious injuries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs enough

space for deployment, the driver

should always sit upright and well

back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

It is also important to wear your

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-39

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant not in proper

position such as one thrown toward

the front of the vehicle during pre-

accident braking.

WARNING

. Do not put any objects over the

steering wheel pad and dash-

board. If the SRS frontal airbag

deploys, these objects could in-

terfere with its proper operation

and could be propelled inside the

vehicle, causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under the

driver’s side of the instrument

panel. If the SRS knee airbag

deploys, those objects could in-

terfere with its proper operation

and could be propelled inside the

vehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to

heavy, sharp or hard acces-

sories, or another key. If the knee

airbag deploys, those objects

could interfere with its proper

operation and could be propelled

inside the vehicle and cause

injury.

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the inside rear view mirror.

If the SRS airbag deploys, those

objects could become projectiles

that could seriously injure vehicle

occupants.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a

dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact.

Have the system inspected by your

SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS

airbag system warning light illuminates.

NOTE

The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not controlled by the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

The occupant detection system sensor is

installed under the seat upholstery and

monitors the physique and posture of the

front passenger. Using this information,

1-40

the occupant detection system determines

whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag should be deployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this

case, although the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag does not operate, the front

passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-

ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten -

sioner. For details about the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-

tensioners” F1-17.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system from functioning correctly

or cause the system to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact

to the front passenger ’sseat

such as by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest

their feet between the front seat-

back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front

passenger ’s seat. If liquid is

spilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble

the front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory

(such as an audio amplifier) other

than a genuine SUBARU acces-

sory under the front passenger’s

seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not use the front passenger’s

seat with the head restraint re-

moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the

front passenger ’s seat or the

seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your ve-

hicle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the

seat or pierce the seat uphols-

tery.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt

retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Manual seat” F 1-4

(models equipped with manual

seats only).

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate. Have the

system inspected by your SUBARU deal-

er immediately if the SRS airbag system

warning light illuminates.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer. Do not let anyone use

the front passenger’s seat while you are

driving the vehicle to your SUBARU deal-

er.

NOTE

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are not con-

trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-

tal airbag system.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON and OFF indicators” F3-16.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-41

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Occupant detection system

The occupant detection system sensor is

installed under the seat upholstery and

monitors the physique and posture of the

front passenger. Using this information,

the occupant detection system determines

whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag should be deployed or not.

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

If the front passenger’s seat cushion is

wet, this may adversely affect the ability of

the system to determine deployment. If

the seat cushion is wet, the front passen-

ger should stop sitting on the front

passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from

the seat immediately, let the seat dry

naturally and then check the SRS airbag

system warning light as follows.

. If the SRS airbag system warning light

illuminates, keep the seat dry until the

warning light turns off. If the SRS airbag

system warning light stays on even when

the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to

sit on the front passenger’s seat and have

the system checked by your SUBARU

dealer.

. If the SRS airbag system warning light

does not illuminate, check that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators work properly. If the indicators

do not work properly, do not allow anyone

to sit on the front passenger’s seat and

have the system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are

placed on the front passenger’s seat, this

may adversely affect the ability of the

system to determine deployment. This

may prevent the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-

ing properly. Check that the indicators

work properly.

When the OFF indicator turns off and the

ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a

collision. Remove luggage and electronic

devices from the front passenger’s seat.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cell

phones, lap tops, porta ble music

players, or electronic games, espe-

cially when connected to the acces-

sory power outlet and placed on the

front passenger’s seat or used by

the person sitting in the front pas-

senger’s seat, may affect the opera-

tion of the occupant detection sys-

tem. If the occupant detection sys-

tem warning light illuminates or

operates erratically when using an

electronic device in the vehicle, at

first try to relocate that device to

avoid it creating any interference. If

the device continues to cause inter-

ference, the use of that device in the

vehicle should be discontinued.

NOTE

This device complies with Part 18 of

the FCC Rules. This device may cause

interference. If this device causes inter-

ference, consult the nearest SUBARU

dealer. Also, for maintenance of the

system, consult the nearest SUBARU

dealer. This product may cause inter-

ference to radio equipment and should

not be installed near maritime safety

1-42

communications equipment or other

critical navigation or communication

equipment operating between 0.45-30

MHz.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding the

front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with an appro-

priate child restraint system and an infant

is restrained in it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT

IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT

EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS

DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it

in the REAR seat in a correct

manner. Also, it is strongly recom-

mended that any forward fa cing

child seat or booster seat be in-

stalled in the REAR seat, and that

even children who have outgrown a

child restraint system be also

seated in the REAR seat. This is

because children sitting in the front

passenger’s seat may be killed or

severely injured should the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

ploy. REAR seats are the safest

place for children.

CAUTION

When the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an infant in an appro-

priate child restraint system, ob-

serve the following precautions.

Failure to do so may interfere with

the proper operation of the occu-

pant detection system, activating

the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even though that seat is

occupied by the infant in the child

restraint system.

. Do not place any article (includ-

ing electronic devices) on the

seat other than the infant in the

child restraint system.

. Do not place more than one

infant in the child restraint sys-

tem.

! If the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates

and the OFF indicator turns off

even when an infant or a small

child is in a child restraint sys-

tem (including booster seat)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Remove the child restraint system

from the seat.

3. By referring to the child restraint

manufacturer’s recommendations as well

as the child restraint system installation

procedures in “Child restraint systems”

F1-21, correctly install the child restraint

system.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and make sure that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off, take the

following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-43

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off after

taking relevant corrective actions de-

scribed above, relocate the child restraint

system to the rear seat and immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. Children should always wear a

seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-

spective of whether the airbag is

deactivated or activated. If the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is acti-

vated (the ON indicator remains illumi-

nated while the OFF indicator turns off),

ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the OFF indicator turns off

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child/

small adult in the rear seat and im-

mediately contact your SUBARU dealer

for an inspection. Even if the system

has passed the dealer inspection, it is

recommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be act ivated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions are met regarding the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)

are placed on the seat.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and

the ON indicator turns off even

when the front passenger’s seat

is occupied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incor-

rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated

while the ON indicator remains off, take

the following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Make sure that the front passenger

does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat

cover, seat heater or massager, etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,

the front passenger should remove any

unnecessary items before sitting in the

front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a

rear seat.

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow the

system to complete self-checking. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator

should illuminate while the OFF indicator

remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-

1-44

nated while the ON indicator remains off,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

! How to contact the vehicle manu-

facturer concerning modifications

for persons with disabilities that

may affect the advanced airbag

system

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,

front side frame, radiator panel, instrument

panel, combination meter, steering wheel,

steering column, tire, suspension or floor

panel can affect the opera tion of the

SUBARU advanced airbag system. If

you have any questions, you may contact

the following SUBARU distributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Dealer Services Department

P.O. Box 6000

Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii

2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,

Honolulu, HI 96819-4467

808-839-2273

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-

bile

491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1

Dededo, Guam 96921-6225

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc.

Consumer Support Department

560 Suffork Court, Mississauga, Ontario

L5R 4J7

1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distribu-

tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are

in such an ar ea, please c ontact the

SUBARU distributor or dealer from which

you bought your vehicle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-45

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Operation

A) Driver’s side

B) Passenger’s side

1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the

activation or deactivation condition of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the characteristic of item

(s) or person on the front passenger’s seat

monitored by the front passenger’s occu-

pant detection system sensor. For this

reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag may depl oy in the event of a

collision, but this does not mean failure

of the system.

If the front sub sensors and the impact

sensors in the airbag control module

detect a predetermined amount of force

during a f rontal collision, the control

module sends signals to the airbag

module(s) (only driver’s module or both

driver’s and front passenger’s modules)

instructing the module(s) to inflate the

SRS frontal airbag(s). On driver’s side, the

SRS knee airbag also inflates with the

SRS frontal airbag.

1-46

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.

The two inflators of each airbag are

triggered either sequentially or simulta-

neously, depending on the severity of

impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS

frontal airbag an d dependin g on the

severity of impact and the characteristic

of item(s) or person on the seat in the case

of the front passenger ’s SRS frontal

airbag.

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-

diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed. The time required

from detecting impact to the deflation of

the SRS airbag after deployment is short-

er than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS

airbag would activate in a non-accident

situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag

will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision

and will not interfere with the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be r eleased. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed to deploy in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe

frontal collision. They are not designed to

deploy in most lesser frontal im pacts

because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they

are not designed to deploy in most side or

rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents

because deployment of only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not help the occupant in those

situations. The driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to

function on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

! Example of accident in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

will most likely deploy

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-47

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

magnitude to the collision des cribed

above.

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which it is possible that

the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the

vehicle sustains a hard impact in the

undercarriage area from the road surface

(such as when the vehicle plunges into a

deep ditch, is severely impacted or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the

road such as a curb).

1-48

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of

a truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal

collision.

5) The vehicle strikes an object that can

move or deform, such as a parked

vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver ’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of

accidents like those illustrated, the dri-

ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-

ing on the level of accident forces in-

volved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-49

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the driver’s/dri-

ver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) will basically

not deploy

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy

in the following cases.

. If the vehicle is struck from the side or

from behind

. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed

frontal collision

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will not

be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback.

Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s chest and

1-50

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

for front seat occupants.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of

the cabin is sto red in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point over

the rear seat).

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side

window and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the vehicle deploy between the

occupant and the side window and sup-

plement the seatbelt by reducing the

impact to the occupant’s head.

In a frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags

on both sides of the vehicle deploy

between the occupant and the side

window and supplement the seatbelt by

reducing the impact to the occupant’s

head.

WARNING

The SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are designed only to

be a suppl ement to the primary

protection provided by the seatbelt.

They do not do away with the need

to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor-

tant to wear your seatbelt to help

avoid injuries that can result when

an occupant is not seated in a

proper upright position.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The

SRS side airbag is stored in both

front seat seatbacks next to the

door, and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event of

a side impact collision. However,

theforceofSRSsideairbag

deployment may cause injuries

if your head or other parts of the

body are too close to the SRS

side airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the front or rear door on either

side. Also, do not put your head,

arms or hands out of the window.

The SRS curtain airbag on each

side of the cabin is stored in the

roof side (between the front pillar

and a point over the rear seat),

and it provides protection by

deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event

of a side impact. However, the

force of its deployment may

cause injuries if yo ur head is

too close to it.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-51

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

WARNING

Do not rest your arm on either front

door or its internal trim. It could be

injured in the event of SRS side

airbag deployment.

WARNING

. Never allow a child to kneel on

the front passenger’s seat facing

the side window or to wrap his/

her arms around the front seat

seatback. In the event of an

accident, the force of the SRS

side airbag deployment could

injure the child seriously be-

cause his/her head or arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag.

Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children

should be placed in the rear seat

anyway and should be properly

restrained at all times.

. Never allow a child to kneel on

any passenger’s seat facing the

side window or put their head,

arms and hands out of the win-

dow. In the event of an accident,

the force of the SRS curtain

airbag deployment could injure

the child seriously because his/

her head is close to the SRS

curtain airbag.

1-52

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of the SRS side airbag

deployment, they could be pro-

pelled dangerousl y toward the

vehicle’s occupants and cause

injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to

a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near

a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

A hands-free microphone or

other accessory in such a loca-

tion could be propelled through

the cabin with great force by the

curtain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

. Never hang or place coat hangers

or other hard or pointed objects

near the side windows. If such

items are present when the SRS

curtain airbags deploy, they

could be thrown through the

passenger compartment and

cause serious injuries. They

could also prevent proper opera-

tion of the SRS curtain airbags.

WARNING

. Do not put any kind of clothes or

other objects over either front

seatback and do not attach labels

or stickers to the front seat sur-

face on or near the SRS side

airbag. They could prevent prop-

er deployment of the SRS side

airbag, reducing protection avail-

able to the front seat’s occupant.

. Do not use a seat cover. However,

a seat cover can be used if it is

designed exclusively for use with

a SUBARU genuine SRS airbag.

Even when using a SUBARU

genuine seat cover, the SRS side

airbag system may not function

normally if the seat cover is not

installed correctly.

! Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

side airbags and SRS curtain airbags

deploy independently of each other since

each has its own impact sensor. There-

fore, they may not both deploy in the same

accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-53

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

SRS curtain airbag deploys independently

of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags in the steering wheel and

instrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impact

force, is located in each of the following

locations.

. In the left and right front doors

. In the left and right center pillars

. In the left and right rear wheel houses

. Under the rear center seat

. On both sides of the radiator panel

(frontal impact sensor)

The rollover sensor and frontal impact

sensor are located inside the airbag

control module, which is located under

the center of the instrument panel.

If the impact sensor that is located under

the rear center seat and one of the center

pillar impact sensors or front door impact

sensors together sense an impact force

above a predetermined level in a side

collision, the control module causes both

the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on

the impacted side to inflate regardless of

whether the rear wheel ho use impact

sensor on the same side senses an

impact.

If the impact sensor that is located under

the rear center seat and one of the rear

wheel house impact sensors together

sense an impact force above a predeter-

mined level in a side collision, the control

module causes only the SRS curtain

airbag on the impacted side to inflate.

Even if a frontal collision occurs, the SRS

curtain airbags will deploy when the front

sensor and the control unit determine that

the impact results from an offset frontal

collision.

The SRS curtain airbags are designed to

deploy when the driver ’sSRSfrontal

airbag deploys or the driver’s and pas-

senger ’s SRS frontal airbags deploy in a

frontal collision, and also when the system

determines that the collision is an offset

frontal collision. The SRS curtain airbags

are basically designed not to deploy in a

frontal collision when the SRS frontal

airbags do not dep loy or the system

determines that the collision is other than

an offset frontal collision.

If the rollover sensor detects a vehicle

rollover, the control module inflates the

SRS curtain airbags on both sides. At this

time, the driver’s seatbelt pretensioner

and front passenger’s seatbelt preten-

sioner (shoulder belt pretensioner only)

also operate simultaneously.

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag

immediately starts to deflate. The time

required from detection of an impact to

deflation of an SRS side airbag after

deployment is shorter than the blink of

an eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be released. These occur-

rences are a normal result of the deploy-

ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire

in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

1-54

part of the SRS curtain airbag

system (from the front pillar to the

part of the roof side over the rear

seat). Doing so can cause burns

because the components can be

very hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed to deploy in the event

of an accident involving a moderate to

severe side impact collision. They are not

designed to deploy in most lesser side

impact. Also, they are not designed to

deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts

because SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deployment would not help

the occupant in those situations.

The SRS curtain airbags are also de-

signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an

extremely inclined state such as during a

rollover. They are not designed to deploy

in most less inclined states.

Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed to function on a one-

time-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

! Example of the type of accident

in which the SRS side airbag will

most likely deploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-55

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most

likely deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear

seat.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-

stone laterally.

4) The vehicle is involved in an offset frontal

collision that is severe enough to deploy

the front airbag.

1-56

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely

to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment. In the event of accidents like

those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag may not deploy

depending on the level of accident forces

involved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-57

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is

unlikely to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS curtain

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

1-58

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag

are not designed to deploy in

most cases

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the eve nt of accidents like th ose

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not designed to deploy

in most cases.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

A) SRS curtain airbag

B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven. The

SRS airbag system warning light will show

normal system operation by illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-59

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– Right-hand side

– Left-hand side

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensor and rollover sensor)

. Frontal airbag module

– Driver’s side

– Front passenger’s side

. Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

. Side airbag sensor

– Center pillar right-hand side

– Center pillar left-hand side

. Front door impact sensor

– Right-hand side

– Left-hand side

. Side airbag module

– Driver’s side

– Front passenger’s side

. Curtain airbag sensor

– Rear wheel house right-hand side

– Rear wheel house left-hand side

. Curtain airbag module

– Right-hand side

– Left-hand side

. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

. Seatbelt pretensioner

– Driver’s side

– Front passenger’s side

. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen-

ger’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger’s side)

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

Immediatelytakeyourvehicleto

your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, consult your

nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-

ing with or disconnecting the

system’s wiring could result in

accidental inflation of the SRS

airbag or could make the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

indicated in the following list, have

1-60

the work performed by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-

bag control module, impact sensors

and airbag modules are stored in

these areas.

. Under the center of the instru-

ment panel

. On both the right and left sides at

the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column

and nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’ssideandnearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver ’s and front passenger ’sSRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

. The center pillar, front door, rear

wheel house or rear sub frame, or an

area near these parts, was involved in

an ac cident in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not

deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either the

front seatback and seat cushion is cut,

frayed, or otherwise damaged.

. The rear part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may re-

sult in serious injury, no modifi-

cations should be made to any

components or wiring of the SRS

airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions.

– Installation of custom steering

wheels

– Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

– Installation of custom seats

– Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

– Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

– Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other ac-

cessory to a front pillar, a

center pillar, a rear pillar, the

windshield, a side window, an

assist grip, or any other cabin

surface that would be near a

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

– CONTINUED –

1-61

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

deploying SRS curtain airbag.

– Installation of additional elec-

trical/electronic equipment

such as a mobile two-way

radio on or near the SRS

airbag system components

and/or wiring is not advisable.

This could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er ’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on

your vehicle.

1-62

Keys ..................................................................... 2-3

Key number plate................................................ 2-3

Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3

Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4

Key replacement ................................................. 2-4

Certification for immobilizer system..................... 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-5

Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-7

Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-7

Power door locking switches............................. 2-8

Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-9

Keyless access with push-button start

system (if equipped) ........................................ 2-9

Safety precautions ............................................. 2-10

Locking and unlocking with “keyless access”

entry function................................................... 2-13

Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-16

Warning chimes and warning indicator ............... 2-16

Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-16

When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-18

Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-18

Replacing access key......................................... 2-18

Certification for keyless access with push-button

start system ..................................................... 2-18

PIN Code Access (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”)........ 2-19

Registering a PIN code....................................... 2-20

Unlocking .......................................................... 2-21

Remote keyless entry syst em ........................... 2-21

Locking the doors .............................................. 2-22

Unlocking the doors .......................................... 2-22

Opening the trunk lid ......................................... 2-23

Vehicle finder function ....................................... 2-23

Sounding a panic alarm ..................................... 2-23

Selecting audible signal operation (models

without “keyless access with push-button start

system”).......................................................... 2-23

Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-24

Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-24

Welcome lighting (if equipped) ........................... 2-24

Certification for Remote keyless entry

system ............................................................ 2-24

Alarm system ..................................................... 2-25

System operation............................................... 2-26

Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-26

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system ............................................................ 2-26

Arming the system ............................................ 2-27

Disarming the system ........................................ 2-29

Valet mode ........................................................ 2-30

Passive arming (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”) ....................... 2-30

Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-31

Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-31

Child safety locks .............................................. 2-32

Windows............................................................. 2-32

Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-33

Power window operation by passengers............. 2-35

Initialization of power window ............................ 2-36

Trunk lid ............................................................. 2-37

To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-37

Keys and doors

To open the trunk lid from inside ........................ 2-37

Internal trunk lid release handle.......................... 2-37

Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-39

Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-40

Sun shade ......................................................... 2-41

Keys

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, refer to

“Keyless access with push-button start

system” F2-9.

1) Master key

2) Submaster key

3) Sub key

4) Key number plate

Three types of keys are provided for your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the “ON” position to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position, thereby

stopping the engine.

& Key number plate

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.

Write down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-4.

Immobilizer

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can

be used to operate your vehicle. This

system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft

guaranty.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

If you press the push-button ignition

switch when carrying an unregistered

access key, the switch will not turn to the

“ON” position and the engine will not start.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

Even if an unregistered key fits into the

ignition switch and can be turned to the

“START” position, the engine will auto-

matically stop after several seconds.

If the engine does not start, perform either

of the following procedures.

. Perform the procedure described in

“Starting engine” F9-17 (models with

“keyless acc ess with push-button start

system”).

. Pull out the key once before trying

again (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”). Refer to

Keys and doors/Keys

– CONTINUED –

2-3

Keys and doors/Immobilizer

“Ignition switch (models without push-

button start system)” F3-4.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may

become hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

. Donotmodifyorremovethe

system. If modified or removed,

the proper operation of the sys-

tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the fol-

lowing security precautions:

– Never leave your vehicle unat-

tended with its keys inside.

– Before leaving your vehicle,

close all windows and the moon-

roof, and lock the doors.

– Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type immobilizer system.

& Security indicator light

Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-33.

& Key replacement

Your key number plate will be required if

you ever need a replacement key made.

Any new key must be registered for use

with your vehicle’s immobili zer system

before it can be used. The maximum

number of keys that can be registered

for use with one vehicle is as follows.

. Four (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

. Seven (models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

One key that has already been registered

is required in order to register a new key.

If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still

remains in the memory of the vehicle’s

immobilizer system. For security reasons,

the lost key’s ID code should be erased

from the memory. To erase the lost key’s

ID code, all keys that will be used are

required.

For details about new key registration and

erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for immobilizer

system

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Refer to “Certification for keyless access

with push-button start system” F2-18.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

! U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

2-4

! Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard

(s). Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables

aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne

doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)

l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

! Mexico-spec. models

Door locks

& Locking and unlocking from

the outside

NOTE

If you unlock the driver’s door with a

key (including a mechanical key) and

open the door while the alarm system

is armed, the alarm system is triggered

and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this

case, perform any of the following

operations:

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Press any button on the access key

(except when the access key battery is

discharged).

. Turn the push-button ignition switch

to the “ACC” position.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Press any button on the remote

transmitter (except when the transmit-

ter battery is discharged).

. Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

For details about the alarm system,

refer to “Alarm system” F2-25.

Keys and doors/Door locks

– CONTINUED –

2-5

Keys and doors/Door locks

To lock the driver’s door from the outside

with the key, turn the key toward the front.

To unlock the door, turn the key toward the

rear. Pull the outside door handle to open

an unlocked door.

NOTE

The mechanical key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is

facing and insert it again.

To lock the door from outside without the

key, the following methods are available.

Locking using lock lever

1) Rotate the lock lever forward.

2) Close the door.

2-6

Locking using power door locking switch

1) Press the front side (lock side) of the

power door locking switch.

2) Close the door.

In this case, all closed doors are locked at

the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the

trunk lid are locked before leaving your

vehicle.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle when locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking from

the inside

1) Unlock

2) Lock

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever forward. To unlock the door from

the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the

trunk lid are closed before starting to drive.

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of

being thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out by preventing a door

from being accidentally opened, and

intruders from unexpectedly open-

ing doors and entering your vehicle.

& Battery drainage prevention

function

If a door is not completely closed, the

interior lights will remain illuminated as a

result. However, several lights will be

automatically turned off by the battery

drainage prevention function to prevent

the battery from discharging. The following

interior lights will be affected by this

function.

Keys and doors/Door locks

– CONTINUED –

2-7

Keys and doors/Power door locking switches

Item

Switch

position

Automatically turning

off

Map lights* OFF*

Approximately 20

minutes later

Dome light DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

Ignition

switch light

—

Approximately 20

minutes later

Trunk light —

Approximately 20

minutes later

*: The battery drainage prevention function

affects only the map lights on models with the

moonroof, and only when the map light

switches are in the OFF position. The map

lights on models without the moonroof do not

turn off automatically, so push the light switches

manually to turn them off.

The operational/non-operational setting of

this function can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer to change the setting.

NOTE

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “operational”.

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

that all doors and the trunk lid are

completely closed.

. The battery drainage prevention

function does not operate while the

key is in the ignition switch.

Power door locking switches

1) Lock

2) Unlock

All doors can be locked and unlocked by

the power door locking switches located at

the driver’s side and the front passenger’s

side doors.

To lock the doors, push the front side of

the switch.

To unlock the doors, push the rear side of

the switch.

When you close the doors after you set

the door locks, the doors remain locked.

2-8

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

This function prevents the doors from

being locked under the following condi-

tions.

. The key is still in the ignition switch

(models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position (models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

This function ’s operational/non-opera-

tional setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Conta ct a SUBARU

dealer for details.

NOTE

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “operational”.

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function operational

With the driver’s door open, the doors are

automatically kept unlocked even if the

front side of the power door locking switch

is pressed.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function non-operational

. If the lock lever is turned to the front

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the

driver’s door is locked.

. If the spare key is used to lock the

driver’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

Keyless access with push-

button start system (if

equipped)

1) Access key (main)

2) Access key (sub)

3) Key number plate

The vehicle has two access keys and a

key number plate. For details about the

key number plate, refer to “Key number

plate” F2-3.

The keyless access with push-button start

system allows you to perform the following

functions when you are carrying the

access key.

. Locking and unlocking of the doors and

unlocking of the trunk

. Opening the trunk

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

– CONTINUED –

2-9

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

. Starting and stopping the engine. For

detailed information, refer to “Starting and

stopping engine (models with push-button

start system)” F7-12.

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For detailed information, refer to

“Alarm system” F2-25.

Locking and unlocking by the remote

keyless entry system can also be con-

trolled with the buttons on the access key.

For detailed information, refer to “Remote

keyless entry system” F2-21.

A mechanical key is attached to each

access key. The mechanical key is used

for the following operations.

. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door

. Locking and unlocking the glove box

You cannot unlock the glove box without

using the mechanical key. You can keep

the glove box locked when you leave your

vehicle and the access key (with the

mechanical key removed) at a parking

facility.

1) Release button

2) Mechanical key

While pressing the release button of the

access key, take out the mechanical key.

& Safety precautions

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, stay at

least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the

transmitting antennas installed on

the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmit-

ting antennas on the vehicle could

adversely affect the operation of

implanted pacemakers and im-

planted defibrillators.

If you wear electric medical equip-

ment other than an implanted pace-

maker or an implanted defibrillator,

before using the keyless access

with push-button start system, refer

to “Radio waves used for the key-

less access with push-button start

system” mentioned later, and con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for more information.

The radio waves from the transmit-

ting antennas on the vehicle could

adversely affect the operation of the

electric medical equipment.

“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”

. The keyless access with push-

button start system uses radio

waves of the following fre-

quency* in addition to the radio

waves used for the remote key-

less entry system. The radio

waves are periodically output

from the antennas installed on

the vehicle as shown in the

following illustrations.

* Radio frequency: 134 kHz

2-10

1) Antenna

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access

key inside the vehicle (e.g., on

the instrumental panel, inside the

glove box, on the seat, in the

door pocket or on the rear shelf)

or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the

vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The

access key may be locked inside

the vehicle, or the battery may

discharge rapidly. Note that the

push-button ignition switch may

not turn on in some cases de-

pending on the location of the

access key.

. The access key contains electro-

nic components. Ob serve the

following precautions to prevent

malfunctions.

– Although you can replace the

battery of the acce ss key

yourself, it is recommended

that the battery be replaced by

a SUBARU dealer to avoid the

risk of damage at the time of

replacement.

– Do not get the access key wet.

If the access key gets wet,

wipe it off immediately and let

it dry completely.

– Do not apply strong impacts

to the access key.

– Keep the access key away

from magnetic sources.

– Never leave the access key in

direct su nlight or anywhere

that may become hot, such

as on the dashboard. It may

damage the battery or cause

circuit malfunctions.

– Do not wash the access key in

an ultrasonic washer.

– Do not leave the access key in

humid or dusty locations.

Doing so may cause malfunc-

tions.

– Do not leave the access key

near personal computers or

home electric appliances.

Doing so may cause the ac-

cess key to malfunction, re-

sulting in battery discharge.

. If the access key is dropped, the

integrated mechanical key inside

may become loose. Be careful

not to lose the mechanical key.

. When you carry the access key

on an airplane, do not press the

button of the access key while in

the airplane. When any button of

the access key is pressed, radio

waves are sent and may affect

the operati on of the airplane.

When you carry the access key

in a bag on an airplane, take

measures to prevent the buttons

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

– CONTINUED –

2-11

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

of the access key from being

pressed.

NOTE

. The operational/non-operational

setting for the keyless access function

can be changed. For the setting proce-

dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-

cess function” F2-16. The setting can

also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

. For detailed information about the

operation method for the push-button

ignition switch while the keyless ac-

cess function is switched to the non-

operational mode, refer to “Access key

– if access key does not operate

properly” F9-16.

. The keyless access with push-but-

ton start system uses weak radio

waves. The status of the access key

and environmental conditions may in-

terfere with the communication be-

tween the access key and the vehicle

under the following conditions, and it

may not be possible to lock or unlock

the doors or start the engine.

– When operating near a facility

where strong radio waves are trans-

mitted, such as a broadcast station

and power transmission lines

– When products that transmit

radio waves are used, such as an

access key or a remote transmitter

key of another vehicle

– When carrying the access key of

your vehicle together with an ac-

cess key or a remote transmitter of

another vehicle

– When the access key is placed

near wireless communication

equipment such as a cell phone

– When the access key is placed

near a metallic object

– When metallic accessories are

attached to the access key

– When carrying the access key

with electronic appliances such as

a laptop computer

– When the battery of the access

key is discharged

. The access key is always commu-

nicating with the vehicle and is con-

tinuously using the battery. Although

the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, it is ap-

proximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery

becomes fully discharged, replace it

with a new one.

. If an access key is lost, it is

recommended that the remaining ac-

cess key be reregistered. For reregis-

tration of an access key, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

. For a spare access key, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

. Up to 7 access keys can be regis-

tered for one vehicle.

. Carefully store the key number plate

supplied with the access key. It is

necessary for vehicle repair.

. Do not leave the access key in the

storage spaces inside the vehicle, such

as the door pocket, dashboard and the

rear shelf. Vibrations may damage the

key or turn on the switch, possibly

resulting in a lockout.

. After the vehicle battery is dis-

charged or replaced, initialization of

the steering lock system may be re-

quired to start the engine. In this case,

perform the following procedure to

initialize the steering lock.

) Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. For

details, refer to “Switching power

status” F3-7.

(2) Open and close the driver’s

door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

When the steering is locked, the initi-

alization is completed.

2-12

& Locking and unlocking with

“keyless access” entry func-

tion

! Operating ranges

1) Antenna

2) Operating range

The operating ranges of the door locking/

unlocking functions and the trunk lid

unlocking function are approximately 16

to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the respective

door handles and the trunk ornament.

1) LED indicator

When the access key is within either of the

operating ranges of the front doors, the

LED indicator on the access key flashes.

When the keyless access functions are

disabled, the LED indicator does not flash

unless a button on the access key is

pressed.

! Operating range tips

. Locking by using the keyless access

function can be operated only by the door

lock sensor in the operating range in

which the access key is detected.

. Unlocking by using the keyless access

function can be operated only by the door

handle in the operating range in which the

access key is detected.

. If the access key is placed too close to

the vehicle body, the keyless access

function may not operate properly. If they

do not operate properly, repeat the opera-

tion from further away.

. If the access key is placed near the

ground or in an elevated location from the

ground, even if it is in the indica te d

operating range, the keyless access func-

tion may not operate properly.

. When the access key is within the

operating range, it is possible for anyone,

even someone who is not carrying the

access key, to operate the keyless access

function. Note that locking and unlocking

can be operated only by the door handle,

door lock sensor or trunk lid opener button

in the operating range in which the access

key is detected.

. It is not possible to lock the doors using

the keyless access function wh en the

access key is inside the vehicle. However,

depending on the status of the access key

and the environmental conditions, the

access key may be locked inside the

vehicle. Before locking, make sure that

you have the access key.

. When the battery of the access key is

discharged, or when operating it in a

location with strong radio waves or noise

(e.g., near a radio tower, power plant,

broadcast station or an area where wire-

less equipment is used), or while talking

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

– CONTINUED –

2-13

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

on a cell phone, the operating ranges may

be reduced, or the keyless access func-

tion may not operate.

In such a case, perform the procedure

described in “Locking and unlocking” F9-

16.

. When an access key is in the operating

range, if the door handle becomes wet

due to exposure to a significant amount of

water when the vehicle i s washed or

during heavy rain, the doors may be

locked or unlocked.

. The keyless access function may not

operate properly depending on the status

of the access key and the radio wave

conditions around the vehicle. In such a

case, perform the procedure described in

“Locking and unlocking” F9-16.

! How to use keyless access func-

tions

! Keyless access function tips

. When you lock the doors using the

keyless access function, turn the push-

button ignition switch off. It is not possible

to lock the doors using the keyless access

function when the push-button ignition

switch is on the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Refer to “Switching power status” F3-7.

. If the door handle is gripped or the door

lock sensor is touched with a gloved hand,

the door lock may not be operated.

. If the door lock sensor is touched three

times or more repeatedly, the system will

ignore the sensor operation.

. When performing the locking proce-

dure too quickly, locking may not have

been completed. After locking the doors, it

is recommended to pull the REAR door

handles to confirm that the doors have

been locked.

. It is possible to lock the doors even

when one of the doors is open. After

performing the locking procedure, close

the opened door to lock it.

. Within 3 seconds after locking the

doors by using the keyless access func-

tion, it is not possible to unlock doors by

using the keyless access function.

. When locking, be sure to carry the

access key to prevent locking the access

key in the vehicle.

. The setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation and the volume of the

audible signal can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details.

. The setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation can also be changed

by operating the multi function display. For

details, refer to “Hazard warning flasher

setting” F3-86.

! Unlocking

Carry the access key, and grip the door

handle.

. When the driver’s door handle is

gripped, only the driver’s door will be

unlocked.

. When the front passenger’s door han-

dle is gripped, all doors will be unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

2-14

! Opening trunk

1) Trunk lid opener button

Carry the access key, and press the trunk

lid opener button. Only the trunk lid will be

unlocked and opened. Also, an electronic

chirp will sound twice and the hazard

warning flashers will flash twice.

! Locking

1) Door lock sensor (above and below)

Carry the access key, close all doors and

the trunk lid and touch the door lock

sensor on the door handle. All doors will

be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will

sound once and the hazard warning

flashers will flash once.

NOTE

After touching the door lock sensor to

lock all of the doors, if you touch the

door lock sensor once more to attempt

the lock operation without first unlock-

ing the doors, nothing will happen,

even if the door lock sensor is touched.

In this case, perform the unlocking

operation once first. You can then

touch the door lock sensor to lock the

doors.

! Power saving function

The keyless access function will be

disabled in the following cases to protect

the access key battery and the vehicle

battery.

Case 1: When the keyless access func-

tion and the remote keyless entry system

have not been used for 2 weeks or longer

while all doors are locked

Case 2: When the access key has been

left in the operating range for 10 minutes

or longer while all doors are locked

! Recovery from power saving

mode

When one of the following is operated, the

keyless access function will be recovered.

Case 1:

. Unlock the doors by operating any

procedure other than gripping the front

passenger’s door handle

. Lock or unlock the doors

. Open a door and then close it

Case 2:

. Unlock the doors by gripping the door

handle

. Lock the doors by touching the door

lock sensor

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

– CONTINUED –

2-15

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

. Lock or unlock the doors by using the

remote keyless entry system

. Lock or unlock the doors by using the

power door locking switch

. Open either of the front doors

! Door unlock selection function

The door unlock selection function makes

it possible to unlock the driver’s door

without unlocking any other doors. You

can change the setting for the driver’s

door.

Operational: Only the driver’s door will be

unlocked.

Non-operational: All doors will be un-

locked.

For the factory setting (default setting),

refer to “Function settings” F25.

NOTE

The setting can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details. Also, the setting can

be changed by operating the multi

function display. For details, refer to

“Keyless access setting (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”)” F3-91.

& Selecting audible signal op-

eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may

change the volume of the audible signal

or turn it off. For details, refer to “Keyless

buzzer volume setting” F3-86.

& Warning chimes and warning

indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and

flashes the access key warning indicator

on the combination meter in order to

minimize improper operations and help

protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to “Warning chimes and

warning indicator of the keyless access

with push-button start system” F3-28.

& Disabling keyless access

function

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, operate

the driver ’s door to disable the

keyless access function. Otherwise,

the operation of an implanted pace-

maker or implanted defibrillator may

be affected by the radio waves from

the transmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to

use the keyless access function, the

keyless access function can be disabled.

NOTE

. The locking and unlocking function

by the remote keyless entry system is

not disabled.

. The setting can also be changed at

SUBARU dealers. For more details,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

. To start the engine while the func-

tions are disabled, perform the proce-

dure described in “Starting engine”

F9-17.

. We recommend that you disable the

keyless acc ess functions under the

following conditions.

– When the vehicle is not going to

be used for an extended period of

time

– When the keyless access func-

tions are not going to be used

2-16

! Disabling functions

! By operating the access key

If you have registered a PIN code for PIN

Code Access, you can disable the keyless

access function by operating the access

key. For details about registering a PIN

code, refer to “Registering a PIN code”

F2-20.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. Rotate the lock lever forward.

3. Press and hold the “ ” button and

“

” button on the access key simulta-

neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the

function will be disabled.

! By operating the driver’s door

1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the

door.

2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the

power door locking switch.

3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is

performed, open the driver’s door.

4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is

performed, push the rear side (unlock

side) of the power door locking switch

twice while the door is open.

5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is

performed, close and open the driver’s

door twice.

6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is

performed, push the rear side (unlock

side) of the power door locking switch

twice while the door is open.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

– CONTINUED –

2-17

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system

7. Within 10 seconds after st ep 6 is

performed, close and open the driver’s

door once.

8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is

performed, close the door. A chirp sound

will be heard, and the functions will be

disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door

locking switch slowly. If the switch is

pressed quickly, the functions may not

be disabled.

! Enabling functions

When the procedure to disable the func-

tions is performed again, the functions are

enabled.

A chirp sound will be heard once.

NOTE

. The keyless access function will be

enabled only if you perform the proce-

dure in the same manner you disabled

the function (for example, when dis-

abling by operating the driver’s door,

the function will not be enabled even if

you operate the access key).

. Press the push-button ignition

switch if you do not know the proce-

dure in which the keyless access

function was disabled.

– When disabling by operating the

driver’s door: a chirp will not be

heard

– When disabling by operating the

access key: a chirp will be heard

& When access key does not

operate properly

Refer to “Access key – if access key does

not operate properly ” F9-16.

& Replacing battery of access

key

Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”

F11-50.

& Replacing access key

Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU

dealers. For m ore details, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system

! U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ13CZZ

FCC ID: HYQ14AHC

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

2-18

! Canada-spec. models

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard

(s). Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Le présent appareil est conform e aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux

appareils radio exempts de licence. L’ex-

ploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-

tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur

de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage

radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage

est susceptible d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

! Mexico-spec. models

IFT

RLVDE1413-2269

14AHC

DENSO

PIN Code Access (models

with “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

1) Trunk lid opener button

While all doors are locked, you can unlock

the doors without a key by operating the

trunk lid opener button.

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the

key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It

is recommended that a 5-digit security

code (PIN code) is registered.

Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push–button start system”)

– CONTINUED –

2-19

Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push–button start system”)

& Registering a PIN code

! Preparation

1. Close all doors (including the trunk).

2. Press and hold the “

” button on the

access key. Then all doors (including the

trunk) will be locked.

3. Keep the “

” button pressed, and

press the trunk lid opener button within 5

seconds after step 2.

4. Press and hold the above button for

more than 5 seconds. Then a chirp will

sound.

5. Press the “

” button on the access key

while the chirp sounds.

Then the chirp will stop and the prepara-

tion is complete.

NOTE

If you do not press the “ ” button on

the access key, the chirp will sound for

30 seconds. In this case, the prepara-

tion for registering a PIN code does not

complete even if the chirp stops.

! Registration

For example, to register “32468” as the

PIN code, perform the following proce-

dure.

1. Press the trunk lid opener button three

times.

2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,

press the trunk lid opener button twice.

3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,

press the trunk lid opener button four

times.

4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,

press the trunk lid opener button six times.

5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,

press the trunk lid opener button eight

times.

6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within

approximately 30 seconds after the buz-

zer starts sounding intermittently.

7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.

Then the PIN code will be registered.

NOTE

. If you make an error during the

registration procedure, open the dri-

ver’s door and then close it. Then, start

over from the procedure described in

“Preparation”.

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

you cannot register “00000”, “11111” to

“99999” or “12345” as a PIN code.

. Do not register your vehicle license

plate number or simple numbers such

as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.

Doing so will increase the risk of

vehicle theft.

. When you try to register “22222”,

the registered PIN code will be deleted.

You cannot unlock the doors by PIN

Code Access until a new code is

registered.

. After registering a new PIN code,

make sure that you can unlock the

doors using the PIN code.

. When you delete the PIN code while

the keyless access function is dis-

abled, the keyless access function will

be enabled.

. Reregister the PIN code in the

following case.

– when you forget the PIN code

– when you want to change the PIN

code

2-20

& Unlocking

Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis-

tration”.

NOTE

. You cannot unlock by PIN Code

Access in the following cases.

– when the access key is within the

operating ranges

– when the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position

. If you m ake an operation error

during the unlocking procedure, start

over with the unlocking procedure after

waiting for 5 seconds or longer.

. To protect your vehicle from theft, a

buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes

are entered five times continuously. If

this occ urs, you cannot unlock the

doors by PIN Code Access for 5

minutes.

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-

mitter to severe shocks, such as

those experienced as a result of

dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit-

ter apart except when replacing

the battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter

wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with

a cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-

mitteronanairplane,donot

press the button of the remote

transmitter while in the airplane.

When any button of the remote

transmitter is pressed, radio

waves are sent and may affect

the operation of the airplane.

When you carry the remote trans-

mitter in a bag on an airplane,

take measures to prevent the

buttons of the remote transmitter

from being pressed.

For models w ith “keyless access with

push-button start system”, the access

key is used as the transmitter for the

remote keyless entry system. For models

without “keyless access with push-button

start system”, the transmitte r for the

remote keyless entry system is located

inside the key head.

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking the doors with-

out a key

. Opening the trunk without a key

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For detailed information, refer to

“Alarm system” F2-25.

The operable distance of the remote

keyless entry system is approximately 30

feet (10 meters). However, this distance

will vary depending on environmental

conditions. The system’s operable dis-

tance will be shorter in areas near a

facility or electronic equipment emitting

strong radio waves such as a power plant,

broadcast station, TV tower, or remote

controller of home electronic appliances.

NOTE

. For models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”,the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the push-button

ignition switch is in any position other

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

– CONTINUED –

2-21

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

than the “OFF” position.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button sta rt system”,the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the key is inserted in

the ignition switch.

Access key

1) Lock/arm button

2) Unlock/disarm button

3) Trunk lid unlock button

4) PANIC button

Transmitter

1) Lock/arm button

2) Unlock/disarm button

3) Trunk lid unlock button

4) PANIC button

NOTE

The hazard warning flashers will flash

once or twice when the transmitter

button is pressed in the following

cases.

– When locking the doors

– When unlocking the doors

– When unlocking the trunk lid

Operation of the hazard warning

flashers in the above cases can be set

to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails. Also, the setting can be changed

using the display. For details, refer to

“Hazard warning flasher setting” F3-

86.

& Locking the doors

Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors.

An electronic chirp will sound once and

the h azar d warning flashers will flash

once.

If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound

five times and the hazard warning flashers

will flash five times to alert you that the

doors (or the trunk lid) are not properly

closed. When you close the door, it will

automatically lock and then an electronic

chirp will sound once and the hazard

warning flashers will flash once.

& Unlocking the doors

Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock

the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will

sound twice and the hazard warning

flashers will flash twice. To unlock all

doors, briefly press the unlock /disarm

button a second time within 5 seconds.

2-22

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the unlock/disarm

button (for unlocking of all of the

doors) is extremely short, the system

may not respond.

& Opening the trunk lid

The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button

is pressed continuously for at least 2

seconds. An electronic chirp will sound

twice and the turn signal lights will flash

twice.

& Vehicle finder function

Use thi s function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the

lock/arm button three times in a 5-second

period will cause your vehicle’s horn to

sound once and its hazard warning

flashers to flash three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the lock/arm

button three times, the system may

not respond to the signals from the

access key/remote transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the access key/remote transmit-

ter. Unless a button on the access key/

remote transmitter is pressed, the alarm

will be deactivated after approximately 30

seconds.

& Selecting audible signal op-

eration (models without

“keyless access with push-

button start system”)

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off.

Perform the following steps to deactivate

the audible signal. You can also use the

same steps to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the trunk.

2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side

of the power door locking switch.

3. While holding down the REAR (UN-

LOCK) side of the power door locking

switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into

the ignition switch at least 6 times within

10 seconds after Step 2.

4. Open and close the driver’s door once

within 10 seconds after Step 3.

5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3

times to indicate completion of the setting.

You may have the above settings done by

your SUBARU dealer. Also, the setting

can be changed using the multi function

display. For det ails, refer to “Keyless

buzzer volume setting” F3-86.

You may also change the volume of the

audible sign al by operating the multi

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

– CONTINUED –

2-23

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

function display.

& Replacing the battery

Refer to “Replacing battery” F11-50.

& Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmi tter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), your transmit-

ters should be reprogrammed for security

reasons. For details, contact your

SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters

programmed into the remote keyless entry

system.

& Welcome lighting (if

equipped)

The welcome lighting turns on the head-

lights, interior lights, etc. for smo oth

approaching to or exiting from the vehicle

at night or in a dark place.

NOTE

. For the operation of the interior

lights, refer to “Interior lights” F6-2.

. The factory setting (default setting)

of the operation duration of the head-

lights and the exterior lights is 30

seconds for both approaching and

exiting. This setting can be changed

to OFF (no operation), 30 seconds, 60

seconds, or 90 seconds, respectively

for approaching and exiting at

SUBARU dealers. For more details,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

! Approaching

When it is dark and the light control switch

is in the “AUTO” position, if the doors are

unlocked using the unlock button on the

transmitter, the headlight low beams and

some exterior lights will illuminate. The

interior lights will also illuminate if the

dome light switch is in the “DOOR”

position.

The headlight low beams and the exterior

lights will illuminate for 30 seconds.

NOTE

If the doors are locked using the lock

button on the transmitter or the lock

sensor on the door handle, the head-

lights and exterior lights will turn off.

! Exiting

When the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlight indica-

tor light is on, if the ignition switch is turned

off or the key is removed from the ignition

switch, the headlight low beams and some

exterior lights will continue illuminating.

The headlights and exterior lights will turn

off under either of the following conditions.

. 30 seconds have elapsed since the

driver’s door was opened and closed.

. The lock button on the transmitter or

the lock sensor on the door handle is

operated two times successively.

NOTE

. If the light control switch is set to a

position other than “AUTO” position,

the headlights and the exterior lights

will turn off.

. When exiting from the vehicle, the

headlights and exterior lights will turn

off if the driver’s door is not opened

and closed within 3 minutes from turn-

ing on of the welcome lighting.

& Certification for Remote key-

less entry system

! U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTWB1U811

FCC ID: CWTWD1U781

CAUTION

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

2-24

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

! Canada-spec. models

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard

(s). Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Le présent appareil est conform e aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux

appareils radio exempts de licence. L’ex-

ploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-

tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur

de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage

radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage

est susceptible d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

! Mexico-spec. models

COFETEL RCPSUTW13-2221

COFETEL RLVSU8813-2140

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the hazard warning flashers

flash if someone attempts to break into

your vehicle.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The system can be armed and disarmed

with the keyless access function or access

key.

The system will not be activated when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

The system can be armed and disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

Keys and doors/Alarm system

– CONTINUED –

2-25

Keys and doors/Alarm system

& System operation

The alarm system will give the following

alarms when triggered.

. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30

seconds.

. The hazard warning flashers will flash

for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors or the trunk lid remains

open after the 30-second period, the horn

will continue to sound for a maximum of 3

minutes. If the door or the trunk lid is

closed while the horn is sounding, the

horn will stop sounding with a delay of up

to 30 seconds.

The alarm is triggered by:

. Opening any of the doors or the trunk

lid

. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as

forced entry (only models with shock

sensors (dealer option))

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to trigger

the illumination of the following interior

lights.

. Map lights (for models with moon-

roof)

. Dome light (illuminates only when

the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”

position)

The notifications regarding the map

lights (for models with moonroof) and

dome light are deacti vated as the

factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can

activate the system. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

& Activating and deactivating

the alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Disarming the system” F2-29.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the trunk lid.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side

of the driver’s power door locking switch,

open the driver’s door within the following

1 second, and wait 10 seconds without

releasing the switch. The setting will then

be changed as follows.

If the system was previously activated:

The odometer/trip meter screen displays

“AL OF” and the horn sounds twice,

indicating that the system is now deacti-

vated.

If the system was previously deacti-

vated:

The odometer/trip meter screen displays

“AL ON” and the horn soun ds onc e,

indicating that the system is now acti-

vated.

NOTE

You may have the above setting

change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Perform any of the following operations.

. Press any button on the access key/

remote transmitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

. Turn the push-button ignition to the

“ACC” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the

alarm. If the key is not registered, the

alarm will not stop.

2-26

& Arming the system

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

engine hood, the windows and/or

moonroof are open. Always make sure

that they are fully closed before arming

the system.

. When arming the system, if any of

the doors or the trunk lid is not fully

closed, an electronic chirp sounds five

times, the hazard warning flashers

flash five times to alert you that the

doors (or the trunk lid) are not properly

closed. When you close the door, doors

will automatically lock and the system

will automatically arm in 30 seconds.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. If you open the trunk using the

remote transmitter’s “

” button in

the surveillance state (or the standby

state), the system will be temporarily

placed in a standby state. The system

will go back to the surveillance state in

30 seconds upon locking the trunk.

. The system is in the standby state

for a 30-second period before arming

the system. The security indicator light

will flash at short intervals during this

period.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

– Doors (including the trunk lid)

are unlocked using the access key/

remote transmitter.

– Doors (including the trunk lid)

are unlocked using the keyless

access function (models with “key-

less access with push-button start

system”).

– Any door (including the trunk lid)

is opened.

– The ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position (models without

“keyless access with push-button

start system”).

– Push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” position (mod-

els with “keyless access with push-

button start system”).

! To arm the system using the access

key/remote transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped).

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)/turn the

push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”

position (models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close all doors and the trunk lid.

Access key

1) Arm button: Press to arm the system

2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the

system

Keys and doors/Alarm system

– CONTINUED –

2-27

Keys and doors/Alarm system

Transmitter

1) Arm button: Press to arm the system

2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the

system

6. Briefly press the arm button (for less

than 2 seconds). All doors will lock, an

electronic chirp will sound once, the

hazard warning flashers will flash once,

and the security indicator light will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby time), the indicator light

will then flash slowly (twice approximately

every 2 seconds), indicating that the

system has been armed for surveillance.

! To arm the system using power

door locking switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)/turn the

push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”

position (models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close the doors and the trunk lid but

leave only the driver’s door or the front

passenger’s door open.

6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of

the power door locking switch to set the

door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will

sound once, the hazard warning flashers

will flash once and the security indicator

light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid

flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the

indicator light will then flash slowly (twice

approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-

ing that the system has been armed for

surveillance.

2-28

! To arm the system using the key-

less access function (if equipped)

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped)

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close all doors and the trunk lid.

1) Door lock sensor

Security indicator light

6. Carry the access key and touch the

door lock sensor. All doors will lock, an

electronic chirp will sound once, the

hazard warning flashers will flash once,

and the security indicator light will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby time), the security in-

dicator light will then flash slowly (twice

approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-

ing that the system has been armed for

surveillance.

& Disarming the system

Perform either of the following procedures.

. Briefly press the disarm button (for less

than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote

transmitter.

. Carry the access key and grip the front

door handle (models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

The flashing of the security indicator light

will then change slowly (once approxi-

mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-

proximately every 2 seconds), indicating

that the alarm system has been disarmed.

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the

access key/transmitter (i.e. the transmitter

is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is

too weak), you can disarm the system

without using the access key/remote

transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn

the ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”

to the “ON” position with a registered key/

access key.

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, if the ac-

cess key battery is discharged, perform

the procedure described in “Switching

power status” F9-16. In such a case,

replace the battery immediately. Refer

to “Replacing battery of access key”

F11-50.

Keys and doors/Alarm system

– CONTINUED –

2-29

Keys and doors/Alarm system

& Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the access key/remote transmitter

is used only for locking and unlocking the

doors and for panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for

deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating

and deactivating the alarm system” F2-

26. The security indicator light will con-

tinue to flash once every 3 seconds

indicating that the system is in the valet

mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-

ing the alarm system” F2-26.

& Passive arming (models

without “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

When passive arming mode has been

programmed by the dealer, arming of the

system is automatically accomplished

without using the remote transmitter. Note

that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE

MANUALLY LOCKED.

! To enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive arming

mode, have it done by your SUBARU

dealer.

! Arming the system

CAUTION

In passive mode, the system will

automatically activate the alarm but

WILL NOT automatically lock the

doors. In order to lock the doors

you must either lock them as in-

dicated in step 4 below or with the

key once they have been closed.

Failure to lock the doors manually

will result in a higher security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

1) ON

2) LOCK

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

2-30

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors

with the inside door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The system will

automatically arm after 1 minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also

be armed with the remote transmitter or

with the power door locking switches. If

the remote transmitter or power door

locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,

arming will take place immediately regard-

less of whether or not the passive mode

has been selected.

! Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the

disarm button on the remote transmitter.

& Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when

the alarm system has been triggered.

Also, the number of flashes indicates the

location of unauthorized intrusion or the

severity of impact on the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the indicator light will light

for 1 second and then flash as follows.

. When a door was opened: 5 times

. When the trunk was opened: 4 times

. When a strong impact or multiple

impacts were sensed: twice (only models

with shock sensors (dealer option))

. When a light impact was sensed: once

(only models with shock sensors (dealer

option))

NOTE

Any of the above indicator light flash-

ings will recur each time the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

Rearming the alarm system cancels the

flashing.

& Shock sensors (dealer op-

tion)

The shock sensors trigger the alarm

system when they sense impacts applied

to the vehicle and when any of their

electric wires are cut. The alarm system

causes the horn to sound and the hazard

warning flashers to flash for a short time

when the sensed impact is weak, but it

warns of a strong impact or multiple

impacts by sounding the horn and flashing

the hazard warning flashers, both lasting

approximately 30 seconds.

If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can

connect them and set them for activation

or deactivation.

NOTE

. The shock sensors are not always

able to sense impacts caused by break-

ing in, and cannot sense an impact that

does not cause vibration (such as

breaking the glass using a re scue

hammer).

. The shock sensors may sense vi-

bration as indicated in the following

examples and trigger the alarm system.

Select the settings of the alarm system

and shock sensors appropriately de-

pending on where you usually park

your vehicle.

Keys and doors/Alarm system

– CONTINUED –

2-31

Keys and doors/Child safety locks

Examples:

– Vibration from a construction site

– Vibration in a multistory car park

– Vibration from trains

. You can have the sensitivity of the

shock sensors adjusted to your pre-

ference by your SUBARU dealer.

Child safety locks

Each rear door has a child safety lock.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside. The door can only be opened

from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to

the “LOCK” position when children

sit in the rear seat. Serious injury

could result if a child accidentally

opens the door and falls out.

Windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by accidental, child’s mis-

chief, or improper operation, the

driver is r esponsible for obeying

the followi ng instructions without

exception.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,

neck, head or other objects from

being caught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remai n in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the power

window.

The power windows operate only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

2-32

& Power window operation by

driver

! Driver’s side power window

switches

1) Lock switch

2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto

up and down feature)

3) For front passenger’s window (with one-

touch auto up and down feature)

4) For rear left window

5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

! Operating the driver’s/front pas-

senger’s window

1) Automatically open/close

2) Open/close

To open:

Press the switch down lightly and hold it.

The window will open as long as the

switch is held.

Press the switch down until it clicks and

release it, and the window will fully open.

To stop the window halfway, pull the

switch up lightly.

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The

window will close as long as the switch is

held.

Pull the switch up until it clicks and release

it, and the window will fully close. To stop

the window halfway, press the switch

down lightly.

NOTE

. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-

nected due to situations such as

battery or fuse replacement, the one-

touch auto up/down function will be

deactivated. Initialize the power win-

dow to reactivate the one-touch auto

up/down function. Refer to “Initializa-

tion of power window” F2-36.

. When the following operations are

performed, the power window breaker

will operate and it may not be possible

to open or close the window.

– After the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s window is fully closed or fully

opened, the switch is continuously

operated in the same direction for a

few seconds.

– After the windows for three or

more seats are fully closed or fully

opened, each switch is continu-

ously operated in the same direc-

tion simultaneously for a few sec-

onds.

In this case, after the breaker recovers,

be sure to initialize the power windows.

If they are not initialized, the one-touch

auto up/down function will not operate.

Refer to “Initialization of power win-

Keys and doors/Windows

– CONTINUED –

2-33

Keys and doors/Windows

dow” F2-36.

! Anti-entrapment function

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test this func-

tion using fingers, hands or other

parts of your body.

. The anti-entrapment function

may not operate properly if some

object gets trapped just before

the window fully closes.

NOTE

. If a window detects an impact simi-

lar to that caused by trapping an object

(for example, when the vehicle encoun-

ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-

ment function may operate.

. The window cannot be operated for

a few seconds after the anti-entrap-

ment function operates.

. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-

nected due to situations such as

battery or fuse replacement, the anti-

entrapment function is deactivated.

Initialize the power window to reacti-

vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-

fer to “Initialization of power window”

F2-36.

While closing the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s window automatically, if the window

senses a substantial enough object

trapped between the window and the

window frame, it automatically moves

down slightly and stops.

! Operating the rear windows

To open:

Press the appropriate switch down and

hold it until the window reaches the

desired position.

To close:

Pull the switch up and hold it until the

window reaches the desired position.

2-34

! Locking the passengers’ windows

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock:

Press the lock switch. When the lock

switch is in the lock position, the passen-

gers’ windows cannot be opened or

closed.

To unlock:

Press the lock switch again.

& Power window operation by

passengers

! Passenger’s side power window

switches

Each passenger window can be controlled

by the power window switch located on

the door.

! Operating the front passenger’s

window

1) Automatically open/close

2) Open/close

To open:

Press the switch down lightly and hold it.

The window will open as long as the

switch is held.

Press the switch down until it clicks and

release it, and the window will fully open.

To stop the window halfway, pull the

switch up lightly.

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The

window will close as long as the switch is

held.

Pull the switch up until it clicks and release

it, and the window will fully close. To stop

Keys and doors/Windows

– CONTINUED –

2-35

Keys and doors/Windows

the window halfway, press the switch

down lightly.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected

due to situations such as battery or

fuse replacement, the one-touch auto

up/down function is deactivated. Initi-

alize the power window to reactivate

the one-touch auto up/down function.

Refer to “Initialization of power win-

dow” F2-36.

! Anti-entrapment function

Refer to “Anti-entrapment function” F2-

34.

! Operating the rear passenger’s

windows

To open:

Press the switch down and hold it until the

window reaches the desired position.

To close:

Pull the switch up and hold it until the

window reaches the desired position.

When the lock switch on the p ower

window switch cluster, located on the

driver’s side door, is in the lock position,

the passengers’ windows cannot be oper-

ated with the passengers’ switches.

& Initialization of power win-

dow

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due

to situations such as battery or fuse

replacement, the following functions will

be deactivated.

. One-touch auto up/down function

. Anti-entrapment function

. Operation of the front passenger ’s

window switch located on the driver’s side

power window switch cluster

Initialize the driver’s and front passenger’s

power window using the following proce-

dure to reactivate these functions.

1. Close the door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

3. Open the window halfway by pressing

down the power window switch.

4. Pull up the power window switch and

close the window completely. Continue

pulling up the switch for approximately 1

second after the window is closed com-

pletely.

5. Open the window completely by fully

pressing down the power windows switch.

2-36

Trunk lid

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from entering the vehic le,

always keep the trunk lid closed

while driving.

. Help prevent children, adults or

animals from locking themselves

in the trunk. On hot or sunny

days, the temperature in the

trunk could quickly become high

enough to cause death or serious

heat-related injuries including

brain damage to anyone locked

inside, particularly for small chil-

dren.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

Also make certain that the trunk

is closed.

& To open and close the trunk

lid from outside

The trunk lid can be opened using the

keyless access function or remote keyless

entry system. For details, refer to the

following section.

. For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, refer to “Open-

ing trunk” F2-15.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”, refer to

“Opening the trunk lid” F2-23.

To close the trunk lid, lightly press the

trunk lid down until the latch engages.

NOTE

Do not l eave your valuables in the

trunk when you leave your vehicle.

& To open the trunk lid from

inside

Press the trunk lid opener switch for more

than 1 second.

NOTE

The trunk lid will not open when the

select lever is in a position other than

the “P” position (CVT models) or the

vehicle is moving.

& Internal trunk lid release

handle

The internal trunk lid release handle is a

device designed to open the trunk lid from

inside the trunk. In the event children or

adults become locked inside the trunk, the

handle allows them to open the lid. The

handle is located on the inside of the trunk

lid.

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,

pull the yellow handle as indicated by the

arrow on the handle. This operation

Keys and doors/Trunk lid

– CONTINUED –

2-37

Keys and doors/Trunk lid

unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the

lid.

The handle is made of material that

rem ains luminescent for approximately

an hour in the dark trunk space after it is

exposed to ambient light even for a short

time.

WARNING

Never allow any child to get in the

trunk and play with the release

handle. If the driver starts the vehi-

cle without knowing that a child is

inside the trunk and the child opens

the lid using the release handle, the

child could fall out and be killed or

seriously injured.

CAUTION

. Do not close the lid while grip-

ping the release handle. The

handle may be damaged.

. Do not use the handle as a hook

to fasten straps or ropes to

secure your cargo in the trunk.

Such use may result in damage

of the handle.

. Load the trunk so that cargo

cannot strike the release handle.

If the cargo hits the handle while

the vehicle is being driven, the

handle may be pulled and the

trunk lid may open. That may

cause cargo to fall out of the

trunk, which could create a traffic

safety hazard.

! Inspection

Perform the following steps at least twice

a year to check the release handle for

correct operation.

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin

blade. Sli de the flat-head screwdriver

blade from the slit aperture of the lock

assembly fully to the end until you hear a

click.

This places the latch in the locked posi-

tion.

3. Move the release handle, from outside

the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to

check if the latch is released.

2-38

If the latch is not released, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

In that case, use the key to release the

latch, then close the trunk lid.

Also, if t he movement of the release

handle feels restricted or not entirely

smooth during operation, or the handle

and/or handle base is cracked, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if the vehicle stops

suddenly or turns sharply or if the

vehicle is involved in an accident.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by accidental, child’s mis-

chief, or improper operation, the

driver is responsible for obeying

the following instructions without

exception.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remai n in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the moon-

roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

. If the moonroof does not close,

we recommend that you have the

system checked by a SUBARU

dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Keys and doors/Moonroof

– CONTINUED –

2-39

Keys and doors/Moonroof

& Moonroof switches

! Tilting moonroof

1) Raise

2) Lower

The tilting function is activated only when

the moonroof is fully closed.

To raise:

Press and hold the rear side of the “UP/

DOWN” switch for a short time. The

moonroof raises completely.

To lower:

Press and hold the front side of the “UP/

DOWN” switch until the preferred position

has reached.

Release the switch after the moonroof has

been raised or has been lowered com-

pletely. Pressing the switch continuously

may cause damage to the moonroof.

NOTE

One-touch operation does not take

place when the moonroof is lowered.

Press the switch continuously to lower

the moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

1) Open

2) Close

Tilt down the moonroof completely before

performing the sliding operation.

To open:

Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”

switch. The sun shade will also be opened

together with the moonroof. The moonroof

will stop once at a midway position. Press

the rear side of the switch again to open

the moonroof completely.

To close:

Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”

switch.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while opening or closing it,

momentarily push the switch to the

“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to

opening the moonroof to prevent drops

of water from falling into the passenger

compartment.

NOTE

Driving with the moonroof fully open

can cause an annoying sound to be

generated at high speeds. If this oc-

curs, use the moonroof at the midway

stop position when the moonroof is

opened.

! Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

2-40

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

& Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

Keys and doors/Moonroof

2-41

————————————————————————————————————————

Ignition switch (models without push-

button start system)......................................... 3-4

LOCK.................................................................. 3-4

ACC.................................................................... 3-5

ON ...................................................................... 3-5

START ................................................................ 3-5

Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5

Ignition switch light............................................. 3-6

Push-button ignition switch (models with

push-button start system) ............................... 3-6

Safety precautions .............................................. 3-6

Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-6

Switching power status ....................................... 3-7

When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-8

Hazard warni ng flasher....................................... 3-8

Meters and gauges. ............................................. 3-8

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-8

Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle

movement upon turning on the ignition

switch............................................................... 3-9

Speedometer....................................................... 3-9

Odometer............................................................ 3-9

Double trip meter ................................................ 3-9

Tachometer ........................................................ 3-10

Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10

Temperature gauge ............................................ 3-11

ECO gauge ........................................................ 3-12

REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)................. 3-12

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-13

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-14

SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ........................................................ 3-16

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator light .................................................. 3-16

Charge warning light.......................................... 3-17

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-17

Engine low oil level warning indicator (except

STI) ................................................................. 3-17

Windshield washer fluid warning indicator.......... 3-18

AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-18

Rear differential oil temperature warning light

(STI) ................................................................ 3-18

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.

models) ........................................................... 3-19

ABS warning light.............................................. 3-20

Brake system warning light................................ 3-21

Electronic parking brake indicator light (models

with electronic parking brake system) .............. 3-23

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-24

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF

indicator light (models without electronic

parking brake system) ..................................... 3-24

Hill Holder indicator light (models with electronic

parking brake system) ..................................... 3-24

Door open warning light .................................... 3-25

All-Wheel Drive warning light (if equipped) ......... 3-25

Power steering warning light (except STI)........... 3-25

LED headlight warning light (if equipped) ........... 3-25

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle

Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-26

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/

Traction mode indicator light............................ 3-27

Instruments and controls

Warning chimes and warning indicator of the

keyless access with push-button start system (if

equipped)......................................................... 3-28

Security indicator light ....................................... 3-33

SI-DRIVE indicator (if equipped).......................... 3-34

Gear position indicator (MT models)/Shift-up

indicator (STI) .................................................. 3-34

Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT

models)............................................................ 3-34

Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 3-35

High beam indicator light ................................... 3-35

Cruise control indicator...................................... 3-35

Cruise control set indicator ................................ 3-35

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light

(models with LED headlights) ........................... 3-35

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-35

Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-35

Driver’s control center differential auto indicator

(STI)................................................................. 3-35

Driver’s control center differential indicator and

warning (STI) .................................................... 3-36

REV indicator light (STI) ..................................... 3-37

Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator (if

equipped)......................................................... 3-37

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) .......... 3-37

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 3-37

RAB warning light (if equipped) .......................... 3-37

RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped).................. 3-37

Multi information display ................................... 3-38

Basic operation .................................................. 3-39

Welcome screen................................................. 3-39

Good-bye screen ............................................... 3-40

Warning screen ................................................. 3-40

Basic screens.................................................... 3-45

Menu screens .................................................... 3-46

Multi funct ion display ........................................ 3-49

Basic operation ................................................. 3-50

Welcome screen ................................................ 3-50

Date screen ....................................................... 3-51

Ending screen ................................................... 3-51

Self-check screen .............................................. 3-52

Interruption screen ............................................ 3-53

Basic screens.................................................... 3-53

Selection screen ................................................ 3-60

Date and time settings ....................................... 3-64

Image quality and volume settings ..................... 3-71

Screen settings.................................................. 3-73

Maintenance settings ......................................... 3-81

Driving history registration................................. 3-84

Car settings....................................................... 3-85

Initialize............................................................. 3-94

Light control switch........................................... 3-96

Headlights ......................................................... 3-97

High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-98

Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-98

Daytime running light system............................. 3-99

Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-99

One-touch lane changer ................................... 3-100

Illumination brightness control....................... 3-100

Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............. 3-101

Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with

LED headlights) ............................................. 3-101

Instruments and controls

Fog light switch (if equipped) ......................... 3-101

Steering responsive fog lights system (if

equipped)....................................................... 3-101

Wiper and washer ............................................ 3-103

Windshield wiper and washer switches ............. 3-104

Mirrors............................................................... 3-105

Inside mirror .................................................... 3-105

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ..... 3-106

Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink

(if equipped) .................................................. 3-107

Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-113

Defogger and deicer ........................................ 3-114

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ......................... 3-115

Horn.................................................................. 3-116

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)

Ignition switch (models with-

out push-button start sys-

tem)

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is

being driven or towed because

that will lock the steering wheel,

preventing steering control. And

when the engine is turned off, it

takes a much greater effort than

usual to steer.

. Before l eavi ng the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child or

others. Children could operate

the power windows, the moon-

roof or other controls or even

make the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a

keyholder or to a large bunch of

other keys, centrifugal force may act

on it as the vehicle moves, resulting

in unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

& LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the

steering wheel slightly to the right and left

as you turn the key.

3-4

The key can be turned from the “ACC” to

“LOCK” position only when the select

lever is in the “P” position (CVT models)

and the key is pushed in while turning it

(all models).

& ACC

In this position the electrical accessories

(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

& ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

& START

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON” position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

If your registered key fails to start the

engine, pull out the key once (the security

indicator light will blink), and then insert

the key in the ignition switch and turn it to

the “START” position and again try to start

the engine.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

. The key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching another

transmitter.

& Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

The chime stops under t he following

conditions.

. when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position

. when the key is removed from the

ignition switch

. when the driver’s door is closed

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)

– CONTINUED –

3-5

Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)

& Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when the driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several

tens of seconds and then gradually turns

off under the following conditions.

. when the driver’s door is closed

. when the doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter

The light turns off immediately under the

following conditions.

. when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position

. when all doors are locked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter

Push-button ignition switch

(models with push-button

start system)

& Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

1) Antenna

2) Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key is not detected

within the operating range of the an-

tennas inside the vehicle, the push-

button ignition switch and the engine

start cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key is outside

the vehicle, if it is placed too close to

the glass, it may be possible to switch

the power or to start the engine.

. Do not leave the access key in the

following places. It may become im-

possible to operate the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– On the rear shelf

– Inside the trunk

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the engine,

if the access key battery is discharged,

perfo rm the procedure described in

“Access key – if access key does not

operate properly” F9-16. In such a

case, replace the battery immediately.

Refer to “Replacing battery of access

key” F11-50.

3-6

& Switching power status

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the

push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Shift the shift lever in neutral (MT

models) or the select lever in the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the clutch pedal (MT

models) or the brake pedal (CVT models).

Every time the button is pressed, the

power is switched in the sequence of

“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When the

engine is stopped and the push-button

ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch illuminates in orange.

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off

Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. When the push-button ignition

switch is left in “ON” or “ACC”

for a long time, it may result in

vehicle battery discharge.

. Do not spill drinks or other

liquids on the push-button igni-

tion switch. It may cause a mal-

function.

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand soiled

with oil or other contaminants. It

may cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not illuminate even when

the instrument panel illumination

is turned on, have the vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all the

way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

. If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in green

when the push-button ignition switch is

pressed, steering is locked. When this

occurs, press the push-button ignition

Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)

– CONTINUED –

3-7

Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher

switch while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

! Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

When the push-button ignition switch is

left in the “ACC” or “ON” position for

approximately 1 hour, the push-button

ignition switch will be automatically

switched to “OFF” to prevent the battery

from going dead. (In CVT models, this

function is activated when the select lever

is in the “P” position.)

& When access key does not

operate properly

Refer to “Access key – if access key does

not operate properly ” F9-16.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works regard-

less of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. All the turn signal lights

and the turn signal indicator lights will

flash. To turn off the flasher, push the

button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

NOTE

Liquid-crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges on

the combination meter. You will find

their indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-

tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the various parts of the

combination meter are illuminated in the

following sequence.

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

needles, gauge needles illuminate.

2. Meter and ga uge in dications eac h

show MAX position.

3. Meter and ga uge in dications eac h

show MIN position.

4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

3-8

NOTE

This sequence of operations may not

take place if you quickly turn the

ignition switch to start the engine. This

is not a malfunction.

& Canceling the function for

meter/gauge needle move-

ment upon turning on the

ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate the

movement of the meter needle s and

gauge needles that takes place when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. To change the setting, perform

the procedures described in “Gauge Initial

Movement” F3-48.

& Speedometer

The speedome ter shows the vehicle

speed. The digital speedometer can be

also displayed on the multi information

display.

& Odometer

The unit displayed varies depending on the

models.

1) Trip knob

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”

position, the odometer/trip meter will light

up. If you do not press the trip knob within

10 seconds of illumination of the od-

ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter

will turn off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

& Double trip meter

1) Trip knob

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”

position, the odometer/trip meter will light

up. It is possible to switch between the A

trip meter and B trip meter indications

while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If

you do not press the trip knob within 10

seconds of illumination of the odometer/

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

– CONTINUED –

3-9

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn

off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

trip knob.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob

and keep the knob pressed for more than

2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

If the connection between the combina-

tion meter and battery is broken for any

reason such as vehicle maintenance or

fuse replacement, the data recorded on

the trip meter will be lost.

& Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE

To protect the engine/transmission

while the select lever is in the “P ” or

“N” position (CVT models) or the shift

lever is in the neutral position (MT

models), the engine is controlled so

that the engine speed may not become

too high even if the accelerator pedal is

depressed hard.

& Fuel gauge

1) Low fuel warning light

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge

shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains

fuel.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel

level movement in the tank.

If you press the trip knob while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”

position, the fuel gauge’s dial will light up

and the needle will indicate the amount of

fuel remaining in the tank.

If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating

the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,

3-10

you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10

seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s

door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the

“E” position and the dial and needle will

turn off.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

(lid) is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

. When you have refueled, the fuel

gauge indicates the amount in the fuel

tank after starting the engine. Also, it

may take some time until the fuel

gauge indication stabilizes.

. The gauge indicates only an approx-

imate amount of fuel remaining in the

tank. Use this indica tion only as a

guide.

. If you refuel while the ignition switch

is in the “ON” position, the fuel gauge

may not indicate the correct amount of

the fuel in the fuel tank.

. If the refuel amount is less than

approximately 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3

Imp gal), it may take some time until the

fuel gauge indication stabilizes.

& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Engine operation is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range

and high revving operation when the

engine is not warmed up enough should

be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-

11.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

– CONTINUED –

3-11

Instruments and controls/REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)

& ECO gauge

The unit displayed varies depending on the

models.

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel con-

sumption since the trip meter was last

reset and the current rate of fuel con-

sumption.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel

efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed

unit

Needle position

“+” side “-” side

MPG Better Poorer

l/100km Poorer Better

km/l Better

Poorer

NOTE

. The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is not

shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).

Until that time, the ECO gauge does not

operate.

REV indicator light and buz-

zer (STI)

1) REV indicator light

The REV alarm system has the following

functions.

. When the engine speed reaches the

level that was previously set, the REV

indicator light illuminates to inform you. At

this time, a buzzer also sounds if the

buzzer setting is activated.

. Whenever the engine speed enters the

red zone of the tachometer, the REV

indicator light flashes.

3-12

NOTE

Even if the REV alarm system is not set,

the REV indicator light will flash when-

ever the engine speed enters the red

zone of the tachometer.

To change the REV indicator settings,

perform the procedures described in “REV

settings (STI)” F3-48.

Warning and indicat or lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate when the ignition switch is

initially turned to the “ON” position. This

permits checking the operation of the

bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, the following lights

illuminate and then turn off after several

seconds or after the engine has started.

: Seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the driver fastens the

seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning

light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the front seat passenger

fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON /

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: REV indicator light (STI)

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

(CVT models)

: Rear differential oil temperature warn-

ing light (STI)

: Low tire pressure warning light

(U.S.-spec. models)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Electronic parking brake indicator

light

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start

assist OFF indicator light (models

without electronic parking brake sys-

tem)

: Hill holder indicator light (models with

electronic parking brake system)

: Door open warning light

: AWD warning light (if equipped)

: Power steering warning light (except

STI)

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-13

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light

: LED headlight warning light

: Headlight indicator light

: Automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light (if equipped)

: Traction mode indicator light

: Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator light

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following

illustration and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-

ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will

also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

– At speeds lower than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

– At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

3-14

oper ation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front pas senger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from

functioning correctly or cause the device

to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

“Front seats” F1-2.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant, altho ugh we

strongly recommend that all children sit

in the rear seat properly restrained.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

& SRS airbag system

warning light

For details about the SRS airbag system

warning light, refer to “SRS airbag system

monitors” F1-59.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-15

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indica-

tors

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located next to the

clock in the center portion of the dash-

board.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and O FF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain illuminated or off simulta-

neously even after the system check

period, the system is malfunctioning.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately for an inspection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion with out having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that th ere is a problem or potential

problem somewhere in the emission con-

trol system.

! If the light illuminates steadily

If the light illuminates steadily while driving

or does not turn off after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

3-16

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illuminating

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator light

turn off immediately. It may take several

driving trips. If the light does not turn off,

take your vehicle to your authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and illuminate steadily after

several driving trips. You should have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains illuminated,

contact your neare st SUBA RU de aler

immediately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is

at the proper level but the light remains

illuminated, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

For details about checking the engine oil

level or adding the engine oil, refer to

“Engine oil” F11-13.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

& Engine low oil level

warning indicator

(except STI)

This indicator appears when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the engine low oil level warning indicator

appears while driving, park the vehicle in a

safe and level location, and then check

the engine oil level. When the engine oil

level is not within the normal range, refill

with engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil” F11-

13.

If the warning indicator does not disappear

after refilling the engine oil, or the warning

indicator appears even though the engine

oil level is within the normal range, have

the vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-17

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

NOTE

. After replacing or adding the engine

oil, if the engine oil level is within the

normal range when restarting the en-

gine on a level surface, the warning

indicator will be off.

. The warning indicator may appear

temporarily in the following conditions

because a low oil level may be detected

as a result of significant oil movement

in the engine.

– when the vehicle is considerably

inclined on an uphill or steep slope

– when the vehicle has continu-

ously accelerated and decelerated

– when the vehicle is continuously

turned

– when the vehicle is driven on a

road that alternates continuously

between uphill and downhill

& Windshield washer

fluid warning indicator

This indicator appears when the fluid level

in the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).

& AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the transmis-

sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Transmission control system warn-

ing

If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may

indicate that the transmission control

system is not working properly. Contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer for service

immediately.

& Rear differential oil

temperature warning

light (STI)

CAUTION

If the R.DIFF TEMP warning light

illuminates, reduce vehicle speed

and stop the vehicle in a safe

location as soon as possible. Con-

tinuing to drive with this light illumi-

nated may damage the rear differ-

ential and other parts of the power-

train.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the rear

differential oil temperature is too hot.

At this time, the driver’s control center

differential will automatically cancel the

current torque-distribution ratio setting and

adopt its minimum ratio.

If the light illuminates while driving, reduce

vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in the

nearest safe location. Park the vehicle for

several minutes. After the light turns off,

you can start driving.

If the light does not turn off, contact the

nearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE

. If the tire pressures are not correct

and/or the tires are not all the same

size and brand, the rear differential will

be heavily loaded when the vehicle is

driven, resulting in an abnormally high

oil temperature.

. The rear differential oil will deterio-

rate if its temperature increases en-

ough for the rear differential oil tem-

perature warning light to illuminate. It is

advisable to have the rear differential

oil replaced as soon as possible.

3-18

& Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S.-spec.

models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will turn off.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire main tenance,

and it is the driver ’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressur e, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of re-

placement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately one

minute, have the system inspected by

your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned ON or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-19

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven to a vehicle speed of at

least 20 mph (32 km/h). After adjust-

ing the tire pressures, increase the

vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32

km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking

of the tire inflation pressures. If the

tire pressures are now above the

severe low pressure threshold, the

low tire pressure warning light

should turn off a few minutes later.

Therefore, be sure to install the

specified size for the front and rear

tires.

& ABS warning light

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS system repaired at

the first available opportunity by

your SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition swit ch is

turned to the “ON” position,

but it does not turn off even

after starting the vehicle.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down. However, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light illuminates to-

gether with the brake system warning light

if the EBD system malfunctions. For

further details of the EBD system mal-

function warning, refer to “Brake system

warning light” F3-21.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS system may be considered

normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ign ition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and turns off approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the engine has

started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been started,

3-20

but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a m alfuncti on.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will turn off.

& Brake system

warning light

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

. If the brake system warning light

illuminates, the electronic park-

ing brake system may be mal-

functioning. Immediately stop

your vehicle in a safe location,

use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU deal-

er. For details, refer to “Electro-

nic parking brake (models with

electronic parking brake sys-

tem)” F7-44.

NOTE

. Even if the brake system warning

light illuminates, if the warning light

behavior is as described in the follow-

ing examples, the electronic parking

brake system is not malfunctioning.

– The warning light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is ap-

plied or released.

– The warning light turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position again.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate immediately after the engine

is started. However, it is not malfunc-

tioning if the warning light turns off

after the electronic parking brake is

released.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate after the electronic parking

brake is frequently applied and re-

leased. However, the electronic parking

brake system is not malfunctioning if

the light turns off for a short period of

time.

. When the engine is started while the

electronic parking brake is applied/

released, the system may judge an

abnormal situation and the warning

light may illuminate. If the warning light

ill uminate s, turn the ignition switch

once to the “LOCK/OFF” position and

then restart the engine. Then, apply/

release the electronic parking brake. If

the warning light turns off, the system

will be restored.

This light has the following functions.

! Parking brake indicator (models

without electronic parking brake

system)

This light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. It turns off when the

parking brake is fully released.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-21

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the

reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have

the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system war ning light also

illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the

EBD system. In that event, it illuminates

together with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the en gine, appl y the

parking brake and then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights turn off, the EBD system

may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

4. If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after the engine

has been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning (models with electronic

parking brake system)

The brake system warning light illumi-

nates when the electronic parking brake

system is malfunctioning. If the warning

light illuminates, promptly park in a safe

location as soon as possible and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

The brake system warning light remains

illuminated when the parking brake cannot

be released even if the parking brake

switch is pushed. For details, refer to

“Electronic par king bra ke (models with

electronic parking brake system)” F7-44.

! Frequent operation warning

The brake system warning light illumi-

nates and a chirp sound will be heard if

the parking brake switch is operated too

frequently. In this case, the operation of

the parking brake switch is restricted to

protect the electronic parking brake sys-

tem.

! Vacuum pump system warning (ex-

cept STI)

This light illuminates when a malfunction

is detected in the vacuum pump system.

NOTE

The vacuum pump system assists the

boost pressure when driving at high

altitudes while the engine is cold.

3-22

& Electronic parking

brake indicator light

(models with electronic

parking brake system)

! Parking brake indicator

The light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. It turns off when the

parking brake is fully released.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

WARNING

. When you release the electronic

parking brake while the engine is

running, the electronic parking

brake indicator light will turn off.

However, if the light still illumi-

nates, stop the vehicle in a safe

place immediately and have the

system inspected by a SUBARU

dealer.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

. If the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, the elec-

tronic parking brake system may

be malfunctioning. Immediately

stop your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion, use tire stops under the

tires to prevent the vehicle from

moving and contact your

SUBARU dealer. For details, refer

to “Electronic parking brake

(models with electronic parking

brake system)” F7-44.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

electronic parking brake applied, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated for approximately

30 seconds and then turns off.

. When the electronic parking brake

switch is pulled to apply the electronic

parking brake while the ignition switch

is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

illuminates, remains illuminated for

approximately 30 seconds and then

turns off.

. Even if the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, if the warning

light behavior is as described in the

following examples, the electronic

parking brake system is not malfunc-

tioning.

– The indicator light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is re-

leased.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash immediately after the

engine is started. However, it is not

malfunctioning if the indicator light

turns off after the electronic parking

brake is released.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash after the electronic

parking brake is frequently applied and

released. However, the electronic park-

ing brake system is not malfunctioning

if the light turns off for a short period of

time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes when the electronic parking brake

system is malfunctioning. If the indicator

light flashes, promptly park in a safe

location as soon as possible and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated when the parking

brake cannot be released even if the

parking brake switch is pushed. For de-

tails, refer to “Electronic parking brake

(models with electronic parking brake

system)” F7-44.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-23

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-

ing

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated when the parking brake cannot

be applied.

! Frequent operation warning

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated too frequently. In this case, the

operation of the parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking

brake system.

NOTE

Wait until the indicator light turns off.

& Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi-

mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal).

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

NOTE

This light does not turn off unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.5 US

gal (17 liters, 3.7 Imp gal).

& Hill start assist warning

light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light

(models without electro-

nic parking brake sys-

tem)

! Hill start assist warning light

While the engine is running, if there are

any malfunctions in the Hill start assist

system, the warning light will illuminate.

WARNING

When the Hill start assist warning

light illuminates, have the vehicle

inspected at an authorized SUBARU

dealer.

! Hill start assist OFF indicator light

While the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates continuously to

inform the driver that the Hill start assist

system is not operational.

& Hill Holder indicator

light (models with elec-

tronic parking brake

system)

WARNING

If the Hill Holder indicator light does

not illuminate even when the Hill

Holder switch is pressed to activate

the Hill Holder function, the electro-

nic parking brake system may be

malfunctioning. Immediately stop

the vehicle in a safe location and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

The light illuminates when the Hill Holder

switch is pressed to activate the Hill

Holder function. For details about the Hill

Holder function, “Hill Holder function” F7-

46.

3-24

& Door open warning

light

The warning light illuminates if any door or

the trunk lid is not fully closed. This

function is effective even if the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”

position, or the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (if equipped)

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of differing diameters fitted on

the wheels or with an excessively low air

pressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe location and then check

whether all four tires are the same

diameter and whether any of the

tires has a puncture or has lost air

pressure.

& Power steering warn-

ing light (except STI)

This warning light illuminates when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off after the engine

has started. This indicates that the warn-

ing system is working properly.

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power steer-

ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period

of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too fre-

quently, that may result in a malfunc-

tion of the power steering control

system.

& LED headlight warning

light (if equipped)

This light illuminates if the LED headlights

malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-25

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operation indicator

light

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

also becomes inoperative, causing

the warning light to illuminate.

Though both the Vehicle Dynamics

Control and ABS are inoperative in

this case, the ordinary functions of

the brake system are still available.

You will be safe while driving with

this condition, but drive carefully

and have your vehicle checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only illumi-

nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System) remains fully opera-

tional.

. The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

malfunctions.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switc h is turned to the

“ON” position and turns off approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the engine has

started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light illuminates after

the engine has started and turns off

while the vehicle is subsequently being

driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

. The warning light illuminates when

the engine has stalled and continues to

illuminate after the engine has been

restarted. However, it will turn off once

the vehicle starts moving.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activa-

tion of the skid suppression function and

during activation of the traction control

function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the engine

has been started, especially in cold

weather. This does not indicate the

existence of a problem. The light

should turn off as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

3-26

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after

the lapse of several minutes (the engine

has warmed up) after the engine has

started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/Traction mode

indicator light

The indicator light shows the activated/deactivated conditions as follows.

Activated/deactivated status for each function

Traction Control

Vehicle

Dynamics

Control system

ABS

Indicator light

Turn off Activated Activated Activated

Deactivated Activated Activated

Deactivated Deactivated

Activated

For details about the Traction Control and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, refer to

“Vehicle Dynamics Control system” F7-38.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-27

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light

This light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is operated

to select the traction mode or the Vehicle

Dynamic Control OFF mode. For details,

refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem” F7-38.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a while after the engine has been

started, especially in cold weather. This

does not indicate the existence of a

problem. The light should turn off as

soon as the engine has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing conditions. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not turn off even after

the lapse of several minutes (the engine

has warmed up) after the engine has

started.

! Traction mode indicator light

The light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed

briefly to select the traction mode. For

details, refer to “Traction mode” F7-41.

& Warning chimes and warning

indicator of the keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system (if equipped)

Access key warning light

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and the

access key warning indicator appears on

the combination meter in order to minimize

improper operations and help protect your

vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator appears, take the

appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indi-

cator on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the engine. This indicates

the status that the steering wheel is

not released and could result in an

accident involving serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in green, if the operation

indicator is still flashing in green,

there could be a steering lock

malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

3-28

NOTE

. Even when the access key is within

the operating ranges inside the vehicle,

the access key warning for engine start

may be provided depending on the

status of the access key and the

environmental conditions.

. When the access key is taken out of

the vehicle through an open window,

the access key tak eout warning or

passenger access key takeout warning

will not be provided.

! List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing indicator does not appear, take

the appropriate action.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-29

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding,

ding ...

(intermittent)

——

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in

CVT models, when the select lever is in

the “P” position.)

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.

*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch was

switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door

is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Lockout warning:

All doors were closed after the locking of

all doors was set by using the door lock

lever or power door locking switch while

the access key is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

*The doors cannot be locked while the

access key is inside the vehicle.

*A chirp sound will be heard, and all

doors will be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Trunk lockout warning:

The trunk was closed with the access

key in it while all doors are locked (or

during the automatic lock time period).

Take out the access key from the trunk,

and close the trunk.

*By pressing the trunk lid opener button

after this warning chime sounds, the

trunk can be unlocked.

Access key lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

the push-button ignition switch is “OFF”

and the access key is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

*If the access key is inside the vehicle,

the doors cannot be locked.

—

Beep, beep ...

(5 beeps)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while

the push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position and another door or the

trunk is opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.

*If

one of the doors is opened, the doors

cannot be locked.

3-30

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding

Long beep (60

seconds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

carrying the access key and the push-

button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is

in the “P” position.

Open the door and return the access key

inside the vehicle, or switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF”.

*If the push-button ignition switch is not

switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be

locked.

Ding, ding ...

(7 seconds)

——

Access key warning:

The vehicle was driven while the access

key is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key, and drive the

vehicle.

Ding ——

Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch was

pressed while the access key is not

inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key, and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 beeps)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key and closed the driver’s door

while the push-button ignition switch is in

a position other than “OFF” and the

select lever is in the “P” position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 beeps)

—

Passenger access key takeout warn-

ing:

A fellow passenger exited the vehicle

with the access key and closed a door

other than the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a posi-

tion other than “OFF”.

Return the access key to inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button igni-

tion switch to “OFF”.

Long

beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous)

—

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key and closed the driver’s door

while the push-button ignition switch is in

a position other than “OFF” and the

select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-31

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Long beep

(continuous)

——

Select lever position warning:

. Case 1: The driver’s door was

opened while the push-button igni-

tion switch is in a position other than

“OFF” and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

. Case 2: The engine is turned off by

pressing the push-button ignition

switch and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

. Case 1: Shift the select lever to

the “P” position, switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF” and

exit the vehicle.

. Case 2: Start the engine, shift

the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Ding ——The battery of the access key is low. Replace the battery of the access key.

Ding —

Flashes in green (15

seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure was per-

formed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right

and left lightly, depress the brake pedal

and press the push-button ignition

switch.

Ding — Flashes in orange

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction was detected in the power

system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately

and have the vehicle inspected.

NOTE

An electronic chirp will sound while the select lever is in the “R” position. In this case, the select lever position warning chime

will not sound.

3-32

& Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation

of the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm system ” F2-

25.

! Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the following

conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The access key is outside the

vehicle.

– The engine is not running.

– In the event that an unauthorized

key is used (for example, the key is

unregistered or the ID code does not

match), the power is not switched to

“ON” and the security indicator light

continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

. Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

. Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above condit ions, it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light illumi-

nates. For details about the immobilizer

system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It means

that the matching of the ID code is

completed and the immobilizer system

is deactivated, and it does not indicate

a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– while the engine is running

– the push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or closed

Models witho ut “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– while the engine is running

– for approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON” position to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position

– when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as the security indicator light flashes

irregularly, it will not affect the func-

tionality of the immobilizer system.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-33

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& SI-DRIVE indicator (if

equipped)

1) Sport (S) mode

2) Intelligent (I) mode

3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

This indicator shows the current SI-DRIVE

mode.

For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI-

DRIVE” F7-29.

& Gear position indicator (MT

models)/Shift-up indicator

(STI)

1) Shift-up indicator (STI)

2) Gear position indicator

The gear position indicator shows the

position of the shift lever.

While driving, the shift-up indicator ap-

pears and informs the driver about the

upshift timing for fuel-efficient driving.

The shift-up indicator can be activated or

deactivated.

Refer to “Gear Position Indicator Setting

(MT models)” F3-48.

& Select lever/gear position in-

dicator (CVT models)

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the

select lever.

For models with manual mode, when the

manual mode is selected, the gear posi-

tion indicator (which shows the current

gear selection) and the upshift/downshift

indicator light up. Refer to “Continuously

variable transmission” F7-24.

For models with SI-DRIVE, the upshift/

downshift indicators are switched off while

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected.

3-34

& Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-44.

& High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

the headlight flasher is operated.

& Cruise control indica-

tor

This indicator appears when the cruise

control main button is pressed to activate

the cruise control function. For details,

refer to “To set cruise control” F7-52.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illumi-

nates, the cruise control indicator

flashes at the same time. At this

time, avoid driving at high speed

and have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

& Cruise control set in-

dicator

This indicator appears when vehicle

speed has been set to use the cruise

control function. Refer to “To set cruise

control” F7-52.

& Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (models with LED

headlights)

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off approximately 3 seconds after

turning the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, have your vehicle inspected at

your SUBARU dealer.

& Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

& Headlight indicator

light

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. when the light switch is turned to the

“

” or “ ” position

. when the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-

nate automatically

& Driver’s control center differ-

ential auto indicator (STI)

This indicator functions while the ignition

switch is “ON” . When it appears, it

indicates that the driver’s control center

differential is set to the auto mode. It

disappears when the driver ’s control

center differential is set to the manual

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-35

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

mode. For details, refer to “Driver’s Con-

trol Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD)

(STI)” F7-19.

! Driver’s control center dif-

ferential auto [+] indicator

(STI)

When the AUTO [+] mode is set, the

AUTO [+] indicator appears.

For details, refer to “Driv er’sControl

Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)”

F7-19.

! Driver’s control center dif-

ferential auto [−] indicator

(STI)

When the AUTO [−] mode is set, the

AUTO [−] indicator appears.

For details, refer to “Driv er’sControl

Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)”

F7-19.

& Driver’s control center differ-

ential indicator and warning

(STI)

! Indicator

When you select the manual mode of the

driver ’s control center di fferential, the

initial limited slip differential (LSD) torque

that is currently selected for the center

differential is indicated by the illumination

of these indicator.

! Warning indicator

All the indicators will flash in the event that

the driver’s control center differential has a

malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected

by your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer

to “Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.

DIFF/DCCD) (STI)” F7-19.

If a malfunction occurs in the vehicle (for

example, when the rear differential oil

temperature warning light illuminates), all

of the indicators may disappear and the

setting value for the initial limited slip

differential (LSD) torque of the driver’s

control center differential (C.DIFF/DCCD)

may be cancelled. However, it does not

indicate a malfu nction of the C.DIFF/

DCCD itself.

3-36

& REV indicator light

(STI)

This indicator light illuminates when the

engine speed reaches the level that was

previously set. This indicator light also

flashes when the tachometer needle en-

ters the red zone. For details, refer to

“REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)” F3-

12.

& Steering responsive

fog lights warning indi-

cator/Steering respon-

sive fog lights OFF in-

dicator (if equipped)

NOTE

For details about the steering respon-

sive fog lights system, refer to “Steer-

ing responsive fog lights system” F3-

101.

! Steering responsive fog lights

warning indicator

This indicator starts blinking when the

steering responsive fog lights system

malfunctions. When this indicator appears

while the system is activated, contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deacti-

vated. This indicator disappears when the

system is activated.

& BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

This warning indicator appears when the

BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case

the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be

shown on the multi information display of

the combination meter. When this indica-

tor appears, have your vehicle inspected

by your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor (if equipped)

The indicator appears when the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate

the BSD/RCTA. In this case the BSD/

RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the

multi information display of the combina-

tion meter. For details, refer to “BSD/

RCTA” F7-55.

& RAB warning light (if

equipped)

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking System malfunctions.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System” F7-64.

& RAB OFF indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking System is turned

OFF, or when the Reverse Automat ic

Braking System is suspended temporarily.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System” F7-64.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

3-37

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

Multi information display

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

multi information display while the

vehicle is in motion. When operation

of the multi information display

interferes with your ability to con-

centrate on driving, stop the vehicle

before performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate on

the display while driving. Doing so

may cause you to look away from

the road and could result in an

accident.

Various information will be shown on the

multi information display. Also, a warning

message will appear on the display if a

malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,

several settings for the displayed content

can be performed.

Multi information display

1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge” F3-

12.)

2) Warning screen (refer to “Wa rn ing

screen” F3-40.)/Basic screen (refer to

“Basic screens” F3-45.)

3) Cruise control information display/

C.DIFF/DCCD indicator

4) Warning indicator

5) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer

to “Select lever/gear position indicator

(CVT models)” F3-34.)

6) SI-DRIVE indicator light (refer to “SI-

DRIVE indicator” F3-34.)

7) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-9.)/

double trip meter (refer to “Double trip

meter” F3-9.)

3-38

Control switch

1) Up (select)

/SET (enter)

3) Down (select)

The warning screen will return t o the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the “

” information reminder is on the

display, it may be possible to display the

warning screen again. To recall the mes-

sage marked with “

” on the display, pull

the “

/SET” switch on the steering wheel

toward you.

& Basic operation

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control

switch, the screens and selection items

can be switched. When the “

/SET”

switch is pulled toward you, the item can

be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

& Welcome screen

When the door is unlocked, and the

driver’s door is opened and then closed,

the welcome screen will appear for ap-

proximately 20 seconds.

NOTE

. Once the welcome screen appears,

it takes a certain period of time to

display it again.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

. If any of the doors is opened while

the welcome screen is displayed, the

door ajar warning will appear.

. The welcome screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-39

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

Good-bye Screen” F3-48.

& Good-bye screen

If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the “Good-bye”

screen will appear for approximately 3

seconds.

& Warning screen

Example of warning

If a warning or a malfunction is detected, a

message will appear. Take the appropriate

actions based on the messages indicated.

3-40

! Items of display message (for warning message)

Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page

Seatbelt warning for driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat

Red 3-14

SRS airbag system malfunction warning

Red 1-59, 3-16

Engine warning

Yellow 3-16

Coolant temperature high warning

Red 3-11, 9-11

Engine oil level warning (except STI)

Yellow 3-17

Transmission fluid temperature high warning (CVT models)

Yellow or red* 3-18

Transmission control system malfunction warning (CVT models)

Yellow 3-18

Low tire pressure warning (U.S.-spec. models)

Yellow 3-19

TPMS system malfunction warning (U.S.-spec. models)

Yellow

3-19

*: The displayed color varies depending on individual countries.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-41

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page

ABS malfunction warning

Yellow 3-20

Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunction warning

Yellow 3-26

Brake system warning

Red 3-21

Electronic parking brake system malfunction warning

Red 3-22

Brake fluid level warning

Red 3-21

Low fuel warning

Yellow 3-24

Windshield washer fluid level warning

Yellow 3-18

Hill start assist system malfunction warning

Yellow 3-24

Door/trunk lid open warning

— 3-25

AWD system malfunction warning (if equipped)

Yellow 3-25

Electric power steering system malfunction warning (except STI)

Red 3-25

3-42

Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page

Automatic headlight beam leveler system malfunction warning

(models with LED headlights)

Yellow 3-35

LED low beam headlight system malfunction warning (if equipped)

Yellow 3-25

The keyless access with push-button start system malfunction

warning*

——

Low battery warning of the access key*

— 3-28

Driver’s control center differential system malfunction warning

Yellow 3-35

Deactivation of switching SI-DRIVE mode

— 7-29

Windshield washer fluid warning

Yellow 11-38

BSD/RCTA halt or warning (if equipped)

Yellow 7-55

RAB warning (if equipped)

Yellow

7-64

*: Models with keyless access with push-button start system

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-43

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

! Items of display message (for operation and vehicle condition)

Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page

Deactivation of the selection of the SI-DRIVE Sport Sharp (S#)

mode when the engine is cold

—— 7-29

Pedal operation for starting engine

— 7-12

Select lever into “P” operation

——

Access key warning* (The vehicle was driven while the access key

is not inside the vehicle.)

— 3-28

Push-button ignition switch without “OFF” warning* —— 3-28

Access key lock-in warning*

— 3-28

Emergency operation of push-button ignition switch*

— 9-16

Release operation for steering lock*

— 3-28

Power save function operation* —— 2-15

Key in the ignition switch reminder (if equipped) —— 3-5

Headlights ON warning ——

3-96

*: Models with keyless access with push-button start system

3-44

& Basic screens

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the

screen that is always displayed.

Default screen:

Journey time screen:

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position).

Digital speedometer:

SI-DRIVE mode screen:

This screen indicates the current SI-DRIVE

mode with its throttle angle.

Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull and hold the

“

/SET” switch to enter the menu screen.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-45

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

& Menu screens

Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter

the menu screens when all of the following

conditions are satisfied.

. The vehicle has been completely

stopped.

. The select lever is in the “P” position

(CVT models).

. The shift lever is in the neutral position

(MT models).

. The menu screen entering screen is

selected.

3-46

The menu list is as follows.

Top menu Menu option Possible settings Initial settings

Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen On or Off On

Gauge Initial Movement On or Off On

Gear Position Indicator Setting (MT

models)

On or Off On

Languages Select the display language. The default language settings vary

depending on individual countries.

(For U.S. models: English)

REV settings (STI) REV Indicator Light On or Off Off

REV Alarm Level Engine Speed 2000 rpm - RED ZONE 2000 rpm

REV Buzzer On or Off Off

EyeSight (models with EyeSight

system)

Warning Volume Max/Mid/Min Mid

Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound On or Off On

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor

Function

On or Off On

RAB (models with EyeSight sys-

tem)

Warning Volume Max/Mid/Min Mid

Sonar Audible Alarm On or Off On

BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

Warning Volume Max/Mid/Min/OFF Mid

Default Settings

― Yes or No ―

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-47

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can select the menu.

Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

NOTE

If you enter the “Return” menu, the

system will return to the previous

screen.

! Screen Settings

After entering the “Screen Settings ” menu,

select one of the following menus.

! Welcome Good-bye Screen

The welcome screen/good-bye screens

can be activated or deactivated. Select

“On” to activate the screens. Select “Off”

to deactivate the screens.

! Gauge Initial Movement

The movement of the meter needles and

gauge needles that occurs when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position can be activated or deactivated.

Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to

deactivate.

! Gear Position Indicator Setting

(MT models)

Display of the shift position indicator can

be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to

activate display of the shift position in-

dicator or “Off” to deactivate it.

! Languages

Operate the “

” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel to display the preferred

language. Then pull the “

/SET” switch to

select the displayed language.

! REV settings (STI)

NOTE

If the setting of the REV Indicator Light

is “Off”, the setting menus of the REV

Alarm Level Engine Speed and the REV

Buzzer are not displayed.

After entering the “REV settings” menu,

select any of the following menus.

! REV Indicator Light

Display of the REV indicator light can be

activated or deactivated. Select “On” to

activate display of the REV indicator light

or “Off” to deactivate it.

! REV Alarm Level Engine Speed

The alarm-level engine speed can be set

(in 100 rpm steps) within the range from

2,000 rpm to the red zone.

! REV Buzzer

The REV buzzer can be activated or

deactivated. Select “On” to activate the

REV buzzer or “Off” to deactivate it.

! EyeSight (models with EyeSight

system)

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

After entering the “EyeSight” menu, select

one of the following menus.

! Warning Volume

The volume of the warning buzzer that

sounds when the EyeSight system is in

use can be set in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid”

and “Min”).

! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

When adaptive cruise control is used, the

buzzer that sounds under any of the

following conditions can be activated or

deactivated.

. A vehicle is detected in front

. Detection is not possible

Select “On” to activate the buzzer. Select

“Off” to deactivate the buzzer.

! Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor

Function

When the lead vehicle moving monitor

function is operated, the buzzer that

sounds if a vehicle in front has started

can be activated or deactivated. Select

3-48

“On” to activate the buzzer. Select “Off” to

deactivate the buzzer.

! BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

After entering the “BSD/RCTA” menu,

select the “Warning Volume” menu. You

can set the volume of the warning buzzer

for RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). You

can select “Max ”, “Mid”, “Min” or “Off”.

! RAB (models with EyeSight sys-

tem)

After entering the “RAB” menu, select one

of the following menus.

NOTE

For models with Reverse Automatic

Braking system, refer to “Reverse

Automatic Braking System” F7-64.

! Warning Volume

The volume of the warning sound that is

activated when the Reverse Automatic

Braking system is in operation can be set

in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid” and “Min”).

! Sonar Audible Alarm

The Reverse Automatic Braking system is

equipped with a function that emits a

warning sound when the system operates.

The function can be activated or deacti-

vated. Select “On” to set the warning

sound to active. Select “Off” to set the

warning sound to inactive.

! Default Settings

Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to

restore customized settings to the factory

default settings. Select “No” to return to

the previous screen without restoring to

the factory default settings.

Multi function display

NOTE

. Illustrations show the display for

U.S.-spec. models as an example. For

models other than U.S.-spec. models,

elements in the illustrations (such as

the display indication and measure-

ment unit) may be different than the

ones for U.S.-spec. models.

. When the vehicle is in motion,

certain functions and selections may

not be available.

. The images shown in this Owner’s

Manual are sample images. The actual

images may vary depending on the

destinations and specifications.

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

multi function display while the

vehicle is in motion. When operation

of the multi function display is

disturbing your awareness and abil-

ity to concentrate on driving, stop

the vehicle in a safe place before

performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentr ate

on the display while driving. Doing

so may cause you to look away from

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-49

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

the road and could result in an

accident.

The multi function display has the follow-

ing functions.

Description Page

Displays useful messages,

such as warning information,

etc.

3-53

Displays basic screens (e.g.

fuel consumption screen, etc.)

3-53

Sets and adjusts maintenance

notification

3-81

Registers driving history 3-84

Sets and customizes car op-

eration

3-85

Reverse Automatic Braking

system (if equipped)

7-64

Also, the multi function display can also be

used to set and initialize the multi function

display itself.

Multi function display

1) Outside temperature indicator

2) Top display (For the display setting, refer

to “Top display setting” F3-73.)

3) Clock

4) Driving information display (For the dis-

played contents, refer to “Basic screens”

F3-53.)

& Basic operation

Control switch

1) Up (select)

2) ENTER (push)

3) Down (select)

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control

switch, the screens and selection items

can be switched. When the

button is

pushed, the item can be selected and set.

& Welcome screen

When the door is unlocked an d the

driver’s door is closed, the welcome

screen will appear for a short time.

3-50

NOTE

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Bypass

screen setting” F3-79.

. For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared, it

may not appear again even when the

driver’s door is closed again. This does

not indicate a malfunction.

& Date screen

If you have set the date and time in the

selection screen, after the welcome

screen is displayed, the current date will

be displayed for a certain period of time. If

“On/Off setting” is set to “On” in the

“Maintenance settings”, the date will be

displayed after the self-check screen.

! Birthday/anniversary screen

Example of notification on an anniversary

If you have set a birthday or anniversary,

after the date screen is displayed, the

notification (reminder) will be displayed for

a certain period of time from 7 days prior

to the set date.

NOTE

. Displaying the birthday/anniversary

screen can be set to on or off. Refer to

“Bypass screen setting” F3-79.

. Up to five items can be set for

birthdays and anniversaries respec-

tively. Refer to “Selection screen” F3-

60.

& Ending screen

If “Eco Summary” is set to “On” in the

“Bypass screen setting”, the “Fuel con-

sumption results screen” will be displayed

before the screen turns off when th e

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-51

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

Fuel consumption results screen

1) The average fuel consumption for the

entire driving distance, from when the

ignition switch was turned to the “ON”

position to when it was turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

2) This display shows the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter

was last reset. It displays the average

fuel consumption corresponding to the A

trip meter mileage or the one corre-

sponding to the B trip meter mileage.

& Self-check screen

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will

be performed. The screens corresponding

to the following items will appear one after

another for several seconds each.

1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine

oil replacement.

2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter

replacement.

3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.

4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

When the checks are performed, the color

of the icon corresponding to the checked

item will turn green.

If there is no warning message, the self-

check will complete without notification.

Example of notification

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, the color of the

icon corresponding to the item will turn

yellow and the warning message or the

maintenance notification will be displayed.

Take the appropriate actions based on the

messages indicated.

NOTE

. The self-check screen can be set to

on or off. The default setting is off. For

details, refer to “On/Off setting” F3-82.

. After performing the maintenance,

change the setting of the correspond-

ing maintenance item. For details, refer

to “Maintenance settings” F3-81.

. The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed under either of the

3-52

following conditions.

– The period of time remaining

until the registered notification date

is 15 days or less.

– The total driving distance remain-

ing until the registered notification

distance is approximately 311 miles

(500 km) or less.

. The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed until either of the

following conditions is satisfied.

– The period of time passed after

the registered notification date is 15

days or more.

– The total distance driven after the

registered notification distance is

approximately 311 miles (500 km) or

more.

& Interruption screen

Useful messages, such as reminder in-

formation, vehicle information, w arning

information, etc. may interrupt the current

screen and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. Take proper action

according to the message.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds.

& Basic screens

These are the basic screens of the multi

function display.

Item Page

Information bar 3-54

Boost pressure + accelerator

opening ratio screen

3-55

Fuel consumption screen 3-56

ECO history screen 3-56

Vehicle activation status

screen

3-56

Triple meter screen 3-57

Guidance screen 3-58

Clock/calendar screen

3-58

By operating the “ ” or “ ” of the control

switch, you can switch the screen that is

always displayed. Also, when the

button is pushed and held, the selection

screen can be displayed. For details about

the selection screen, refer to “Selection

screen” F3-60.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-53

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Information bar

1) Information bar

2) Outside temperature indicator

3) Top display

4) Clock

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the outside temp erature

indicator, clock, etc. will be shown on the

information bar.

! Outside temperature indicator

This displays the outside temperature

between − 408F(− 408C) and 1228F

(508C).

Icy road surface warning screen

When the outside temperature becomes

378F(38C) or less, the icy road surface

warning screen interrupts to inform the

driver that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-

dication may differ from the actual

outside air temperature.

. The icy road surface warning screen

should be treated only as a guide. Be

sure to check the condition of the road

surface before driving.

. Once the icy road surface warning

screen is displayed, it will not be

displayed again unless the outside

temperature has increased to 418F

(58C) or higher.

! Top display

One of the following items can be dis-

played on the top display.

. Average fuel consumption correspond-

ing to the driving distance of each trip

meter

. Current fuel consumption (This may

not be displayed when driving at a low

speed.)

. Driving range on remaining fuel

For details about the setting of the top

display, refer to “Top display setting” F3-

73.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is calculated using the average fuel

consumption of the last 19 miles (30

km) driven. This value may be different

from the values calculated using the

average fuel consumption correspond-

ing to the driving distance of each trip

meter or the current fuel consumption.

3-54

! Clock

The clock can be displayed in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For details

about the setting, refer to “Current date

and time setting” F3-64.

NOTE

If the vehicle battery is disconnected,

the clock shown in the information bar

will be reset. Set the time again after

the vehicle battery is connected. For

details about the setting, refer to “Top

display setting” F3-73.

! Boost pressure + accelerator

opening ratio screen

1) Boost pressure (digital display)

2) Boost pressure (analog display)

3) Accelerator opening ratio (digital display)

4) Accelerator opening ratio (analog dis-

play)

5) The peak value of the boost pressure

(digital display)

6) The peak value of the boost pressure

(analog display)

This screen displays the boost pressure,

the accelerator opening ratio and the peak

value of the boost pressure in both digital

and analog format. Pressing th e

button in the “Boost pressure + accelera-

tor opening ratio screen” mo ves to a

screen where you can reset the peak

value of the boost pressure.

To reset the peak value, select “Yes”.If

you select “No”, the current peak value is

still kept.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-55

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Fuel consumption screen

1) Driving range on remaining fuel

2) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter

3) Current fuel consumption

The di splayed location can be custo-

mized. For details, refer to “Fuel consump-

tion screen setting” F3-74.

! ECO history screen

1) Average fuel consumption per unit time

(bar graph)

2) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter

(red line)

This screen displays the fuel economy

history for the vehicle using a bar graph.

The horizontal scale represents the past

time range and the vertical scale repre-

sents the fuel consumption. The green

bars show driving with good fuel economy

and the yellow bars show driving with poor

fuel economy.

The time range of the history can be set.

The width of the bar graph is adjusted as

follows depending on the set time range.

Time range Width of bar graph

30 minutes 1 minute

60 minutes 2 minutes

120 minutes

4 minutes

For details about the setting, refer to

“Economy history setting” F3-75.

! Vehicle activation status screen

When the vehicle stops

1) Steering axle

3-56

When the vehicle is being driven regularly

1) Power train (illuminated in blue)

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem starts to activate, the tires illuminate in

yellow.

1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control

system activation

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem activates, the tires illuminate in yellow

and the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

operating indicator flashes.

1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System)

2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-

ating indicator (flashing in yellow)

3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control

system activation

! Triple meter screen

Triple meter screen (display example)

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

The items shown in the triple meter screen

can be changed. For details, refer to

“Triple meter setting” F3-77.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-57

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

Item Details

Average vehicle speed (Average

vehicle speed for the entire driving

time from when the trip meter was

reset)

Lifetime fuel consumption

Engine oil temperature (except

STI)

Accelerator opening ratio

Journey distance (the distance

that has been driven since the

ignition switch was turned to the

“ON” position)

Average fuel consumption for the

entire driving distance from when

the ignition switch was turned to

the “ON” position

Boost pressure

! Guidance screen

When the button is pushed and held,

the selection screen can be displayed.

The displayed contents can be set or

customized from the selection screen. For

details, refer to “Selection screen” F3-60.

! Clock/calendar/screen OFF

Clock (Type A)

Clock (Type B)

3-58

Calendar

1) Today’s date

2) Birthday/Anniversary

In addition to the clock/calendar, the out-

side temperature and average fuel con-

sumption can also be displayed.

You can select clock (Type A), clock (Type

B) or calendar. The clock/calendar can

also be set so that it is not displayed. For

details, refer to “Clock/calendar screen

setting” F3-78.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-59

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

& Selection screen

When the button is pushed and held, the setting screen for each menu can be displayed. Select the preferred menu by operating

the “

” or “ ” switch.

Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page

Time/Date

Time/Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected.

1/1/2016 12 h

13:00

3-64

Birthday Set a birthday. (max. 5) — 3-65

Anniversary Set an anniversary day. (max. 5) — 3-67

Daylight Saving Time Turn the daylight saving time on or off Off 3-70

Go Back Return to the top menu. ——

Display

Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 ↔ −5 0 3-71

Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off Off 3-71

Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off High 3-72

Go Back Return to the top menu. ——

3-60

Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page

Screen

Setting

Top Display

Set and customize the top display information

contents.

Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range

or Off

Avg Cons 3-73

Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display.

Upper part: Driv-

ing range, lower

part: Fuel con-

sumption

3-74

Eco History

Set and customize the time of logging fuel

consumption history.

30 min, 60 min or 120 min 30 min 3-75

Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter.

Left: Lifetime fuel

consumption,

center: Average

fuel consumption,

right: Accelerator

opening ratio

3-77

Clock Select the clock format.

Type A clock, Type B clock,

Calendar or Off

Analog clock 3-78

Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off

Welcome screen:

Eco Summary: Off

Birthday Remin-

der: On

Anniversary Re-

minder: On

3-79

Languages Select the display language.

English or French or Spanish

(U.S.-spec. models only)

The default lan-

guage settings

vary depending

on individual

countries.

3-80

Go Back Return to the top menu. ——

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-61

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page

Mainte-

nance

Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date.

The default va-

lues for the main-

tenance settings

vary depending

on individual

countries.

3-81

Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-82

Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-82

Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-82

On/Off

Turn on or off the self-check screen that is

activated when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position.

On or Off Off 3-82

Clear All Settings Clear all items to the factory default settings. Yes or No — 3-83

Go Back Return to the top menu. ——

Driving

History

Set Register and overwrite the driving record. — 3-84

Go Back Return to the top menu. ——

Car

Setting

Keyless Buzzer Vo-

lume

Set the audible signal volume. 0 (OFF) to 7 On 3-86

Hazard Warning

Flasher

Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off On 3-86

Defogger

Set and customize the operation of the

defogger.

15 minutes or Continuous 15 minutes 3-87

Interior Light

Set and customize the interior light off delay

timer.

10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 30 seconds 3-89

Auto Light Sensor (if

equipped)

Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto

light sensor.

Low, Mid, High or Max Mid 3-90

Keyless Access

Setting Driver’s Door

Unlock (if equipped)

Set and customize the keyless access func-

tion.

Driver’s Door Only, All

Driver’s Door

Only

3-91

Welcome Lighting Set the leaving time and approaching time. 30, 60, 90 seconds or Off 30 seconds 3-92

Go Back Return to top menu. ——

3-62

Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page

Initialize

Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No — 3-94

Lifetime Fuel Cons

Reset

Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No — 3-95

Go Back Return to the top menu. ——

Go Back

— Return to the top menu. —

—

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-63

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

& Date and time settings

The items in the date and time settings

can be set. To change the items, operate

the “

” or “ ” switch.

NOTE

. The “Time/Date” item must be set to

display the “Birthday”, “Anniversary”

and notifications for vehicle mainte-

nance.

. The “Birthday” and “Anniversary”

items can be entered after the “Time/

Date” item has been set.

. Dates that do not exist in the

Gregorian calendar cannot be set (for

example, April 31).

. If your vehicle is equipped with the

genuine SUBARU navigation system,

the clock of navigation system must be

set separately.

! Preparation for date setting

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the

button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch to show the

“Time/Date” item. T hen, push the

button.

! Current date and time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-

64.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Time/Date” item. Then push

the

button.

3. Select the item to set by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

3-64

4. Select a number by operating the “ ”

or “

” switch. Then push the button.

When “12 h” is selected, the clock will be

set to a 12-hour display. When “24 h” is

selected, the clock will be set to a 24-hour

display.

5. After entering the date and time, select

“Set” by operating the “

” switch and

confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Birthday setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-

64.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Birthday” item. Then push the

button.

3. Select an entry in the list to set by

operating the “

” or “ ” switch. Then

push the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-65

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. The selected item will be shown. Push

the

button to set the selected item.

5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”

or “

” switch. Then push the button.

6. After entering the date by repeating

step 5, you can enter the name.

7. Select characters by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

– You can select characters of the

English alphabet (upper case charac-

ters and lower case characters are

available), eleven symbols or blank

spaces.

– The word being edited will be

displayed with an underline.

8. After entering the name by repeating

step 7, select “Set” by operating the “

”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

3-66

9. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If a birthday is approaching, the following

screen will be displayed accompanied by

a beep when the ignition switch has been

turned to the “ON” position. This function

can be set to on or off. For details, refer to

“Bypass screen setting” F3-79.

From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday

On a birthday (displayed in red)

NOTE

If “__” is selected for either the

“Month” or “Day” item instead of

numbers, the birthday notification will

be deactivated.

! Anniversary setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-

64.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Anniversary” item. Then push

the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-67

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

3. Select an entry in the list to set by

operating the “

” or “ ” switch. Then

push the

button.

4. The selected item will be shown. Push

the

button to set the selected item.

5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”

or “

” switch. Then push the button.

6. After entering the date by repeating

step 5, you can enter the name.

7. Sele ct char acters by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

– You can select characters of the

English alphabet (upper case charac-

ters and lower case characters are

available), eleven symbols or blank

spaces.

– The word being edited will be

displayed with an underline.

3-68

8. After entering the name by repeating

step 7, select “Set” by operating the “

”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

9. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If an anniversary is approaching, the

following screen will be displayed accom-

panied by a beep when the ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” position. This

function can be set to on or off. For details,

refer to “Bypass screen setting” F3-79.

From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary

On an anniversary (displayed in orange)

NOTE

If “__” is selected for either the

“Month” or “Day” item instead of

numbers, the anniversary notification

will be deactivated.

! Clearing birthday or anniversary

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-64

and display “Birthday” or “Anniversary” on

the screen.

2. Select the preferred birthday/anniver-

sary.

3. When “__” is selected for either the

“Month” or “Day” item instead of numbers,

the setting of “Birthday” or “Anniversary”

will be cleared.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-69

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Daylight saving time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-

64.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Daylight Saving Time” item.

Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

3-70

& Image quality and volume

settings

The image quality and volume settings

can be adjusted. To change the items,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch.

! Preparation for image quality and

volume settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the

button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch to show the

“Display” item. Then, push the

button.

! Contrast setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for image quality and

volume settings” F3-71.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Contrast” item. Then push the

button.

3. Select a contrast level by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting

by pushing the

button.

! Screen OFF setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for image quality and

volume settings” F3-71.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-71

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Screen Off” item. Then push

the

button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. The screen is turned off.

Restoring the screen

When the “

”, “ ” or button is

pushed after the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position, the screen will be

restored. The screen will be restored with

the basic screen that was displayed when

the screen was turned off. While the

screen is off, a warning message will be

displayed if necessary, but other screens

will not be displayed.

! Beep volume setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for image quality and

volume settings” F3-71.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Beep” item. Then push the

button.

3. Push the button.

3-72

4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or

“

” switch. Then push the button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

& Screen settings

The items in screen settings can be set.

To change the items, operate the “

” or

“

” switch, and then push the button.

! Preparation for screen settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the

button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch to show the

“Screen Setting” item. Then, push the

button.

! Top display setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-73.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-73

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Top Display” item. Then push

the

button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or

“

” switch. Then push the button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Fuel consumption screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-73.

3-74

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Cons” item. Then push the

button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select the displayed configuration by

operating the “

” or “ ” switch. Then

push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Economy history setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-73.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-75

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Eco History” item. Then push

the

button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select the time of the logged fuel

consumption history by op erating the

“

” or “ ” switch, and then push the

button.

5. Select “Go Back” by operating the “ ”

switch.

6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

7. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

3-76

! Triple meter setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-73.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Triple Meter” item. Then push

the

button.

3. Select the setting location (left, center

or right) by operating the “

” or “ ”

switch. Then push the

button.

NOTE

The same item cannot be selected for

the left, center or right location.

4. Select the preferred item by operating

the “

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

If you also want to change the setting for

another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-77

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Clock/calendar screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-73.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Clock” item. Then push the

button.

3. Push the button once more.

4. Select “Type A clock”, “Type B clock”,

“Calendar” or “OFF” by operating the “

”

switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

3-78

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Bypass screen setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-73.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Bypass Screen” item. Then

push the

button.

3. Select the item to set by operating the

“

” or “ ” switches. Then push the

button.

4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

If you want to change setting for another

item, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-79

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

“ ” switch, and confirm the setting by

pushing the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Language setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”

F3-73.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Languages” item. Then push

the

button.

3. The current language setting will be

displayed. Push the

button to enter

the language selection mode.

4. Select the preferred language by

operating the “

” or “ ” switch. Then

push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

3-80

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

& Maintenance settings

The items in the maintenance settings can

be set. To change the items, operate the

“

” or “ ” switch.

! Preparation for maintenance set-

tings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the

button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch to show the

“Maintenance” item. Then, push the

button.

! Engine oil setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-

tings” F3-81.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Engine Oil” item. Then push

the

button.

3. Select the setting location (month, day,

year or distance) by operating the “

” or

“

” switch. Then push the button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-81

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Select a number by operating the “ ”

or “

” switch. Then push the button.

If you also want to change the setting for

another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or

“

” switch and confirm the setting by

pushing the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

NOTE

. The notification will be displayed

with information of both date and

distance or either date or distance in

accordance with the setting

. When “__” is selected for either the

“Month”, “Day”, “Year” or “Distance”

item instead of numbers, the set noti-

fication will be deactivated.

. If the notification continues for 15

days or more, the system will display

“__” on the screen.

. When the distance announcement

reaches 0 km, the display will show

“0000” for the next 311 miles (500 km).

After exceeding 311 miles (500 km), “_

___” will be displayed.

! Oil filter setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” F3-81, but select the

“Oil Filter” item in step 2.

! Tires setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” F3-81, but select the

“Tires” item in step 2.

! Maintenance schedule setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” F3-81, but select the

“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.

! On/Off setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-

tings” F3-81.

3-82

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “On/Off” item. Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Clear setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-

tings” F3-81.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-83

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Clear All Settings” item. Then

push the

button.

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

dialogue (“No” is selected first). To clear

all maintenance settings, select “Yes” by

operating the “

” switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

5. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

& Driving history registration

The items in the driving history can be

registered. To change the items, operate

the “

” or “ ” switch, and then push the

button.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the

button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch to show the

“Driving History” item. Then, push the

button.

3-84

4. Push the button once more to

enter the setting mode.

5. The system will notify you of the place

to be selected for approximately 2 sec-

onds.

6. Select one of the registration lines by

operating the “

” or “ ” switch. Then

push the

button.

7. To overwrite the previous registration,

push the

button. When registration is

performed the first time, it is registered

directly without a notification.

8. The system will notify you that the

registration is complete.

& Car settings

The items in the car settings can be set.

To change the items, operate the “

” or

“

” switch, and then push the button.

! Preparation for car settings

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the

button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch to show the

“Car Setting” item. Then, push the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-85

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Keyless buzzer volume setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Keyless Buzzer Volume” item.

Then push the

button.

3. Select a volume level by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting

by pushing the

button.

4. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

! Hazard warning flasher setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Hazard Warning Flasher” item.

3-86

Then push the button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the

“

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

! Defogger setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-87

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Defogger” item. Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

3-88

! Interior light off delay timer setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Interior Light” item. Then push

the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-89

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Auto light sensor sensitivity setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Auto Light Sensor” item. Then

push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

button to enter the selection

mode.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

3-90

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

! Keyless access setting (models

with “keyless access with push-

button start system”)

! Preparation for keyless access

settings

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Keyless Access Setting” item.

Then push the

button.

! Driver’s door unlock setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for keyless access

settings” F3-91.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Driver’s Door Unlock” item.

Then push the

button.

3. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

button to enter the selection

mode.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-91

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “

” or “ ” switch. Then push the

button.

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

button.

6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

! Welcome lighting setting

The leaving time and approaching time

settings can be adjusted.

! Leaving time setting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-85.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Welcome Lighting” item, and

then push the

switch.

3-92

3. S elect the “Leaving time set” by

operating the “

” or “ ” switch, and then

push the

switch.

4. The current setting will be displayed.

Push the

switch to enter the selection

mode.

5. Select the preferred setting by operat-

ing the “

” or “ ” switch, and then push

the

switch.

6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pushing

the

switch.

7. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

notification will be displayed. In this case,

perform the setting procedure again.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-93

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

! Approaching time setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Leaving time setting” F3-92, but select

the “Approaching time set” item in step 3.

& Initialize

Items that have been set to your pre-

ference can be initialized. To select an

initialization menu, operate the “

” or “ ”

switch as follows.

! Preparation for initialization

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Push and hold the

button to show

the selection screen.

3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “

” or “ ” switch to show the

“Initialize” item. Then, push the

button.

! Reset to factory default settings

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-

94.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Reset to Defaults” item. Then

push the

button.

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

dialogue (“No” is selected first). To return

to the factory default settings, select “Yes”

by operating the “

” switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

3-94

5. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

! Lifetime fuel consumption resetting

1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-

94.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Lifetime Fuel Consumption

Resetting” item. Then push the

button.

3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

dialogue (“No” is selected first). To reset

the lifetime fuel consumption, select “Yes”

by operating the “

” switch.

4. Confirm the setting by pushing the

button.

Instruments and controls/Multi function display

– CONTINUED –

3-95

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If

you are sure you want to proceed, select

“Yes” by operating the “

” switch.

6. Confirm the setting again by pushing

the

button.

7. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

Light control switch

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the lights are turned off.

If the vehicle is left unattended

for a long time with the lights

illuminated, the battery may be

discharged.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

3-96

turned off when the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be oper-

ated (except auto on/off headlights),

even under the following conditions.

. when the key is not inserted into the

ignition switch (models without “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

. when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off (models with “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

headlights are illuminated under such

conditions, the chirp sound will inform

the driver that the lights are illumi-

nated.

& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

“

” position

Headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are on.

“

” position

Parking lights, front side marker lights,

rear side marker lights, tail lights and

license plate lights are on.

“

” position: auto on/off headlights (if

equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, headlights, parking lights, front

side marker lights, rear side marker lights,

tail lights and license plate lights are

automatically on or off depending on the

level of the ambient light.

“

” position

The headlights are all off.

NOTE

The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-

lights can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer

for details. Also, for models with a multi

function display, the setting can be

changed using the display. For details,

refer to “Auto light sensor sensitivity

setting” F3-90.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

– CONTINUED –

3-97

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

! Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights (if equipped)

The sensor is on the instrument panel as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

& High/low beam change

(dimmer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “

” on the combina-

tion meter is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the center position.

& Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the

“

” (off) position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter is also on.

3-98

& Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination of

the high beam headlights is reduced

by the daytime running light system.

The light switc h must always be

turned to the “

” position when it

is dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced brightness

when the following conditions are fulfilled.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in the

“AUTO” (if equipped), “

” or off position.

. For CVT models, the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

NOTE

. When the light switch is in the “ ”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are also illumi-

nated.

. For models with the auto on/off

headlights, while the light control

switch is in the “AUTO” position and

the system is activated to the auto-on

mode depending on the ambient light

level, the high beam headlights that

have illuminated at reduced brightness

turn off, and the low beam headlights

turn on alternatively. At this time, the

instrument panel illumination, front

side marker lights, tail lights and

license plate lights are also illuminated.

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal

indicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever

– CONTINUED –

3-99

Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control

& One-touch lane changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down sligh tly and

immediately release it.

The operational/non-operational setting of

the one-touch lane changer’ s can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Illumination brightness con-

trol

You can adjust the illumination brightness

of the combination meter, the climat e

control panel, etc. by turning the control

dial.

. To brighten, turn the control dial up-

ward.

. To darken, turn the control dial down-

ward.

The multi function display automatically

adjusts its brightness together with the

brightness level of the instrument panel.

To adjust the display’s contrast, refer to

“Contrast setting” F3-71.

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination b rightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

. The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

3-100

Headlight beam leveler (if

equipped)

& Automatic headlight beam

leveler (models with LED

headlights)

The LED headlights generate more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience too much glare if your

headlight beam height adjustment is high

when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.

The automatic headlight beam leveler

adjusts the headlight beam height auto-

matically and optimally according to the

load being carried by the vehicle.

Fog light switch (if equipped)

1) Headlight switch

2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the

fog light switch is placed in the “

”

position while the headlights are in the

following condition.

. while the headlight switch is in the “

”

position

. for models with the auto on/off head-

lights, while the headlight switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights turn

on automatically

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the

switch back down to the “

” position.

The indicator light on the combination

meter will illuminate when the front fog

lights are illuminated.

& Steering responsive fog

lights system (if equipped)

The steering responsive fog lights system

automatically turns the front fog light on

and off based on the steering angle and

vehicle speed when entering a curve or

driving on curved roads. The system is

intended to help prev ent accidents by

enabling better visibility of curves ahead

and early recognition of any disabled

vehicles or other obstacles.

The front fog light on the inside of a curve

will turn on if all of the following conditions

are met.

Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler

– CONTINUED –

3-101

Instruments and controls/Fog light switch

. The light control switch is in the “ ”

position, or the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights turn on automatically.

. The fog light switch is i n the “

”

position.

. The low beam mode is selected (the

turn signal lever is in the center position).

. The select lever is in the “D” position or

the manual mode is selected.

. The steering responsive fog lights

system has not been deactivated.

. The operating conditions such as the

steering angle and vehicle speed are met.

The front fog lights on both sides will turn

on as usual if all of the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “

”

position.

. The light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights turn on automatically.

. The fog light switch is in the “

”

position.

. The low beam mode is selected (the

turn signal lever is in the center position).

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

switch

Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch

Press this switch to deactivate the steer-

ing responsive fog lights system. Press

the switch again to activate the system.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indica-

tor

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deacti-

vated. This indicator disappears when the

system is activated.

3-102

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level

frequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades and

might cause the wiper motor to

fail. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or rear

window, always use the wind-

shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blades frozen to the

window glass could cause not

only the wiper blades to be

damaged but also might cause

the wiper motor to fail. If the

wiper blades are frozen to the

window glass, be sure to operate

the defroster, windshield wiper

deicer (if equipped) or rear win-

dow defogger before turning on

the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-

sition and clean the window

glass to allow proper wiper op-

eration.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is un available. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to “Windshield washer

fluid” F11-38.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause de terioration of the

wiper blades.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates continu-

ously under an unusually heavy load,

the circuit breaker may trip to stop the

motor temporarily. If this happens, park

your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

wiper switch, and wait for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

. Clean your wiper blades and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road fi lm. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

– CONTINUED –

3-103

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blade results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove those streaks after

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the window glass and wiper

blades with clean water. The glass is

clean if no beads form on the glass

when you rinse with water.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades with new

ones. For replacement instructions,

refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”

F11-39.

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

! Windshield wipers

: Mist (for a single wipe)

:Off

: Intermittent

: Low speed

High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “

” position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

3-104

! Windshield washer

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

indicator appears when the washer

fluid level in the tank has dropped to

the lower limit. If the warning indicator

appears, refill the tank with fluid. For

the refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-

shield washer fluid” F11-38.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night

position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the

mirror toward you for the night position.

Push it away for the day position. The

night position reduces glare from head-

lights.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-105

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass (if equipped)

1) Display

2) Switch

Congratulations! Your new automobile is

equipped with an automatic dimming

mirror manufactured by Gentex Corpora-

tion. During nighttime driving, the auto-

dimming feature senses distracting glare

from vehicle headlights behind you and

automatically dims to eliminate the glare

and preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

Press the “

” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s

green LED indicator is on. The auto-

dimming feature will default to on with

each ignition cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive

the vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

thedisplay,togglethe“

” switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass

direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “

” switch for more than 9 seconds or

until a “C” appears in the display. Once a

“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

3-106

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass with HomeLink

(if

equipped)

1) Display

2) HomeLink Buttons

3) Switch

Congratulations! Your new automobile is

equipped with an automatic dimming

mirror manufactured by Gentex Corpora-

tion. During nighttime driving, the auto-

dimming feature senses distracting glare

from vehicle headlights behind you and

automatically dims to eliminate the glare

and preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

Press the “

” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s

green LED indicator is on. The auto-

dimming feature will default to on with

each ignition cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive

the vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

thedisplay,togglethe“

” switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass

direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “

” switch for more than 9 seconds or

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-107

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

until a “C” appears in the display. Once a

“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up

to three hand-held radio-frequency re-

motes used to activate devices such as

gate operators, garage door openers,

entry door locks, security systems, even

home lighting. The below steps are

generic programming instructions; for

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site. Additional information and program-

ming videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features

as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before Apri l 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect

an object signaling the door to

stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.

. It is also recommended that a

new battery be placed in the

hand-held remote (garage door

opener remote) of the device for

quicker and more accurate train-

ing.

. Some vehicles may require the

ignition switch to be turned to the

“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-

gramming and/or operation of

HomeLink.

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as

for future HomeLink program-

ming. It is also suggested that

upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink buttons

be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-

tons” F3-111.

! Programming a New HomeLink

Button

1) Indicator Light

2) HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink

button that you would like to program.

The HomeLink indicator light will flash

orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing

HomeLink Buttons” F3-111).

3-108

1) Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink button that

you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train

better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches

(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you

have difficulty with the programming

process.

3. While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the hand-

held remote button. Continue pressing the

hand-held remote button until the

HomeLink indicator light changes from

orange to green. You may now release

the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to

replace this “Programming a New

HomeLink Button” step 3 with proce-

dures noted in the “Gate Operator /

Canadian Programming” section. Refer

to “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-

ming” F3-111.

1) Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink button that you

would like to program and observe the

indicator light.

. If the indicator light remains con-

stant green, your device should oper-

ate when the HomeLink button is

pressed. At this point, if your device

operates, programming is complete.

. If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for two

seconds and release the HomeLink

button up to three times to complete

the programming process. At this point

if your device operates, programming

is complete. If the device does not

operate, continue with the next step of

the programming instructions.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-109

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

1) “Learn” button

5. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc...) locate the

“Learn”, “Smart”,or“Program” button. This

can usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the motor-

head unit (see the device’s manual to

identify this button). The name and color

of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”,or“Program” button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete

step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release the

HomeLink button up to three times. At this

point programming is complete and your

device should operate when the

HomeLink button is pressed and released.

1) Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, please refer to

“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”

F3-111.

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site.

3-110

! Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming

Canadian radio-frequency laws re quire

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-

sion, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

The indicator LED on th e hand-he ld

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished transmit-

ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the program-

ming procedures, replace “Programming a

New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the

following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s h and-held remote

every two seconds until the HomeLink

indicator light changes from orange to

green. You may now release the hand-

held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the “cycling” pro-

cess to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink button. Activation

will now occur for the trained device (i.e.

garage door opener, gate operator, secur-

ity system, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-

held remote of the device may also be

used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three

buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as

outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED

indicator will change from continuously lit

to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.

Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed

at any time beginning with “Programming

a New HomeLink Button” - step 1.

! Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink Button

To program a previously trained button,

follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orange after 20 seconds. The

HomeLink button can be released at this

point. Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink Button” - step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-

ming of a new device to the button, it will

revert to the previously stored program-

ming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-

nication

HomeLink has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink can receive and display “clos-

ing” or “opening” status messages from

compatible garage door opener systems.

At any time, HomeLink can also recall and

display the last recorded status commu-

nicated by the garage door opener to

indicate your garage door being “closed”

or “opened”.

HomeLink has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-111

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow

your vehicle speed to successfully receive

the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication

1) Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a

new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s

garage door status indicators will flash

rapidly green indicating that the garage

door two-way communication has been

enabled. If your garage door status

indicators flashed, two-way communica-

tion programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeL ink information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way Communication

1) Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink by simulta-

neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and

2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display

the last recorded status for three seconds.

1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blink-

ing Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-

ing Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

If two-way communication programming is

successful, HomeLink will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators.

3-112

! Certification

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline

at 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE

. This device complies with FCC rules

part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2)

This device must accept any interfer-

ence that may be received including

interference that may cause undesired

operation. WARNING: The transmitter

has been tested and complies with FCC

and IC rules. Changes or modifications

not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void

the user ’s authority to operate the

device.

. This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

an uncontrolled environment. End

Users must follow the specific operat-

ing instructions for satisfying RF ex-

posure compliance. This transmitter

must be at least 20 cm from the user

and must not be co-located or operat-

ing in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

. The term “IC:” before the certifica-

tion/registration number only signifies

that Industry Canada technical specifi-

cations were met.

HomeLink

and the HomeLink House

logo are registered trademarks of Gentex

Corporation.

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge the

distance of ve hicles be hind you

when changing lanes. Use the inside

mirror (or glance backwards) to

determine the actual size and dis-

tance of objects that you view in

convex mirror.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-113

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer

! Remote control mirror switch

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,

“R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional opera-

tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

Defogger and deicer

1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is acti-

vated only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position.

To activate the defogger and deicer

system, press the control switch that is

located on the climate control panel. The

rear window defogger, outside mirror

defogger and windshield wiper deicer are

activated simultaneously. The indicator

light on the control switch illuminates while

the defogger and deicer system is acti-

vated.

To turn them off, press the control switch

again. They also turn off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

3-114

15 minutes. If the rear window and the

outside mirrors have been cleared and the

windshield wiper blades have been deiced

completely before that time, press the

control switch to turn them off. If defrost-

ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,

you have to press the control switch to

turn them on again.

It is possible for the defogger and deicer

system to be set to continuous operation

mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for

models with a multi function display, the

setting can be changed using the display.

For details, refer to “Multi function display”

F3-49.

If the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level, continuous operation of

the defogger and deicer system is can-

celed and the system stops operating.

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than

necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface

of the rear window. They may

damage the conductors printed

on the window.

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to the

windshield.

. If the windshield is covered with

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem i s in the continuous operatio n

mode, if the vehicle speed remains at

9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

minutes, the windshield wiper deicer

automatically stops operating, though

the rear window defogger and outside

mirror defogger maintain continuous

operation in this condition.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem i s in the continuous operatio n

mode, if the battery voltage drops

below the permissible level, continu-

ous operation of the defogger and

deicer system is canceled and the

system stops operating.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in

personal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to

the fixed position, adjust the

steering wheel again. It is dan-

gerous to drive without locking

the steering wheel. This may

cause loss of vehicle control

and result in personal injury.

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

– CONTINUED –

3-115

Instruments and controls/Horn

1) Tilt adjustment

2) Telescopic adjustment

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to

“Front seats” F1-2.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down,

and forward and backward.

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

3-116

Ventilator control................................................. 4-2

Center and side ventilators.................................. 4-2

Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3

Type A ................................................................ 4-3

Type B ................................................................ 4-4

Automatic climate control operation ................. 4-5

Sensors .............................................................. 4-5

Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-6

Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-6

Temperature control ............................................ 4-7

Fan speed control ............................................... 4-8

Air conditioner control ........................................ 4-8

Air inlet selection ................................................ 4-8

Defrosting ............................................................ 4-9

Type A ................................................................ 4-9

Type B ................................................................ 4-9

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ........................................................ 4-9

Cleaning ventilation grille..................................... 4-9

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 4-10

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit.............................................................. 4-10

Checking air conditioning system before summer

season ............................................................ 4-10

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-10

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine

is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-10

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-10

Air filtration system ........................................... 4-11

Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-11

Climate control

Climate control/Ventilator control

Ventilator control

& Center and side ventilators

Center ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

Side ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

To open or close the ventilator, turn the

thumb-wheel up or down.

4-2

Climate control panel

& Type A

1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)

2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode

selection” F4-6.)

3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” F3-114.)

4) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” F4-8.)

5) Air conditioner butto n (Refer to “Air

conditioner control” F4-8.)

6) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” F4-8.)

7) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation” F4-5

and/or “Temperature control” F4-7.)

8) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control operation” F4-5.)

9) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate

control operation” F4-5.)

Climate control/Climate control panel

– CONTINUED –

4-3

Climate control/Climate control panel

& Type B

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation” F4-5

and/or “Temperature control” F4-7.)

2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode

selection” F4-6.)

3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” F3-114.)

4) DUAL mode button (Refer to ““DUAL”

mode (type B)” F4-7.)

5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” F4-8.)

6) Air conditioner butto n (Refer to “Air

conditioner control” F4-8.)

7) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” F4-8.)

8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)

9) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation” F4-5

and/or “Temperature control” F4-7.)

10) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control operation” F4-5.)

11) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate

control operation” F4-5.)

4-4

Automatic climate control

operation

When this mode is selected, the fan

speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control,

and air conditioner compressor operation

are automatically controlled. To activate

this mode, perform the following.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

setting the temperature much lower

than the current outlet air temperature

turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C” indi-

cator on the control panel illuminates.

1. Depress t he “AUTO ” button. The

indicator “FULL AUTO” on the display

illuminates.

2. Set the preferred temperature using

the temperature control dial.

NOTE

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. During FULL AUTO mode operation,

a small amount of air may flow from the

foot outlets when ventilation mode is

displayed.

. If you operate any of the buttons on

the control panel other than the “OFF”

button, rear window defogger button

and temperature control dial(s) during

FULL AUTO mode operation, the

“FULL” indicator on the control panel

will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator

will remain illuminated. You can then

manually control the system as desired

using the button you operated. To

change the system back to the FULL

AUTO mode, press the “AUTO” button.

. When the climate control system

turns off, the air inlet is fixed to the

outside air mode.

To turn off the climate control system,

press the “OFF” button.

& Sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are not treated

Climate control/Automatic climate control operation

– CONTINUED –

4-5

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

properly and become damaged, the sys-

tem may not be able to control the interior

temperature correctly. To avoid damaging

the sensors, observe the following pre-

cautions.

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows.

– Solar sensor: beside the windshield

defroster grille

– Interior air temperature sensor: next to

the steering column

– Outside temperature sensor: near the

front bumper opening

Manual climate control op-

eration

& Airflow mode selection

To select the airflow mode:

Type A: Turn the airflow mode selection

dial.

Type B: Press the airflow mode selection

button.

To select the defrost mode:

Press the defroster button.

Airflow modes are as follows.

(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of

the instrument panel and some through

windshield defroster outlets (A small

amount of air flows to the windshield and

4-6

both side windows to prevent fogging.)

(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”

F4-9.)

(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets

and both side outlets of the instrument

panel (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-9.)

NOTE

When the “ ” or “ ” mode is se-

lected, the air conditioner compressor

operates automatically regardless of

the position of the air conditioner

button to defrost the windshield more

quickly. However the indicator on the

air conditioner button will not illumi-

nate. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to the

outside air mode. After defrosting the

windshield by pressing the defroster

button “

”, pressing the button again

returns the system to the setting that

had been selected before the defroster

was activated.

& Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred interior temperature. With the

dial set to your preferred temperature, the

system automatically adjusts the tempera-

ture of air supplied from the outlets so that

the preferred temperature is achieved and

maintained.

If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,

the system provides maximum cooling

performance. If the dial is turned fully

clockwise, the system provides maximum

heating performance.

NOTE

The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

! “DUAL” mode (type B)

a) Front passenger’s side temperature

b) Driver’s side temperature

You can change the setting of the driver’s

side and front passenger’s side tempera-

ture independently by selecting the

“DUAL” mode.

You can select the “DUAL” mode by

performing either of the following proce-

dures.

. Press the “DUAL” button

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

– CONTINUED –

4-7

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

. Turn the passenger’s side temperature

control dial

The “DUAL” mode can be canceled by

pressing the “DUAL” button.

When the “DUAL” mode is selected:

Turn the driver’ssidedialtosetthe

driver’s side temperature. Turn the front

passenger’ssidedialtosetthefront

passenger’s side temperature.

When the “DUAL” mode is canceled:

Set the desired temperature by turning the

driver’s side dial.

When the “DUAL” mode is canceled, only

the driver’s side temperature is displayed.

& Fan speed control

The fan operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. Select the

preferred fan speed by turning the fan

speed control dial.

& Air conditioner control

The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.

Press the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is

on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.

To turn off the air conditioner, press the

button again.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. However, if the ambient

temperature decreases to approxi-

mately 32 8 F(08C), the air conditioner

compressor will stop operating.

& Air inlet selection

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet

selection button.

ON position (recirculation): Interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road.

OFF position (outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.

Press the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside conditions are no longer

dusty.

NOTE

When the battery is disconnected or

the battery voltage drops, the air inlet

selection operation indicator light may

blink. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion. However, if the indicator light

blinks every time you start the engine,

a malfunction may occur in the elec-

trical circuit. Have the vehicle in-

spected at the nearest SUBARU dealer.

4-8

Defrosting

& Type A

Select the “ ” mode by pressing the

defroster button, or select the “

” mode

by turning the airflow mode selection dial

to defrost or to dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows.

& Type B

Select the “ ” mode by pressing the

defroster button, or select the “

” mode

by pressing the airflow mode selection

button to defrost or to dehumidify the

windshield and front door windows.

NOTE

When the “ ” or “ ” mode is se-

lected, the air conditioner compressor

operates automatically regardless of

the position of the air conditioner

button to defrost the windshield more

quickly. However the indicator on the

air conditioner button will not illumi-

nate. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to the

outside air mode. After defrosting the

windshield by pressing the defroster

button “

”, pressing the button again

returns the system to the setting that

had been selected before the defroster

was activated.

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

& Cleaning ventilation grille

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

Climate control/Defrosting

– CONTINUED –

4-9

Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of

the air conditioner for maximum cooling

efficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any probl em with th e air conditioni ng

system.

& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving up a steep

incline.

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

1) Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a (as shown on the air

conditioner label). Therefore, the method

of adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant is different from the method

for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

4-10

Air filtration system

Replace the filter element according to the

replacement schedule as follows. This

schedule should be followed to maintain

the filter’s dust collection ability. Under

extremely dusty conditions, the filter

should be replaced more frequently. It is

recommended that you have your filter

checked or replaced by your SUBARU

dealer. For replacement, use only a

genuine SUBARU air filter kit. For the

replacement schedule, refer to the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing an air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE

We recommend that you take me a-

sures to protect the center console

with masking tape first, so that you

avoid scratching the center console

with the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

1) Stopper

(3) Push both sides of the glove box

inside to unlock the stoppers and then

pull down the glove box as far as it will

go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

Climate control/Air filtration system

– CONTINUED –

4-11

Climate control/Air filtration system

and remove the hinge portion. When

doing this, be careful not to damage

the hinge.

2. Remove the air filter according to the

following procedure in order to prevent

dust on the air cleaner from falling to the

inside of its housing.

(1) Push in the four stoppers to

unlock, and then slowly pull out the

air filter 4 in (10 cm) from the housing.

(2) Completely pull out the air filter by

gently tilting the front side of the air

filter downward.

3. Replace the air filter element with a

new one.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

5. Close the glove box.

6. Attach the service label to the driver ’s

side door pillar.

4-12

Antenna ................................................................ 5-2

Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-2

Audio set ............................................................. 5-2

Base display audio set (if equipped) .................... 5-3

STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set

(U.S. spec. models only, if equipped) ................. 5-5

Tips for operating the audio/visual system ........... 5-6

Basic information before use .............................. 5-14

Basic operation .................................................. 5-17

Unit settings ...................................................... 5-18

SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) ....................... 5-25

AM/FM radio....................................................... 5-27

SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if equipped) ................. 5-36

aha

by HARMAN ............................................. 5-43

Pandora

(if equipped) ....................................... 5-49

CD..................................................................... 5-52

USB memory...................................................... 5-54

iPod................................................................... 5-55

Bluetooth audio.................................................. 5-57

AUX ................................................................... 5-60

Steering switches for audio .............................. 5-62

Bluetooth

settings ............................................ 5-65

Regulatory information ....................................... 5-65

Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device .......... 5-65

Setting Bluetooth details.................................... 5-68

Hands-free phone system ................................. 5-70

Control screen................................................... 5-71

Registering/connecting a Bluetooth phone ......... 5-72

Using the phone switch/microphone................... 5-72

How to change the hands-free phone system ..... 5-73

Making a call ..................................................... 5-73

Receiving a call ................................................. 5-76

Talking on the phone ......................................... 5-77

Phone settings .................................................. 5-78

Voice command system .................................... 5-80

Using the voice command system...................... 5-80

Voice command system operation ...................... 5-82

Command list .................................................... 5-84

What to do if....................................................... 5-88

Troubleshooting................................................. 5-88

Appendix ............................................................ 5-92

Certification....................................................... 5-92

Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-92

Certification for Mexico models .......................... 5-93

Audio

Audio/Antenna

Antenna

& Roof antenna

The shark-fin type roof antenna is installed

in the center at the rear of the roof.

Audio set

Your vehicle may be equipped with one of

the following audio sets. Refer to the

pages indicated in this section for operat-

ing details.

CAUTION

. Always consult your SUBARU

dealer before installing a citizen

band radio or other transmitting

device in your vehicle. Such

devices may cause the electronic

control system to malfunction if

they are incorrectly installed or if

they are not suited for the vehi-

cle.

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the

audio/visual system on when

the engine is not running.

NOTE

. If a cell phone is placed near the

audio set, it may cause the audio set to

emit noise when the phone receives

calls. This noise does not indicate an

audio set malfunction. Note that a cell

phone should not be placed near the

audio set.

. Some functions may not be avail-

able depending on the market and

specifications of your vehicle.

. The images shown in this Owner’s

Manual are sample images. The actual

images may vary depending on the

market and specifications of your ve-

hicle.

5-2

& Base display audio set (if equipped)

1) Power/VOLUME knob

2) Eject button

3) AUDIO/TUNE knob

4) HOME button

5) APPS button

6) Display

7) SEEK/TRACK buttons

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

. Power and audio controls: refer to

“Basic operation” F5-17.

. SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped):

refer to “ SUBARU STARLINK” F5-25.

. Radio operation: refer to “AM/FM radio”

F5-27.

. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):

refer to “ SiriusXM Satellite Radio” F5-36.

. aha

: refer to “aha

by HARMAN”

F5-43.

. Pandora

(if equipped): refer to “Pan-

dora

” F5-49.

. CD (compact disc) player operation:

refer to “CD” F5-52.

. USB storage device: refer to “USB

memory” F5-54.

. iPod operation: refer to “iPod” F5-55.

. Bluetooth

audio: refer to “Bluetooth

audio” F5-57.

. Auxiliary input jack: refer to “AUX” F 5-

60.

. Hands-free phone system: refer to

“Hands-free phone system” F5-70.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-3

Audio/Audio set

NOTE

HD Radio

Technology (if equipped)

should be included as a feature in the

base display audio set.

This display audio set is referred to as

follows.

. U.S. customers: STARLINK

6.2 Mul-

timedia

. Canadian customers: 6.2-inch infotain-

ment system

5-4

& STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set (U.S. spec. models

only, if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

For details about how to use the

STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio

set, refer to the STARLINK

7.0 Multi-

media Plus or STARLINK

7.0 Multi-

media Navigation Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

HD Radio Technology should be in-

cluded as a feature in the STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-5

Audio/Audio set

& Tips for operating the audio/

visual system

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the audio/visual

system:

. Be careful not to spill beverages

over the audio/visual system.

. Do not put anything other than an

appropriate disc into the disc

slot.

NOTE

The use of a cell phone inside or near

the vehicle may cause a noise from the

speakers of the audio/visual system

which you are listening to. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

! Radio

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with the

radio — it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or phone wires can interfere with AM

signals. And of course, radio signals have

a limited range. The farther the vehicle is

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as the vehicle moves.

Here, some common reception problems

that probably do not indicate a problem

with the radio are described.

! FM

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40

km). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by

distortion.

Multi-path: FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for 2 signals to reach

the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If

this happens, the signals will cancel each

other out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering: These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping: If the FM signal being

listened to is interrupted or weakened, and

there is another strong station nearby on

the FM band, the radio may tune in the

second station until the original signal can

be picked up again.

! AM

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere — especially at

night. These reflected signals can inter-

fere with those received directly from the

radio station, causing the radio station to

sound alternately strong and weak.

Station interference: When a reflected

signal and a signal received directly from

a radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static: AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening or electrical

motors. This results in static.

! SiriusXM (if equipped)

. Cargo loaded on th e roof luggag e

carrier, especially metal objects, may

adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM

Satellite Radio.

. Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization may in-

validate the user’s right to operate the

equipment.

5-6

! CD player and disc

. This CD player is intended for use with

4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.

. Extremely high temperatures can keep

the CD player from working. On hot days,

use the air conditioning system to cool the

inside of the vehicle before using the

player.

. Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

make the CD player skip.

. If moisture gets into the CD player, the

discs may no t be able to be played.

Remove the discs from the player and

wait until it dries.

WARNING

CD players use an invisible laser

beam which could cause hazardous

radiation exposure if directed out-

side the unit. Be sure to operate the

player correctly.

Audio CDs

. Use only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not

be playable on your player:

– SACD

– dts CD

– Copy-protected CD

– Video CD

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-7

Audio/Audio set

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

CAUTION

. Do not use special shaped, trans-

parent/translucent, low quality or

labeled discs such as those

shown in the illustrations. The

use of such discs may damage

the player, or it may be impossi-

ble to eject the disc.

. This system is not designed for

use of Dual Discs. Do not use

Dual Discs because they may

cause damage to the player.

. Do not use discs with a protec-

tion ring. The use of such discs

may damage the player, or it may

be impossible to eject the disc.

. Do not use printable discs. The

use of such discs may damage

the player, or it may be impossi-

ble to eject the disc.

1) Correct

2) Wrong

. Handle discs carefully, especially when

inserting them. Hold them on the edge and

do not bend them. Avoid getting finger-

prints on them, particularly on the shiny

side.

. Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or

other disc damage could cause the player

to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To

see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the

light.)

. Remove discs from the players when

not in use. Store them in their plastic

cases away from moisture, heat and direct

sunlight.

5-8

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-

free cloth that has been dampened with

water. Wipe in a straight line from the

center to the edge of the disc (not in

circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free

cloth. Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or anti-static device.

! CD-R/RW discs

. CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process” (a

process that allows discs to be played

on a conventional CD player) cannot be

played.

. It may not be possible to play CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD

recorder or a personal computer because

of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on

the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the

lens of the unit.

. It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-

ing on the application settings and the

environment. Record with the correct

format. (For details, contact the appropri-

ate application manufacturers of the ap-

plications.)

. CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged

by direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-

peratures or other storage conditions. The

unit may be unable to play some damaged

discs.

. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the

player, playback will begin more slowly

than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.

. Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot

be played using th e DDCD (Double

Density CD) system.

! USB memory device

. US B commun ication form ats: USB

1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)

. File formats: FAT 16/32

. Correspondence class: Mass storage

class

! iPod

The followi ng iPod, iPod nano, iPod

classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices

can be used with this system.

Made for

. iPod touch (5th generation)*

. iPod touch (4th generation)

. iPod touch (3rd generation)

. iPod touch (2nd generation)

. iPod touch (1st generation)

. iPod classic

. iPod nano (7th generation)*

. iPod nano (6th generation)*

. iPod nano (5th generation)

. iPod nano (4th generation)

. iPod nano (3rd generation)

. iPod nano (2nd generation)*

. iPod nano (1st generation)*

. iPhone 5s*

. iPhone 5c*

. iPhone 5*

. iPhone 4s

. iPhone 4

. iPhone 3GS

. iPhone 3G

. iPhone

*: iPod video not supported

Depending on differences between mod-

els or software versions etc., some mod-

els might be incompatible with this sys-

tem.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-9

Audio/Audio set

! File information

Compatible compressed files (Audio)

Item USB DISC

Compatible

file format

MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in the

device

Maximum

512

Maximum

255

Files in the

device

Maximum

8000

Maximum

512

Files per

folder

Maximum

255

—

Corresponding sampling frequency

(Audio)

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER 3

32/44.1/48

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3

16/22.05/24

WMA files:

Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)

32/48/64/80/96/128/

160/192

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC

48/44.1/32/24/22.05/

16/12/11.025/8

Corresponding bit rates (Audio)

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER 3

32 - 320

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3

8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:

Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2)

CBR 32 - 192

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC

16 - 320

(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)

. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA

(Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Ad-

vanced Audio Coding) are audio compres-

sion standards.

. This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC

files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB mem-

ory, and Bluetooth device.

. This system can play disc recordings

compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level

2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file

system.

. When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,

add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/

.wma/.m4a).

. This system plays back files with .mp3/

.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/

AAC files respectively. To prevent noise

and playback errors, use the appropriate

file extension.

. This system can play only the first

session when using multi-session compa-

tible CDs.

. MP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3

formats. This system cannot display disc

title, track title and artist name in other

formats.

. WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/

AAC tag that is used in the same way as

an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-

tion such as track title and artist name.

. The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at

32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.

. This system can play back AAC files

encoded by iTunes.

. The sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit rates. In

order to achieve a reasonable level of

sound quality, discs recorded with a bit

rate of at least 128 kbps are recom-

mended.

. The MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded

using packet write data transfer (UDF

format). Discs should be recorded using

“pre-mastering” software rather than pack-

etwrite software.

5-10

. M3u playlists are not compatible with

the audio device.

. MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audio

device.

. The player is compatibl e with VBR

(Variable Bit Rate).

. When playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time

will not be correctly displayed if the fast

forward or reverse operations are used.

. It is not possible to check folders that

do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.

. MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8

levels deep can be played. However, the

start of playback may be delayed when

using discs containing numerous levels of

folders. For this reason, we recommend

creating discs with no more than 2 levels

of folders.

. The play order of the compact disc with

the structure shown above is as follows:

. The order changes depending on the

personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC

encoding software you use.

! Terms

! Packet write

. This is a general term that describes

the process of writing data on-demand to

CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is

written to floppy or hard discs.

! ID3 tag

. This is a method of embedding track-

related information in an MP3 file. This

embedded information can include the

track number, track title, the artist’s name,

the album title, the music genre, the year

of production, comments, cover art and

other data. The contents can be freely

edited using software with ID3 tag editing

functions. Although the tags are restricted

to a number of characters, the information

can be viewed when the track is played

back.

! WMA tag

. WMA files can contain a WMA tag that

is used in the same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA tags carry information such as track

title and artist name.

! ISO 9660 format

. This is the international standard for

the formatting of CD-ROM folders and

files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2

levels of regulations.

. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format

(8 character file names, with a 3 character

file extension. File names must be com-

posed of one-byte capital letters and

numbers. The “_” symbol may also be

included.)

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-11

Audio/Audio set

. Level 2: The file name can have up to

31 characters (including the separation

mark “.” and file extension). Each folder

must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

! MP3

. MP3 is an audio compression standard

determined by a working group (MPEG) of

the ISO (International Standard Organiza-

tion). MP3 compresses audio data to

about 1/10 the size of that on conventional

discs.

! WMA

. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an

audio compression format developed by

Microsoft

. It compresses files into a size

smaller than that of MP3 files. The

decoding formats for WMA files are Ver.

7, 8 and 9.

. This product is protected by certain

intellectu al property rights of Microsoft

Corporation and thi rd parties. Use or

distribution of such technology outside of

this product is prohibited without a license

from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft

subsidiary and third parties.

! AAC

. AAC is short for Advanced Audio

Coding and refers to an audio compres-

sion technology standard used with

MPEG2 and MPEG4.

5-12

! Error messages

Mode Message Explanation

“Disc read error.”

. This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the disc.

. This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside

down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc which is

not playable is inserted.

“Please eject disc.”

There is a trouble inside the system.

Eject the disc.

USB

“Media not connected. Press AUDIO/TUNE knob

to exit.”

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. Refer to

“Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device” F5-16.

“No audio file.”

This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB

memory.

“Unplayable file” This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.

iPod

“Media not connected” This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not connected to the system.

“No audio file” This indicates that there is no audio file in the connected iPod.

“Unplayable file”

This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.

NOTE

If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-13

Audio/Audio set

& Basic information before use

WARNING

When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running, always apply the

parking brake for safety. Failure to

do so may result in loss of control of

your vehicle and cause an accident

or serious injury.

CAUTION

. To prevent damaging the screen,

touch the screen keys with your

finger lightly.

. Wipe off fingerprints using a

glass cleaning cloth. Do not use

chemical cleaners to clean the

screen, as they may damage the

touch screen.

! Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.

Operation method Outline Main use

Touch

Quickly touch and release

once.

Changing and selecting various

settings

Drag*

Touch the screen with your

finger, and move the screen

to the desired position.

Scrolling the lists

Flick*

Quickly move the screen by

flicking with your finger.

Scrolling the main screen page

*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

NOTE

There may be a delayed response to flick operation that are performed at high

altitudes.

5-14

! Touch screen operation

This system is operated mainly by the

keys on the screen.

When a screen key is touched, a beep

sounds. You can set the beep sound.

Refer to “Unit settings” F5-18.

NOTE

. If the system does not respond to

touching a screen key, move your

finger away from the screen and touch

it again.

. Grayed-out screen keys cannot be

operated.

. The displayed image may become

darker and moving images may be

slightly distorted when the screen is

cold.

. In extremely cold conditions, the

screen may not be displayed correctly.

Also, the screen keys may be less

responsive than usual when pressed.

. When you look at the screen

through polarized material such as

polarized sunglasses, the screen may

be dark and difficult to see. If so, look at

the screen from different angles, adjust

the screen settings or take off your

sunglasses. Refer to “Unit settings”

F5-18.

! Entering letters and numbers/list

screen operation

! Entering letters and numbers

When entering the Bluetooth device name

or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters

and numbers can be entered via the

screen.

Enter letters (example: In-Car-Device

setting)

No. Function

Enter the desired characters (alpha-

bet key mode).

Switch to the screen for characters.

Enter a space.

Confirm the characters/numbers en-

tered into the window.

No. Function

Delete a character/number entered

into the window.

! List screen

Multimedia playlists (example: iPod play-

list)

No. Function

Select a category that wants to play

back.

Return to the playback display of

each mode.

Select to skip to the next or previous

page.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-15

Audio/Audio set

! Initial screen

When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the initial screen will be

displayed and the system will begin

operating.

. When using the SUBARU STARLINK

function (if equipped), the display screen

may be different from the screen above.

. After a few seconds, the caution screen

will be displayed.

. After about 5 seconds, the caution

screen automatically switches to the next

screen.

! Connecting and disconnecting a

USB memory/portable device

The USB port and the AUX jack are

located as shown in the following illustra-

tion.

NOTE

. This unit does not support commer-

cially available USB hubs.

. Turn on the power of the device

when it is not turned on.

. This device has a USB port for USB

memory/portable device.

. For compati ble USB memory de-

vices, refer to “USB memory device”

F5-9.

. For compatible iPod models, refer to

“iPod” F5-9.

. Even if a USB hub is used to

connect more than two USB devices,

5-16

only the first two connected devices

will be recognized.

& Basic operation

This section describes some of the basic

features of the audio/visual system. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio/visual system works when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the audio/

visual system on longer than neces-

sary when the engine is not running.

NOTE

Some functions can also be operated

by using the voice command system.

For details, refer to “Voice command

system” F5-80.

! Turning the system on and off

Press the power/VOLUME knob to turn

the audio/visual system on and off. When

the system turns on, the mode that was in

use the last time the system was turned off

will be displayed. Press and hold the knob

to turn the display off.

Turn this knob to adjust the volume.

! Selecting an audio source

1. Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.

2. Select the desired source.

Example: Source select screen

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-17

Audio/Audio set

NOTE

. If the audio control screen appears,

select the “Source” key on the audio

screen or press the AUDIO/TUNE knob

again.

. When you push the AUDIO/TUNE

knob while any screen other than the

audio control screen is displayed, the

display will return to the audio control

screen.

. When the AUDIO/TUNE knob is

pushed and held, the graphic equalizer

screen will be displayed. Refer to

““Graphic Equalizer”” F5-22.

! Selecting a function menu

Press the HOME button to display home

screen.

Item Function

AUDIO

Select to display the main

screen of the audio source that

was selected previously.

PHONE

Select to display the hands-free

function using your cell phone.

Refer to “Hands-free phone

system” F5-70.

APPS

Select to display the functions

linked with a smartphone. Refer

to “SUBARU STARLINK” F5-

25.

SETTINGS

Select to display the functions

for performing various settings.

Refer to “Unit settings” F5-18.

& Unit settings

Sound quality adjustment, screen adjust-

ment, and information of the audio unit are

displayed.

1. Press the HOME button on the audio

panel.

2. Touch the “SETTINGS” key.

3. Select the items to be set.

Available setting:

. General settings: Select the

tab to

check the system software update infor-

mation. Refer to “General settings” F5-19.

. Bluetooth settings: Select the

tab to

set th e Bluetooth settings. Refer to

“Bluetooth settings” F5-19.

. Sound settings: Select the

tab to set

the sound quality settings. Refer to

“Sound settings” F5-19.

. Display settings: Select the

tab to

set the screen settings. Refer to “Display

settings” F5-24.

. SUBARU STARLINK settings (if

equipped): Select to the

tab set the

SUBARU STARLINK settings. Refer to

“SUBARU STARLINK settings” F5-25.

5-18

! General settings

Touch the

tab for the audio unit basic

settings.

Item Function

System

Language

Select to change the language.

Button

Beeps

Select to set the sound beeps

on/off.

System

Software

Select to update software ver-

sions. This menu is not used in

usual operation.

Reset to

Factory

Setting

Select to reset the device to

factory settings. This menu is not

used in usual operation.

After resetting to factory settings,

turn ignition off and on again.

! Bluetooth settings

Touch the

tab to set Bluetooth.

Item Function

BT De-

vices Con-

nection

Select to pair/connect the

Bluetooth devices.

In-Car-De-

vice setting

Select to enter the Bluetooth

device name or PIN-code.

For details, refer to “Bluetooth

settings”

F5-65.

! Sound settings

Touch the

tab to set the sound quality.

Item Function

Balance/

Fader

Select to adjust speaker volume

balance (right/left and front/rear).

Speed Vo-

lume Con-

trol

Select to adjust speaker volume

coupled to vehicle speed.

Graphic

Equalizer

Select to adjust sound quality in

each frequency band.

Sound Re-

storer

Select to add high-pitched tone

to the compressed audio file.

Volume

Smoother

Select to adjust volume differ-

ence between audio sources.

Virtual

Bass

Select to add harmonic tone so

that low-pitched tone is

strengthened.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-19

Audio/Audio set

Item Function

Vocal Im-

age Con-

trol

Select to pick-up vocal sound

signal from the sound data, and

adjust it to right/left or front/rear.

Refer to the following table for the adjustment range of each audio setting item and

default value.

Item Step Default

Balance/

Fader

Volume

Balance

Control

Balance L9-R9 0 (Center)

Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)

Vocal

Image

Control

Balance L9-R9 R3

Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)

Speed Volume Control OFF, Low, High Low

Graphic Equalizer −6-+6 0 (Flat)

Sound Restorer ON, OFF ON

Volume Smoother OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid

Virtual Bass OFF, Low, Mid, High

Mid

5-20

! “Balance/Fader”

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is important for good quality audio

program listening.

Keep in mind that when listening to a

stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/l eft balance will increase the

volume of 1 group of sounds while

decreasing the volume of another.

Touch the “Set ” key of the “Balance/Fader”

key. The “B alance/Fader” screen will

appear.

. Volume Balance setting

1. Select the “Volume Balance Control”

key.

2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or

“

” key.

3. Adjust the fader by pressing “

” or

“

” key.

. Vocal image setting

1. Select the “Vocal Image Control” key.

2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or

“

” key.

3. Adjust the fader by pressing “

” or

“

” key.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-21

Audio/Audio set

! “Speed Volume Control”

The system adjusts to the optimum

volume and tone quality according to

vehicle speed t o compensate for in-

creased vehicle noise.

1. Touch the right side key of the “Speed

Volume Control” key.

2. Select the desired item. The “High”

key comes to have a bigger effect. When

the “OFF” key is selected, speed volume

control function is cancelled.

! “Graphic Equalizer”

You can adjust the sound quality by

increasing/decreasing the gain for each

frequency range.

1. Touch the “ Set” key of the “Graphic

Equalizer” key.

2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer

patterns (the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Acoustic”,

“Impact”, “Smooth” and “Flat” key) and 3

customized patterns (the “SET 1” - “SET

3” key) are available.

3. When customizing the equalizer pat-

tern, touch among “SET 1”, “SET 2 ” or

“SET 3” and then touch the “Adjust” key.

4. Adjust the level of each frequency

band by touching “

” or “ ” key.

5-22

! “Sound Restorer”

You can play compressed audio data with

a sound quality that is close to the original

sound.

Select the “ON” or “OFF” key by the right

side key of the “Sound Restorer” key.

! “Volume Smoother”

This function reduces the difference in

volume among the sound sources to be

played.

1. Touch the right side key of the “Volume

Smoother” key.

2. Select the “OFF” , “Low”, “Mid” or

“High” key. The “High” key comes to have

a bigger effect. When the “OFF” key is

selected, the volume smoother function is

cancelled.

! “Virtual Bass”

This function enables you to adjust the

bass tone.

1. Touch the right side key of the “Virtual

Bass” key.

2. Select the “OFF”, “Low”, “Mid” or

“High” key. The “High” key comes to have

a bigger effect. When the “OFF” key is

selected, the virtual bass function is

cancelled.

! “Vocal Image Control”

Refer to ““Balance/Fader”” F5-21.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-23

Audio/Audio set

! Display settings

Touch the

tab to set display.

Item Function

Day/Night

Mode

The “Auto”, “Day” or “Night” key

can be selected on the pop-up

screen.

When the “Auto” key is selected,

the screen changes to day or

night mode depending on the

position of the headlight switch.

Brightness

Touch “+” or “−” to adjust the

brightness.

NOTE

. When the screen is viewed through

polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pat-

tern may appear on the screen due to

optical characteristics of the screen. If

this is disruptive, please operate the

screen without polarized sunglasses.

. If the screen is set to “Day” mode

with the headlight switch turned on,

this condition is memorized even with

the engine turned off.

! How to adjust the rear view

image

In the camera display, the brightness, tint,

color and black level of the screen can be

adjusted.

1. Depress the brake pedal fully and stop

the vehicle.

2. While the vehicle is stopped, set the

shift lever (MT models) or select lever

(CVT models) in the “R” position, and then

touch the display.

3. Touch the “Display Adjustment” key.

4. Touch the items to adjust the rear

camera screen.

Camera display

WARNING

When adjusting camera display

screen, make sure to depress the

brake pedal fully to avoid the vehicle

from moving. Failure to do so may

lead to a serious accident.

NOTE

The camera display can be accessed

when the rear camera monitor is dis-

played.

5-24

! SUBARU STARLINK settings (if

equipped)

Touch the

tab to change the SUBARU

STARLINK settings.

Item Function

Browser

cache

Select to initialize cache files

that the browser stores. If the

confirmation screen appears

and the “OK” key is selected, the

cache files will be deleted.

& SUBARU STARLINK (if

equipped)

The SUBARU STARLINK function allows

the system to link with a smartphone using

Bluetooth.

! How to use SUBARU STARLINK

1. Connect to the audio system. Use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

. For details about connecting an

iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-

ing and disconnecting a USB memory/

portable device” F5-16.

. For details about registering or con-

necting an Android device: Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device” F5-65.

2. Press the HOME button, and then

touch the “APPS” key, or press the APPS

button on the audio panel. The APPS

screen is displayed.

3. Touch the “SUBARU STARLINK” key

on the APPS screen. The disclaimer

screen or the error screen is displayed.

4. Touch the “Check” key on the disclai-

mer screen and then the APPS main

screen will appear. If you touch the

“Cancel” key, the disclaimer screen dis-

appears and the previous screen will be

displayed again.

NOTE

. The SUBARU STARLINK connection

error screen will be displayed due to

one of the following possible reasons.

– Your smartphone and the system

has not been connected via USB

(for iPhone) or Bluetooth (for An-

droid).

– SUBARU STARLINK APPS has

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-25

Audio/Audio set

not been activated.

. You can also switch to aha or

Pandora (if equipped) from the APPS

screen.

! APPS main screen

No. Function

Select to go to the Music APPS

screen.

Select to go to the News APPS

screen.

Select to go to the Calender APPS

screen.

Select to go to the iHeartRadio

APPS screen.

Select to go to the Weather APPS

screen.

NOTE

. The error screen will be displayed

while using SUBARU STARLINK due to

one of the following possible reasons.

– When your smartphone has no

service or the Bluetooth communi-

cation is not possible.

– When your smartphone is turned

off.

– When th e SUBARU STARLIN K

APPS is quit.

– When connection to the SUBARU

STARLINK server is not possible.

– When a problem occurs other

than a server error.

. When using the SUBARU STARLINK

function, a disclaimer screen will be

displayed. Be sure to fully read the

contents before using the function.

. Supported devices

– iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/

iPhone 5 (i OS Ver. 5.1 or later)/

iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s

– Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)

5-26

& AM/FM radio

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to change the band.

The HD Radio indicator on the top

right of the screen changes accord-

ing to the reception condition of HD

Radio (if equipped).

Select to display a station list (if

equipped). Refer to “Selecting a

station from the list” F5-28.

No. Function

Select to scan radio channels.

This function enables searching for

receivable stations automatically,

and tunes in to a frequency for 5

seconds if a station is found. When

the 5-second period has elapsed, the

system searches for the next recei-

vable station again, and tunes in to

the frequency for 5 seconds.

Select to open the “Option” screen.

Refer to “Radio settings” F5-29.

When you touch a key, the system

tunes to the stored frequency.

When you touch and hold a key, the

system stores the frequency to the

selected preset channel. Refer to

“Presetting a station” F5-28.

No. Function

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

Turn to step up/down frequencies.

Turn to move up/down the list. Also,

the knob can be used to enter

selections on the list screens by

pressing.

Press to select an audio mode. For

details, refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-17.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-

18.

Press to seek for a station/channel.

Press and hold for continuous seek.

NOTE

. Although FM is normally static free,

reception can be affected by the sur-

rounding area, atmospheric conditions,

station strength and transmitter dis-

tance. Buildings or other obstructions

may cause momentary static, flutter or

station interference. If reception con-

tinues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a

stronger station.

. The radio automatically changes to

stereo reception when a stereo broad-

cast is received.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-27

Audio/Audio set

. The radio automatically blends to an

HD Radio signal (if equipped) in AM or

FM where available.

! How to change the source

Select the “AM” or “FM” key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-17.

! Presetting a station

In total 18 stations can be set for the FM

band (6 each for FM1, FM2 and FM3) and

12 stations can be set for the AM band (6

each for AM1 and AM2).

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. If you touch and hold a key, the system

stores the frequency to the selected

preset channel.

! Selecting a station from the list (if

equipped)

A station list can be displayed.

1. Touch the

tab.

2. Touch the tab and the station list will

appear.

3. Select the desired station.

! Update the station list

Touch the “Update Station List” key on the

station list screen and the following screen

will be displayed.

Item Function

Select to execute the manual

update.

Cancel

Select to cancel the manual

update.

NOTE

. The audio system sound is muted

during refresh operation.

. In some situations, it may take some

time to update the station list.

! Bookmark the list

You can store and call up the received

data (images, song titles, artist names,

etc.). The stored data is displayed as a list.

1. Touch the

tab on the station list

screen and the following screen will be

5-28

displayed.

2. Select an item from the bookmark list,

the following image will be displayed.

3. When you call up bookmark informa-

tion, a QR code conver ted from the

bookmark information will be displayed

on the screen. You can access a URL by

reading the QR code using a smartphone,

etc.

! Delete bookmark from the list

1. Touch the “Delete Bookmark” key on

the station list screen and the following

screen will be displayed.

2. If you select an item from the book-

mark list, the item will be deleted from the

bookmark list.

3. Touch the “Delete All” key. If the

confirmation screen appears and the

“OK” key is selected, all bookmark items

in the list will be deleted.

! Radio settings

You can perform various radio settings.

1. Touch the

tab.

2. Select the desired i tem from th e

following table.

Item Function

HD (if

equipped)

Select to turn HD radio on/off.

PTY Select

(if

equipped)

Select to set the PTY group.

Auto Store

Select to detect 6 radio stations

with strong frequencies automa-

tically and to store them in the

order of frequency.

! About HD Radio

technology (if

equipped)

HD Radio

Technology is the digital

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your

radio product has a special receiver which

allows it to receive digital broadcasts

(where available) in addition to the analog

broadcasts it already receives. Digital

broadcasts have better sound quality than

analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts

provide free, crystal clear audio with no

static or distortion. For more information,

and a guide to available radio stations and

programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-29

Audio/Audio set

AM and FM broadcast sound quality is

now crystal clear, with AM sound quality

that virtually matches FM quality of the

past, and FM broadcasts that have near

CD-level sound quality.

HD Radio Technology manufactured un-

der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-

tion. Foreign Patents. HD Radio

and the

HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are

proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

FM stations can provide additional digital-

only audio programming on HD2/HD3

Channels.

! Available HD Radio

technology (if

equipped)

! Multicast

On the FM radio frequency most digital

stations have “multiple” or supplemental

programs on one FM station.

1. Touch the “Sub CH” key on the control

screen and the following screen will be

displayed.

2. The indication that shows whether the

current broadcast is digital or analog is

displayed on the top right of the control

screen.

3. Select the desired channel.

Turning the AUDIO/TUNE knob can also

5-30

select the desired multicast channel.

NOTE

. HD Radio

stations can be preset.

. An orange

will be displayed on

the screen when in digital. The

will

first appear in a gray color indicating

the station is indeed (an analog and) a

digital station. Once the digital signal is

acquired, the logo will change to a

bright orange color.

. The song title and artist name will

appear on the screen when available by

the radio station. The radio station can

send album pictures when available.

. As a user works through the analog

radio stations, (where applicable) the

radio receiver will automatically tune

from an analog signal to a digital signal

within 5 seconds.

! Preserving a music information

Tag information in the music broadcasting

is preserved in the system and transmits

to an iPod.

1. Touch the “Ta g” key in the control

screen while receiving HD Radio, the tag

setting screen will be displayed.

2. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device” F5-16.

. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is

not turned on.

. Once an iPod is connected, the

music tag moves from the radio into

the iPod.

. When the iPod is connected to

iTunes, the tagged information of the

songs which were tagged while listen-

ing to the radio can be viewed. Then a

user may decide to purchase the song

or CD/Album which had been listened

to on their radio.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-31

Audio/Audio set

In addition, the following messages appear.

Display Message Contents

“Tag storage full”

If there is not enough memory in the digital

audio

“Already Stored”

If the same information is stored in the digital

audio

“Storing Failed” If the store process in the digital audio failed

“iPod full Tags cannot be stored” If there is not enough memory in the iPod

“Starting to transfer the Tag files.”

If the system starts to transmit music informa-

tion to an iPod

“Transferring Failed”

If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod failed

“X Tag(s) Sent” (X = number of transmitted

information) will be displayed.

If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod is successful

NOTE

. The tag information can not be

preserved while scanning or caching

the radio station.

. If taggi ng the music i nformation

fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag was

unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio

tag was unsuccessful.)” will be dis-

played on the screen. If this occurs, tag

the information again.

. Program Service Data: Presents song

name, artist, station IDs, and other rele-

vant data streams.

. iTunes Tagging provides you the op-

portunity to discover a wide range of

content and the means to “tag” that

content for later review and purchase from

the iTunes Store. Also refer to the Apple

Automotive specifications for implement-

ing iTunes Tagging.

5-32

. Visual information related to content

being played on your HD Radio receiver,

such as Album Art, historical photographs,

still art from live broadcasts, among other

related content.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-33

Audio/Audio set

! Troubleshooting guide

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time alignment - a user may hear

a short period of programming replayed or an

echo, stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog and digital volume is

not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame

mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact

the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in and out.

Radio is shifting between analog and digital

audio.

Reception issue. May clear-up as the vehicle

continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the

HD Radio

off will change the radio mode to

analog audio.

Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3

multicast channel had been playing.

The radio does not have access to digital

signals at the moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal

returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new

station.

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/

HD3 multicast channel preset.

The digital multicast content is not available until

HD Radio

broadcast can be decoded and

make the audio available. This takes up to 7

seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to

become available.

Text information does not match the present

song audio.

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio

_station_experiences.

No text information shown for the present

selected frequency.

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio

_station_experiences.

The “Acquiring” caution message appears

when the system attempts to acquire digital

transmission.

When acquiring digital data while receiving a

digital broadcast and SPS station.

. When the reception in digital of the SPS station

is confirmed.

. When the system determined that the SPS

station could not be received.

. When the SPS broadcast is ended (stopped) by

the radio station while receiving SPS.

5-34

Experience Cause Action

The “HD Channel is unavailable” caution

message appears when digital reception is not

possible.

. When the system determined that the SPS

station could not be received while receiving

a digital broadcast and SPS station.

. When the SPS broadcast is ended

(stopped) by the radio station while receiv-

ing SPS.

. When the status is changed to acquiring digital

data because the reception condition of SPS

station has improved.

. When the received station is changed.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-35

Audio/Audio set

& SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if

equipped)

! SiriusXM Data Service

Data service information, which is com-

prised of traffic information and weather

information, can be received via the

SiriusXM Radio.

To receive the data service information in

the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service is necessary.

Content set to use the SiriusXM data

service is reset when personal information

is initialized.

! Control screen and audio panel

Control screen

No. Function

Perform the SXM setting. See be-

low. Refer to “SXM setting” F5-42.

Search for a channel which the

direction of higher frequency from

current frequency. Reproduce the

channel that can receive by 5

seconds.

No. Function

A list is displayed. There are three

types of lists (“Presets”, “Categories”

or “All Channels”) available.

. “Presets”: Preset channels are

displayed in a list.

. “Categories”: The channels of

the selected category are dis-

played in a list.

. “All Channels”: All selectable

channels are displayed in a list.

5-36

No. Function

Display the contents information of a

channel receiving.

Presets list (30 channels max.) is

displayed. Refer to “Presetting a

channel” F5-40.

Categories list is displayed. Refer to

“Selecting a channel from the list”

F5-40.

All channels list is displayed.

The available received channels are

displayed, and you can select a

channel.

Change to the Direct Tune display.

Refer to “Direct Tune” F5-41.

Return to the previous display.

Return to the playback display.

Audio panel

No. Function

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-

18.

Turn right to step up channels and

turn left to step down channels.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-17.

Press to step up/down channels.

Press and hold to step up/down

channels fast.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-37

Audio/Audio set

! How to subscribe to SiriusXM Sa-

tellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in

the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service is necessary.

A SiriusX M Satellite Radio is a tuner

designed exclusively to receive broad-

casts provided under a separate subscrip-

tion.

! How to subscribe

It is necessary to enter into a separate

service agreement with SiriusXM Satellite

Radio in order to receive satellite broad-

cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-

tional activation and service subscription

fees apply that are not included in the

purchase price of the vehicle and digital

satellite tuner.

For complete information on subscription

rates and terms, or to subscribe to

SiriusXM Satellite Radio:

. U.S. customers:

Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349

. Canadian customers:

Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079

WARNING

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services

— Legal Disclaimers and Warn-

ings

– Fees and Taxes — Subscrip-

tion fee, taxes, one time acti-

vation fee, and other fees may

apply. Subscription fee is con-

sumer only. All fees and pro-

gramming subject to change.

Subscriptions subject to Cus-

tomer Agreement available at

www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or

www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

SiriusXM U.S. satellite and

data services are available

only in the contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM satellite

service is also available in

Canada: see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Explicit Language Notice —

Channels with frequent expli-

cit language are indicated

with an “XL” preceding the

channel name. Channel block-

ing is available for SiriusXM

Satellite Radio receivers b y

notifying SiriusXM at:

. U.S. customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349

. Canadian customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079

CAUTION

. It is prohibited to copy, decom-

pile, disassemble, reverse engi-

neer, hack, manipulate or other-

wise make available any technol-

ogy or software incorporated in

receivers compatible with the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio System

or that support the XM website,

the Online Service or any of its

content. Furthermore, the

AMBE

voice compression soft-

ware included in this product is

protected by intellectual property

rights including patent rights,

copyrights, and trade secrets of

Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

. Note: this applies to SiriusXM

Satellite Radio receivers only

and not XM Ready devices.

5-38

NOTE

. SiriusXM Satellite Services — De-

scriptions

– Only SiriusXM Satellite Ra dio

brings you more of what you love,

all in one place. Get over 175

channels, including commercial-

free music, plus the best sports,

news, talk, comedy and entertain-

ment. Welcome to the world of

satellite radio. More information

about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is

available online at

www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) and

www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

. SiriusXM Satellite Services — Sub-

scription Instructions

– For SiriusXM Services requiring

a subscription (such as SiriusXM

Satellite Radio, and some Infotain-

ment & data services), the following

paragraph shall be included.

Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio

and some Infotainment & data ser-

vices monthly subscriptions sold

separately after trial period. Sub-

scription fee is consumer only. All

fees and programming subject to

change. Subscriptions are subject

to the Customer Agreement avail-

able at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or

www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio

Inc. All other marks, channel names

and logos are the property of their

respective owners.

For more information, program

schedules, and to subscribe or

extend subscription after compli-

mentary trial period; more informa-

tion is available at:

. U.S. customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349

. Canadian customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely

responsible for the quality, availability

and content of the satellite radio ser-

vices provided, which are subject to

the terms and conditions of the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer ser-

vice agreement.

. Customers should have their radio

ID ready; the radio ID can be found by

tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For

details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO

ID” below.

. All fees and programming are the

responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite

Radio and are subject to change.

! How to change the source

Select the “Sirius XM” key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-17.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-39

Audio/Audio set

! Presetting a channel

1. The presets list is displayed via either

of the following procedures.

. When you touch the

tab in the

SiriusXM main screen (if the list that

was displayed the last time is Presets).

. When you select the

tab in each

list screen.

2. The current channel is stored if you

touch and hold the preset list key. You can

store up to 30 channels (A beep sounds

when a channel stored).

The playing icon is displayed for the

currently selected channel.

! Selecting a channel from the list

1. The categories list is displayed via

either of the following procedures.

. When you touch the

tab in the

SiriusXM main screen (if the list that

was displayed the last time is Cate-

gories).

. When you select the

tab in each

list screen.

2. Each channel list is displayed when

you select each category item.

5-40

In addition, the following messages appear.

Display Message Contents

“Subscription Update”

“Press OK to Continue”

An update to your SiriusXM subscription has

been received by the SiriusXM tuner. Touch

any key to continue.

“Channel XXX Not Available”

(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)

This channel is not a valid SiriusXM channel.

The channel number has been entered incor-

rectly, or the channel was removed from the

SiriusXM channel lineup.

“Channel XXX Not Subscribed Call.”

“Call SiriusXM to Subscribed.”

(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)

This channel is not included in your SiriusXM

subscription plan.

“Ch Locked”

“Lock Code?”

The selected channel has been locked by the

parental controls.

A prompt to enter the unlock code will appear.

“Check Antenna”

Ensure the SiriusXM antenna cable is con-

nected to the SiriusXM tuner correctly.

Check the SiriusXM antenna wire for breaks or

sharp bends.

Replace the antenna if necessary.

“No Signal”

The vehicle must be outside, and the antenna

must have a clear view of the southern sky.

NOTE

Contact SiriusXM

. Listener Care Center (U.S. customers):

1-866-635-2349

. Listener Care Centre (Canadian customers):

1-877-209-0079

! Direct Tune

1. A channel input screen is displayed

when you touch the

tab.

2. Input any number and touch the “OK”

key, receive the channel which input.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-41

Audio/Audio set

! SXM setting

1. An option menu screen is displayed

when you touch the

tab on the lower

left side of the screen. Th e “Options”

screen will appear.

Option menu screen

No. Function

Set the lock function of each chan-

nel. Input the password is necessary

for operation.

Set the password of the lock func-

tion.

2. A password input screen is displayed

when you touch the “Set” key of the

Channel Lock function.

Password input screen

3. When the input password is approved,

change to the lock channel selection

screen.

Lock channel selection screen

4. In the channel list, touch the channel

that should be locked.

! Displaying the Radio ID

Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a

unique radio ID. The “Radio ID” is required

when activating an SiriusXM Satellite

Services or when reporting a problem.

. If “Ch 000” is selected using the

AUDIO/TUNE knob, the ID code will be

displayed.

. Touch the

key. The Radio ID will be

displayed on the “Options” screen.

5-42

& aha

by HARMAN

aha is a cloud-based application that

connects to the system and gives you

access to your favorite web content safely

and easily. There are over 30,000 stations

spanning internet radio, personalized mu-

sic, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter, res-

taurant and hotel searches, weather and

more. For more about aha, go to the aha

site (http://www.aharadio.com).

When connecting iPhone and iPod touch

or Android devices with the aha applica-

tion installed, you can control, view, and

hear aha content through the system.

In order to connect to this system, use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch or

Android devices will be referred to as a

smartphone.

WARNING

Do not connect or operate the

smartphone while driving. Doing so

may result in loss of control of your

vehicle and cause an accident or

serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your smartphone in

the car. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the smartphone.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

smartphone while it is connected

as this may damage the smart-

phone or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-43

Audio/Audio set

! Control screen and panel

Control screen (main screen and station screen)

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to open the station list. Refer to

“Using aha application” F5-48.

Select to fast forward the current con-

tent item by 30 seconds.

Select to display the contents list of the

selected station.

Select to make a phone call to the

current content item.

A phone number is distributed depend-

ing on content items.

This feature is available only in these

cases.

No. Function

The track pauses when pressed during

playback and plays back when touched

during pause.

Select to set thumbs up.

Select to set thumbs down.

Select to start the playback from the

beginning of the content in the target

station.

Select to rewind the current content

item by 15 seconds.

Select to display the preset list.

Return to the control screen.

No. Function

Select to display the nearby list.

5-44

Audio panel

No. Function

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-18.

Press to display the station operation

screen.

Press to select an audio mode.

Turn to display the next/previous con-

tent item.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source” F5-17.

Press to display the next/previous con-

tent item.

NOTE

. For safety reasons, cer tain func -

tions are not available wh ile your

vehicle is in motion.

. In order to maximize signal recep-

tion, performance and precision of the

smartphone, please ensure the smart-

phone is placed as close to the system

as possible, while ensuring it is stowed

and secure while driving.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position, the battery of

the connected iPhone/iPo d touch is

charged.

. iPhone/iPod touch may not be re-

cognized when the ignition switch is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position. In this

case, remove the iPhone/iPod touch

and reconnect it.

. The accuracy of the displayed in-

formation or the signal reception per-

formance depends on the smartphone

or the connected device, and it ’s wire-

less connection.

. Since the aha application uses sig-

nals from GPS satellites and wireless

communication lines, it may not work

properly in the following locations.

– In a tunnel

– In underground parking lots

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-45

Audio/Audio set

– Outside wireless communication

range, such as some countryside

areas

– Where the wireless communica-

tion network is congested, or where

communications are restricted

. Depending on the circumstances

and environment, the signal may be

weak or not be received. In such cases,

an error may occur.

. Top 35 entries in the preset station

list on the smartphone are displayed.

When there are more than 35 entries in

the preset station list, change the order

of the entries in the list on the smart-

phone. You can change the priority of

your preset stations within the aha

application (after disconnected from

this system) to modify the station list

shown on the screen. Please see your

smartphone aha application “Edit Pre-

sets (in Main menu)” to modify this list.

. For operating the smartphone, see

the instruction manual that comes with

it.

. If there are multiple music files

stored on your iPhone or iPod touch,

it may take some time until playback

starts.

. Playback may be intermittent when

you switch to streaming Bluetooth

audio from aha on your smartphone

device.

. When connecting the device via

Bluetooth, the communication speed

may become slower than via USB.

! Before using aha application

In order to use the aha application on this

system, the application must be installed

on the smartphone.

! Settings required to use a ha

application

. Search and download the aha applica-

tion from your smartphone app store.

– iPhone and iPod touch: Apple App

Store via iTunes

– Android device: Google Play Store

. Create an account and login to the aha

application on the smartphone.

NOTE

Please use the latest version of the aha

application.

! About app-based connected con-

tent

Requirements for using the connected

content services of the aha application

on this system.

. Latest version of the system is compa-

tible with connected content application(s)

for the smartphone, available from aha,

downloaded to your smartphone.

. A current a ccount with a wireless

content service provider.

. A smartphone data plan: If the data

plan for your smartphone does not provide

for unlimited data usage, additional

charges from your carrier may apply for

accessing app-based connected content

via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi or 4G LTE wireless

networks.

. Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G,

Wi-Fi or 4G LTE networks.

NOTE

. Changes to product specifications

may result in differences between the

content of the manual and features of

the product.

. Be careful not to exceed the data

usage li mits for your smartphone.

Doing so will result in additional data

usage charges from your phone car-

rier.

. Access to app-based connected

content will depend on the availability

of wireless cell and/or Wi-Fi network

coverage for the purpose of allowing

your smartphone to connect to the

internet.

. Service availability may be geogra-

phically limited by region. Consult the

wireless connected content se rvice

5-46

provider for additional information.

. Ability of this product to access

connected content is subject to change

without notice and could be affected by

any of the following: compatibility

issues with future firmware versions

of the smartphone; compatibility is-

sues with future versions of the con-

nected content application(s) for the

smartphone; changes to or disconti-

nuation of the connected content ap-

plication(s) or service by its provider.

. Communication and phone call

charges for smartphones should be

paid by the wireless subscriber.

. If you lose the data in a smartphone

or other device while using it with the

system, no compensation will be given

for the lost data.

. Fuji Heavy Industries makes no

guarantee regarding the content pro-

vided by aha.

. aha may not work due to factors on

smartphones, smartphone applications

or stations. Fuji Heavy Industries is not

responsible for it.

! About the supported devices

This system supports the following de-

vices.

. For iPhone/iPod touch users

Type Generation

Firmware

version or

iPhone

iPhone 3G iOS 4.2.x

iPhone 3GS iOS 6.1.x

iPhone 4 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 4s iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5c iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5s iOS 7.0.x

iPod touch

iPod touch iOS 3.1.x

iPod touch 2 iOS 4.2.x

iPod touch 3 iOS 5.1.x

iPod touch 4 iOS 6.1.x

iPod touch 5

iOS 7.0.x

NOTE

Note that the warranty does not apply if

an unsupported iPhone/iPod touch is

connected.

. For Android device users

Android OS Specification Profile

Android

Ver. 2.2 or

Ver. 2.3

Bluetooth

Specification

Ver. 1.1 or

higher

(Ver. 2.0 +

EDR or higher

is recom-

mended)

. aha Con-

nect Bin-

ary API

over SPP

. Digital

audio by

A2DP

NOTE

The available functions may vary de-

pending on the type of Android device.

! Connecting a smartphone

If you connect a sm artphone to this

system after starting a supported aha

application on the smartphone, you can

display and operate the aha application

displayed on the smartphone on t he

system screen.

1. Run the aha application on your

smartphone.

2. Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the

USB port or connect the Android device

by utilizing the Bluetooth connection (SPP

and A2DP profile).

. For details about connecting an

iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-

ing and disconnecting a USB memory/

portable device” F5-16.

. For details about registering or con-

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-47

Audio/Audio set

necting an Android device: Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device” F5-65.

NOTE

When iPhone/iPod touch and Android

devices are connected at the same

time, iPhone/iPod touch is prioritized.

! How to change the source

. Select the “aha” key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Basic operation ”

F5-17.

. Select the “aha” key on the APPS

screen. Refer to “SUBARU STARLINK”

F5-25.

NOTE

When starti ng-up “aha”,thereare

some smartphone models for which

“aha” application does not start up

automatically.

! Using aha application

1. When the top screen is displayed,

touch the station key.

Example of the main screen

2. Select the desired station from the list.

The selected station is displayed.

NOTE

. The following operations are not

available on this system. Perform these

operations on the smartphone.

– Add/Reorder/Delete stations

– Login to Facebook/Twitter

. For the aha function, the following

touch screen gestures are not avail-

able.

– Multi-touch operation

– Double-tap

. For details on the services or the

operations, check the aha site

(http://www.aharadio.com) on the inter-

net.

. The button display will vary depend-

ing on each station or content item.

5-48

& Pandora

(if equipped)

Pandora is an application for a smart-

phone. This can automatically select and

play recommended tracks.

By rating the track currently playing, tracks

that better match your preference will be

recommended.

In order to connect to this system, use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

Depending on differences between mod-

els or software version etc., some models

might be incompatible with this system.

This function is not available if the

Pandora application has not been in-

stalled on the smartphone.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the smartphone while

driving. Doing so may result in loss

of control of your vehicle and cause

an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your smartphone in

the car. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the smartphone.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

smartphone while it is connected

as this may damage the smart-

phone or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

NOTE

Follow the specific operation proce-

dures for the smartphone application.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-49

Audio/Audio set

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to open the station list. Refer to

“Station list” F5-51.

Select to skip the current track.

The track pauses when touched during

playback and plays when touched

during pause.

Select to set thumbs up.

This gives a high rating to the current

song.

All other similar songs will be played

back more frequently.

No. Function

Select to set thumbs down.

This gives a low rating to the current

song.

All other similar songs will be played

back less frequently.

When you select thumbs down, the

current track is skipped.

During playback of a station, you can

use this key to bookmark a song or

artist. Refer to “Registering Bookmarks”

F5-51.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn clockwise to skip to the next track.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source” F5-17.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-18.

No. Function

Press to skip to the next track/cover art.

! Connecting a smartphone

Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the

USB port or connect the Android device

by using Bluetooth connection (SPP and

A2DP profile).

. For details about connecting an

iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device” F5-16.

. For details about registering or con-

necting an Android device: Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

de-

vice” F5-65.

! How to change the source

The Pandora operation screen can be

reached by the following methods:

. Connecting a Pandora device. Refer to

“Connecting a Bluetooth device” F5-68 or

“Connecting and dis connecting a USB

memory/portable device” F5-16.

. Select the “Pandora” key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-17.

. Select the “Pandora” key on the APPS

screen. Refer to “SUBARU STARLINK”

F5-25.

5-50

NOTE

When starting-up Pandora, there are

some smartphone models for which

Pandora application does not start up

automatically.

! Registering Bookmarks

You can register the music and artist now

being played in Bookmark.

1. Touch the

tab.

2. Select the desired key. The following

items are appeared on the screen.

Item Function

Track

When selected after the Book-

mark key is pressed, the current

track is bookmarked.

Artist

When selected after the Book-

mark key is pressed, the current

artist is bookmarked.

Cancel

Select to cancel the bookmark

operation.

! Station list

You can select, add or delete a station.

When the

tab is touched on the main

screen, a station list will be displayed.

No. Function

Select to sort the list in the chronologi-

cal order of when the Station List was

created.

Select to create a station.

The station can be created using track

names or artist names.

Select to delete a station.

Return to the control screen.

Select to sort the list based on the

alphabetical order of the station names.

! Store the station

You can register a station.

1. Touch the

tab on the Pandora

main screen.

2. Touch the “New Station” key, and then

select the desired key.

Item Function

From Track

Select to create a station using a

track name.

From Artist

Select to create a station using

an artist name.

Cancel

Select to cancel the operation to

add a station.

! Delete the station

You can delete a station.

1. Touch the

tab on the Pandora top

screen.

2. Touch the “Delete Station” key, and

then the station list is appeared.

3. Select the item to delete the station. If

the confirmation screen appears and the

“OK” key is selected, the selected station

will be deleted from station list.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-51

Audio/Audio set

& CD

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode” F5-53.

Audio CD:

Select to display a track list.

MP3/WMA/AAC disc:

Select to display a folder list.

Shows progress.

The tracks in the disc are played

back for 10 seconds each from the

beginning of the track.

No. Function

MP3/WMA/AAC disc:

Select to choose a folder.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

Press to eject a disc.

Disc slot

Turn to select a track/file.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-17.

No. Function

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-

18.

Press to select a track/file.

Press and hold to fast forward/re-

wind.

NOTE

. Depending on the compression data

format of the inserted CD, some keys

may not be displayed on the screen.

. If a disc contains CD-DA files and

MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA

files can be played back.

. If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the

title of the disc and track will be

displayed. Up to 32 characters can be

displayed.

. If the disc contains no CD-TEXT,

only the track number would be dis-

played on the screen.

5-52

! Loading a disc

CAUTION

Never try to disassemble the audio

kit or lubricate any part of the CD

player. Do not insert anything other

than a disc into the slot.

Insert a disc into the disc slot. After

insertion, the disc is automatically loaded.

NOTE

When inserting a disc, gently insert it

with the label facing up.

! Unloading a disc

Press the eject button to remove the disc.

! How to change the source

The CD operation screen can be reached

by the following methods:

. Insert a disc. Refer to “Loading a disc”

F5-53.

. Select the “DISC” key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-17.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start folder repeat.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to start shuffle folder.

Return to the control screen.

NOTE

Depending on the compression data

formant of the inserted CD, the dis-

played play mode may differ from the

illustration shown here.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-53

Audio/Audio set

& USB memory

Audio files on the USB memory can be

played.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the USB memory while

driving. Doing so may result in

losing control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your USB memory

in the car. In particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the USB memory.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

USB memory while it is con-

nected as this may damage the

USB memory or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

USB memory or its terminal.

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode” F5-55.

Select to display folder list.

Shows progress.

The tracks in the folder are played

back 10 seconds each from the

beginning of the track.

Select to choose a folder.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

No. Function

Turn to select a file/track.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-17.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-

18.

Press to select a file/track.

Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

5-54

! Connecting a USB device

You can connect a USB device to the

vehicle USB port. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device” F5-16.

! How to change the source

The USB Audio playback screen can be

reached by the following methods:

. Connect a USB memory. Refer to

“Connecting and disconnecting a USB

memory/portable device” F5-16.

. Select the “USB/iPod” key on the

source select screen. Refer to “Selecting

an audio source” F5-17.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start folder repeat.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to start shuffle folder.

Return to the control screen.

& iPod

Audio files on the iPod can be played.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the iPod while driving.

Doing so may result in loss of

control of your vehicle and cause

an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your portable player

in the car. I n particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the portable player.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the por-

table player while it is connected

as this may damage the portable

player or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-55

Audio/Audio set

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode” F5-57.

Select to display iPod List. Refer to

“iPod settings” F5-57.

Shows progress.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to select a track/file.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source” F5-17.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-18.

No. Function

Press to select a track/file.

Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

NOTE

. When an iPod is connected using a

genuine USB cable, the iPod sta rts

charging its battery.

. When an iPod is connected and the

audio source is changed to iPod mode,

the iPod will resume playing from the

same point it was last used.

. Depending on the iPod that is con-

nected to the system, certain functions

may not be available.

. Files/tracks selected by operating a

connected iPod may not be recognized

or displayed properly.

! Connecting the iPod

You can connect an iPod to the vehicle

USB port using the USB cable. Refer to

“Connecting and dis connecting a USB

memory/portable device” F5-16.

5-56

! How to change the source

TheiPodoperationscreencanbe

reached by the following methods:

. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device” F5-16.

. Select the “USB/iPod” key on the

source select screen. Refer to “Selecting

an audio source” F5-17.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to turn off shuffle.

Touch to start shuffle album.

Return to the control screen.

! iPod settings

You can choose the following items from

the list screen after touching the

tab

on the screen.

Icon Function

Select to display the play list.

Select to display tracks list.

Select to display artists list.

Select to display albums list.

Select to open other list (“Gen-

res”, “Composers”, “Audiobooks”

and “Podcast”).

Select to open “Genres” list.

Select to open “Composers” list.

Select to open “Audiobooks” list.

Select to open “Podcasts” list.

& Bluetooth audio

The Bluetooth au dio system enables

users to enjoy listening to music that is

played on a portable player on the vehicle

speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth, a

wireless data system capable of playing

portable audio music without cables. If

your device does not support Bluetooth,

the Bluetooth audio system will not func-

tion.

WARNING

. Do not operate the player’s con-

trols or connect to the Bluetooth

audio system while driving.

Doing so may result in loss of

control of your vehicle and cause

an accident or serious injury.

. Your audio unit is fitted with

Bluetooth antennas. People with

implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchronization ther-

apy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the

Bluetooth antennas. The radio

waves may affect the operation

of such devices.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-57

Audio/Audio set

. Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-

synchronization therapy-pace-

makers or implantable cardiover-

ter defibrillators should consult

the manufacturer of the device

for information about its opera-

tion under the influence of radio

waves. Radio waves could have

unexpected effects on the opera-

tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your portable player in

the vehicle. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the portable player.

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to “Select

play mode” F5-59.

Select to display as a list (for the

models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or high-

er).

The track pauses when touched dur-

ing playback and plays when touched

during pause.

Select to open Bluetooth Settings.

Refer to “Setting Bluetooth details”

F5-68.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

No. Function

Turn to select a track.

Press to select an audio source. Refer

to “Selecting an audio source” F5-17.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-18.

Press to select a track.

Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

5-58

NOTE

. Depending on the Bluetooth device

that is connected to the system, the

music may start playing when selecting

the

key while it is paused. Con-

versely, the music may pause when

selecting the

key while it is playing.

. In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not function:

– The Bluetooth device is turned

off.

– The Bluetooth device is not con-

nected.

– The Bluetooth device has a low

battery.

. It may take time to connect the

phone when Bluetooth audio is being

played.

. For operating the portable player,

see the instruction manual that comes

with it.

. If the Bluetooth device is discon-

nected due to poor reception from the

Bluetooth network when the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion, the system will automatically

reconnect to the portable player.

. If the Bluetooth device is discon-

nected on purpose, such as it was

turned off, this does not happen.

Reconnect the portable player manu-

ally.

. Bluetooth device information is re-

gistered when the Bluetooth device is

connected to the Bluetooth audio sys-

tem. When selling or disposing of the

vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio

information from the system. Refer to

“Bluetooth

settings” F5-65.

! Connecting a Bluetooth device

To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is

necessary to register a Bluetooth device

with the system.

. Registering an additional device

1. Select the “Add” key on the Bluetooth

devices connection screen.

2. For more information: Refer to “Regis-

tering/connecting Bluetooth

device” F5-

65.

. Selecting a registered device

1. Select the “ Select” key on the

Bluetooth devices connection screen.

2. For more information: Refer to “BT

Devices Connection screen” F5-68.

! How to change the source

Select the “BT Audio” key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-17.

NOTE

Depending on the type of portable

player connected, some functions

may not be available and/or the screen

may look differently than shown in this

manual.

! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear

when play mode key is touched. Select

the preferred play mode from the following

items.

Icon Function

Touch to start 1 track repeat.

Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to repeat the tracks in the

group.

Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to play tracks in the order

in which they are registered in

the audio device.

Touch to start shuffle group.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-59

Audio/Audio set

Icon Function

Return to the control screen.

NOTE

If the connected device does not sup-

port the group repeat mode, the group

functions are not available.

& AUX

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the portable audio device

while driving. Doing so may result in

loss of control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

. Do not leave portable audio de-

vice in the vehicle. The tempera-

ture inside the vehicle may be-

come high, resulting in damage

to the player.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the por-

table audio device while it is

connected as this may damage

the portable audio device or its

terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable audio device or its term-

inal.

5-60

! Control screen and audio panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to adjust the audio gain level.

Refer to “Audio level settings” F5-61.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Press to select an audio source.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source”

F5-17.

Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-

18.

! Connecting a portable audio device

You can connect a portable audio device

to the vehicle AUX jack. Refer to “Con-

necting and disconnecting a USB mem-

ory/portable device” F5-16.

! How to change the source

The AUX operation screen can be

reached by the following methods:

. Connect a portable audio device. Refer

to “Connecting and disconnecting a USB

memory/portable device” F5-16.

. Select the “AUX” key on the source

select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-17.

! Audio level settings

You can set the audio gain level.

1. Select the

tab on the screen, and

then touch the right side key of the “Audio

Level” key.

2. Select the audio level from the follow-

ing items.

. Low

. Mid

. High

Audio/Audio set

5-61

Audio/Steering switches for audio

Steering switches for audio

Some parts of the audio/visual system can

be adjusted using the switches on the

steering wheel.

1) + − switch

/ switch

3) Mute/Enter switch

4) List switch

5) Back switch

6) Source switch

5-62

. +/− switch

Mode Operation Function

Except list screen

Press Volume up/down

Press and hold Volume up/down continuously

List screen Press Move cursor up/down

Pandora main screen (if equipped) Press and hold

“+” switch is thumb up/“−” switch is thumb down

. / switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SiriusXM (if equipped)

Press Preset channel up/down

Press and hold

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is

being pressed

aha

Press Content up/down

Press and hold

Reverse the current content item for 15 sec-

onds/Fast forward the current content item for

30 seconds

Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB, iPod, BT

audio

Press Select a track/file

Press and hold Fast forward/rewind

Pandora (if equipped) Press and hold Thumbs up

List screen Press

Move cursor left/right

Audio/Steering switches for audio

– CONTINUED –

5-63

Audio/Steering switches for audio

. Mute/Enter switch

Mode Operation Function

List screen Press Select cursor entry

CD, USB, iPod, BT audio, Pandora (if equipped), aha Press Pause or play back

AM/FM radio, AUX, SiriusXM (if equipped) Press

Mute or cancel mute

. Back switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Return to the previous screen

All Press and hold

Return to the HOME screen

. List switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press

Show list screen

. Source switch

Mode Operation Function

All Press

Change audio modes

NOTE

In the aha, Pandora (if equipped) and SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) mode, some operation may be done on the screen

depend on the selected APPS.

5-64

Bluetooth

settings

WARNING

Be sure to park the vehicle in a safe

location before connecting or oper-

ating a Bluetooth phone or audio

device. Failure to do so may result

in loss of control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

& Regulatory information

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc.

& Registering/connecting

Bluetooth

device

You can register up to five devices,

regardless of whether they are Bluetooth

phones or audio devices.

NOTE

. Once the phone has been regis-

tered, it is possible to use the hands-

free system or Bluetooth audio.

. Devices cannot be registered during

driving.

! Registering a Bluetooth phone for

the first time

To use the hands-free system, it is

necessary to register a Bluetooth phone

with the system.

For details about registering a Bluetooth

device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

Audio device for the first time” F5-66.

1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting

of your cell phone on.

. This function is not available when

Bluetooth connection setting of your

cell phone is set to off.

2. Press the HOME button and select the

“SETTINGS” key.

3. Touch the

tab and then the “SET-

TINGS” screen will appear.

Settings (When the tab is selected)

. Operations up to this point can also

be performed by pressing the off hook

switch on the steering wheel.

4. To register a device, touch the “Set”

key on “BT Devices Connection”.

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

– CONTINUED –

5-65

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

“BT Devices Connection” screen (At the

initial startup and when no device is

registered).

5. Touch the “Add” key.

When the “Add” key is selected (Waiting

for the connection request from a device).

. For details about operating the

Bluetooth device, see the manual that

comes with it.

. To cancel the registration, touch the

“Cancel” key.

6. Register the Bluetooth device using

your Bluetooth device.

. A PIN-code is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible

Bluetooth devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth device being con-

nected, a message confirming regis-

tration may be displayed on the

Bluetooth device’s screen. Respond

and operate the Bluetooth device

according to the confirmation mes-

sage.

7. Check that the screen is displayed

when registration is complete.

. The system waits for connection

requests coming from the registered

device.

. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-

tions are not yet available.

! Registering a Bluetooth Audio de-

vice for the first time

To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary

to register an audio devi ce with the

system.

The device registration procedure is the

same for both the hands-free system and

Bluetooth audio.

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time” F5-65.

2. Select the “Add” key.

The “Add” key is not displayed when five

devices are already registered.

To add another device, you need to delete

one of the registered devices.

Press the

key for the device to be

deleted, and then select the “OK” key.

3. Register the Bluetooth device using

your Bluetooth device.

. A PIN-code is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pa iring) compatib le

Bluetooth devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth device being con-

nected, a message confirming regis-

tration may be displayed on the

Bluetooth device’s screen. Respond

and operate the Bluetooth device

according to the confirmation mes-

sage.

4. Check that the screen is displayed

when registration is complete.

. The sy stem waits for co nnection

requests coming from the registered

device.

. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-

tions are not yet available.

5-66

! Profiles

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth Device Spec. Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth

Audio Device

Bluetooth Specification

Registering a Bluetooth de-

vice

Ver. 1.1

Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Bluetooth Device Profile Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5

OPP (Object Push Profile)

Transferring the contacts

Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1

PBAP (Phone Book Access

profile)

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0

MAP (Message Access

Profile)

Bluetooth phone message — Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile)

Connecting a Bluetooth

phone

— Ver. 1.1

Bluetooth Audio Device

A2DP (Advanced Audio

Distribution Profile)

Bluetooth audio system

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2

AVRCP (Audio/Video Re-

mote Control Profile)

Ver. 1.0

Ver. 1.4

NOTE

. If your cell phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles

individually will not be possible.

. If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may

not work properly.

. For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

– CONTINUED –

5-67

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

& Setting Bluetooth details

! BT Devices Connection screen

1. Press the HOME button.

2. Touch the “SETTINGS” key and then

touch the

tab.

3. Touch the “BT Devices Connection”

key and then select the desired device to

“BT Devices Connection” screen (One

device is registered.)

No. Function

tering/connecting Bluetooth

device”

F5-65.

Make the connection to the registered

device.

No. Function

This shows the status of the device

connection profile. (The icon illuminates

while connected.)

Delete the registered device. Refer to

“Deleting a Bluetooth device” F5-69.

Switch to connect/disconnect Bluetooth

communication. Refer to “Bluetooth

ON/OFF” F5-68.

! Connecting a Bluetooth device

Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (phones and

audio devices) can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been

registered, select which device to connect

to.

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection

screen” F5-68.

2. Select the device to be connected.

. Supported profile icons will be dis-

played.

–

: Phone

–

: Audio device

–

: Smartphone Application

. Supported profile icons for currently

connected devices will illuminate.

. The audio icon i lluminates only

when in the Bluetooth audio mode.

. All icons are dimmed when

Bluetooth is set to off or when the

connection cannot be made with the

device.

NOTE

. It may take time if the device con-

nection is carried out during Bluetooth

audio playback.

. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

device being connected, it may be

necessary to perform additional steps

on the device.

. It is not possible to establish a

Bluetooth connection with iOS devices

currently connected with a USB cable.

. Supported profile icons of the un-

selected devices are not displayed if

several Bluetooth devices have been

registered.

! Bluetooth ON/OFF

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection

screen” F5-68.

2. Select the “ON” or “OFF” key by the

right side of the “Connect with Bluetooth”

key. The “ON” key establishes a connec-

tion, and the “OFF” key disconnects the

connection.

5-68

NOTE

The setting is fixed as the “OFF” key

when no device is registered.

! Deleting a Bluetooth device

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection

screen” F5-68.

2. Select the desired device.

3. Touch the

key for the device to be

deleted, and then select the “OK” key.

NOTE

When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the

contact data will be deleted at the same

time.

! “In-Car-Device setting” screen

The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed

and changed.

1. Display the “SETTINGS ” screen. Refer

to “Registering a Bluetooth phone for the

first time” F5-65.

2. On the “SETTINGS” screen for “In-

Car-Device setting”, select the “Set” key.

No. Function

Display the Bluetooth device address

of the in-vehicle equipment.

Display the Bluetooth device name of

the in-vehicle equipment. The default

name is “SUBARU BT”, which can be

changed by selecting it and entering

alphanumeric characters.

Display the PIN code of the in-vehicle

equipment. The default code is

“1234”, which can be changed by

selecting it and entering numbers.

Delete one character from the cur-

rently selected item (BT device name

or the PIN code).

Save the current BT device name and

PIN code.

Numeric input keys.

No. Function

Switch the screen to input characters.

! Editing the Bluetooth device

name

The device name can be set or changed.

1. Touch the “Name” key.

2. Enter a name and then select the “Set”

key.

! Editing the PIN-Code

The PIN-code can be set or changed.

1. Select the “PIN ” Key.

2. Enter a PIN-code and then select the

“Set” key.

NOTE

If the “PIN” key is already selected, the

“ABC” key is cross-hatched and dis-

abled.

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

5-69

Audio/Hands–free phone system

Hands-free phone system

The hands-free system enables calls to be

made and received without having to take

your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth

is a wireless data system that enables cell

phones to be used without being con-

nected by a cable or placed in a cradle.

The operating procedure of the phone is

explained here.

WARNING

. While driving, do not use a cell

phone or connect the Bluetooth

phone. Doing so may result in

loss of control of your vehicle

and cause an accident or serious

injury.

. Your audio unit is fitted with

Bluetooth antennas. People with

implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchronization ther-

apy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the

Bluetooth antennas. The radio

waves may affect the operation

of such devices.

. Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-

synchronization therapy-pace-

makers or implantable cardiover-

ter defibrillators should consult

the manufacturer of the device

for information about its opera-

tion under the influence of radio

waves. Radio waves could have

unexpected effects on the opera-

tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your cell phone in the

vehicle. The temperature inside may

rise to a level that could damage the

phone.

NOTE

. If your cell phone does not support

Bluetooth, this system cannot function.

. In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not function:

– The cell phone is turned off.

– The current position is outside

the communication area.

– The cell phone is not connected.

– The cell phone has a low battery.

. When using the hands free function

and other Bluetooth functions at the

same time, the following problems may

occur:

– The Bluetooth connection may

be cut.

– Noise may be heard when play-

ing back voice with the Bluetooth

function.

. The other party’s voice will be heard

from the front speakers. The audio/

visual system will be muted during

phone calls or when hands-free voice

commands are used.

. Talk alternately with the other party

on the phone. If both parties speak at

the same time, the other party may not

hear what has been said. (This is not a

malfunction.)

. Keep call volume down. Otherwise,

the other party’s voice may be audible

outside the vehicle and voice echo may

increase. When talking on the phone,

speak clearly towards the microphone.

. The other party may not hear you

clearly when:

– Drivingonanunpavedroad.

(Making excessive traffic noise.)

– Driving at high speeds.

– The moonroof or windows are

open.

– The air conditioning vents are

5-70

pointed towards the microphone.

– The sound of the air conditioning

fan is loud.

– Thereisanegativeeffecton

sound quality due to the phone

and/or network being used.

. When another phone is connected,

the following registered data cannot be

read:

– Contact data

– Call history data

– All phone settings

. When selling or disposing of the

vehicle, initialize the data. Refer to

“Unit settings” F5-18.

. Once initialized, the data and set-

tings will be erased. Take extra caution

when initializing the data.

. The voice command system sup-

ports phone commands, so dialing a

phone number using your voice is

possible. Refer to “Voice command

system” F5-80.

. The images shown in this Owner’s

Manual are sample images. The actual

images may vary depending on the

market and specifications of your ve-

hicle.

& Control screen

PHONE (Menu) screen

PHONE (Dialpad) screen

No. Function

Open the “Incoming Calls” screen.

Refer to “By incoming calls” F5-73.

Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen.

Refer to “By outgoing calls” F5-74.

Open the “Contacts” screen. Refer to

“By contacts list” F5-74.

Open the dialpad screen. Refer to “By

Dialpad” F5-75.

Open the phone volume settings

screen. Refer to “Phone volume set-

tings” F5-78.

Use to make a phone call. You cannot

press this key until you open the

dialpad screen and enter a phone

number.

Open the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth

details” F5-68.

Enter the phone number that you

want to call.

Switch the screen to the phone

(menu) screen.

NOTE

When the cell phone is not registered

and the Bluetooth setting is off, a

message is displayed instead of menu

items.

Audio/Hands–free phone system

– CONTINUED –

5-71

Audio/Hands–free phone system

& Registering/connecting a

Bluetooth phone

To use the hands-free system for cell

phones, it is necessary to register a cell

phone with the system. Refer to “Register-

ing/connecting Bluetooth

device” F5-65.

! Bluetooth phone condition display

The condition of the Bl ueto oth ph one

appears on the upper right side of the

screen.

& Using the phone switch/mi-

crophone

. Steering switch

By pressing the steering switch, a call can

be received or ended without taking your

hands off the steering wheel.

1) Volume control switch

2) Off hook switch

3) On hook switch

. Microphone

The microphone is used when talking on

the phone.

Type A

Type B

5-72

& How to change the hands-

free phone system

The phone (menu) screen can be used to

make a phone call. To display the hands-

free operation screen, press the HOME

button and then select the “PHONE” key,

or press the off hook switch on the

steering wheel.

& Making a call

There are several methods by which a call

can be made, as described below.

1. Press the HOME button on the audio

panel.

2. Touch the “PHONE” key.

3. Select the desired key to make a call

from the list.

Item Function

Incoming

Calls

Display the history of incoming

calls. Refer to “By incoming

calls” F5-73.

Outgoing

Calls

Display the history of outgoing

calls. Refer to “By outgoing calls”

F5-74.

Contacts

Display the phonebook. Refer to

“By contacts list” F5-74.

Dialpad

Dial a phone number. Refer to

“By Dialpad” F5-75.

NOTE

You can also make a call by using the

following functions.

. Make a call using the off hook

switch on the steering wheel. Refer to

“By off hook switch” F5-76.

. Make a call using voice operation.

Refer to “Voice command system” F5-

80.

! By incoming calls

On the phone (menu) screen, select the

“Incoming Calls” key to open the “Incom-

ing Calls” screen.

You can make a call by selecting an item

in the incoming call history list.

If there is no incoming call history, a

message appears to indicate that there

is no incoming call history data.

Incoming Calls screen

No. Function

Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen.

Open the “Contacts” screen.

Delete all incoming call history data.

The “Delete All” key is disabled when

there is no incoming call history.

Audio/Hands–free phone system

– CONTINUED –

5-73

Audio/Hands–free phone system

When you select an item in the history list

on the “Incoming Calls” screen, the out-

going call screen opens.

NOTE

. Up to 10 items in the incoming call

history are listed. Scroll the screen to

see items that are not on the screen.

. When making a call to the same

number continuously, only the most

recent call is listed in call history.

. When a phone number registered in

the contact list is received, the name is

displayed.

. Number-withheld calls are also

memorized in the system.

. International phone calls may not be

made depending on the type of cell

phone you have.

. The list should group together con-

secutive entries with the same phone

number and same call type.

! By outgoing calls

On the phone (menu) screen, select the

“Outgoing Calls” key to open the “Out-

going Calls” screen. You can make a call

by selecting an item in the outgoing call

history list.

If there is no outgoing call history, a

message appears to indicate that there

is no outgoing call history data.

Outgoing Calls screen

No. Function

Open the “Incoming Calls” screen.

Open the “Contacts” screen.

Delete all outgoing call history data.

The “Delete All” key is disabled when

there is no outgoing call history.

When you select an item in the history list

on the “Outgoing Calls” screen, the out-

going call screen opens.

NOTE

. Up to 10 items in the outgoing call

history are listed. Scroll the screen to

see items that are not on the screen.

. When making a call to the same

number continuously, only the most

recent call is listed in call history.

. When a phone number registered in

the contact list is received, the name is

displayed.

. Number-withheld calls are also

memorized in the system.

. International phone calls may not be

made depending on the type of cell

phone you have.

. The list should group together con-

secutive entries with the same phone

number and same call type.

! By contacts list

On the phone (menu) screen, select the

“Contacts” key to open the phone number

list screen.

You can make a call by selecting an item

in the list (up to five phone numbers are

listed).

If there is no contact data, a message is

displayed to indica te that there is no

5-74

contact data.

Contacts screen

No. Function

Open the “Incoming Calls” screen.

Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen.

Open a pop-up screen for starting the

download of contact data. Refer to

“Update contacts from phone” F5-79.

Delete all contact data. The “Delete

All” key is disabled when there is no

contact data. Refer to “Deleting the

contact data” F5-80.

No. Function

Open a list of contacts that starts with

the selected character. This key is

cross-hatched and cannot be se-

lected if there is no contact data that

starts with the selected character.

Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the

list of contacts.

When you select a phone number on the

screen, the outgoing call screen opens.

NOTE

Up to 1000 items in the contact data are

listed. Scroll the screen to see items

that are not on the screen.

! When the contact is empty

For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-

patible Bluetooth phones

On the “Contacts” screen, select the

“Download Contacts” key. A screen where

you can select how to download contacts

opens.

You can select to download all items or

download one item. For details, refer to

“Update contacts from phone” F5-79.

! Delete contacts

When the “Delete All” key is selected, all

contact data downloaded i nto the in-

vehicle equipment will be deleted.

Refer to “Deleting the contact data” F5-

80.

! By Dialpad

Input the phone number manually using

the keypad displayed on the screen.

Phone (Dialpad) screen

No. Function

Allow you to enter numbers from 0 to

9 and *, #, and +. To enter “+”, press

and hold the “0” key.

Delete one character from the entered

characters.

Audio/Hands–free phone system

– CONTINUED –

5-75

Audio/Hands–free phone system

No. Function

Switch the screen to the phone

(menu) screen.

Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen and

dials the entered phone number. This

is the same as pressing the off hook

switch on the steering wheel. This key

is cross-hatched and cannot be se-

lected until the phone number is

entered.

Open the “Options” screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings” F5-78.

Open the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth

details” F5-68.

When you enter a phone number on the

screen and select the

key, the “Out-

going Call” screen opens.

! By off hook switch

Calls can be made using the latest call

history item.

1. Press the off hook switch on the

steering wheel to display the phone

(menu) screen.

2. Check that the call screen is dis-

played.

! Outgoing screen

Outgoing call screen

No. Function

Open the “Options” screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings” F5-78.

Abort the call. The screen returns to

the phone (menu) screen. This is the

same as pressing the on hook switch

on the steering wheel.

NOTE

. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone being co nnecte d, it may be

necessary to perform additional steps

on the phone.

. When you are on the outgoing call

screen, the screen changes to the call

screen when the other party answers

the call.

. The

, , and keys are disabled

on the outgoing call screen.

& Receiving a call

! Incoming calls

When a call is received, the incoming call

screen is displayed with a sound.

When you receive a phone call while the

cell phone is connected, the screen

changes to the incoming call screen.

Incoming call screen

No. Function

Open the “Options” screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings” F5-78.

5-76

No. Function

Put the incoming call on hold. This

function may not work on some cell

phone models. This function is the

same as pressing the on hook switch

on the steering wheel for a short

period of time.

Open the call screen. This function is

the same as pressing the off hook

switch on the steering wheel.

Reject the incoming call. This function

is the same as pressing and holding

the on hook switch on the steering

wheel.

NOTE

. During international phone calls, the

other party’s name or number may not

be displayed correctly depending on

the type of cell phone you have.

. The ringtone that has been set in the

phone setting screen sounds when

there is an incoming call. Depending

on the type of Bluetooth phone, both

the system and Bluetooth phone may

sound simultaneously when there is an

incoming call. Refer to “Phone volume

settings” F5-78.

! By off/on hook switch

When you receive a call, you can also

answer it by pressing the off hook switch

on the steering wheel. To end a call, press

the on hook switch.

& Talking on the phone

The call screen opens when you perform

the following operations.

. When you accept a call on the incom-

ing call screen (by selecting the

key),

the call screen opens.

. When you are on the outgoing call

screen, the screen changes to the call

screen when the other party answers the

call.

While talking on the phone, this screen is

displayed. The operations outlined below

can be performed on this screen.

. When the incoming call screen is

displayed and you accept the call, the

screen changes to the call screen. The

screen stays on the incoming call screen if

you reject the call.

. The

and keys are disabled on

the incoming call screen.

Call screen

Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)

Audio/Hands–free phone system

– CONTINUED –

5-77

Audio/Hands–free phone system

No. Function

Open the “Options” screen. Refer to

“Phone volume settings” F5-78.

Mute your voice to the other party.

Touch this key again to deactivate the

Mute mode. This key is disabled in the

private mode.

Change the mode to private mode.

The other party’s voice emits from the

cell phone. Touch this key again to

deactivate the private mode.

End the call. This will return you to the

phone (menu) screen when ending

outgoing calls and the previous

screen when ending incoming calls.

This function is the same as pressing

the on hook switch on the steering

wheel.

Open the call (dialpad) screen. For

details about how to use the function,

refer to “By Dialpad” F5-75.

Switch the screen to the phone

(menu) screen.

Allow you to make DTMF (Dual Tone

Multi Frequency) calls. The numbers

you enter are sent as tone signals.

NOTE

. When cell phone call is changed to

hands-free call, the hands-free screen

is displayed and its functions can be

operated on the screen.

. Changing between cell phone call

and hands-free call can be performed

by operating the cell phone directly.

. Transferring methods and opera-

tions will be different depending on

the type of cell phone you have.

. For the operation of the cell phone,

see the manual that comes with it.

. The sound quality of the voice heard

from the other party’s speaker may be

negatively impacted.

& Phone settings

You can transfer the phonebook informa-

tion and adjust the volume of your phone

using the Bluetooth phone system.

NOTE

. The ringer volume for outgoing and

incoming calls, as well as the volume

while on hold or during a call are

controlled independently from the vo-

lume of the audio source. The volume

setting in the phone setting is applied.

. When making a call, receiving a call

or while talking on the phone, you can

adjust the volume by using the power/

Volume knob on the audio panel or the

volume control switch on the steering

wheel.

! Phone volume settings

The call and ringtone volume can be

adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.

1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to

“How to change the hands-free phone

system” F5-73.

2. Touch the

key.

3. Select the desired item to be set.

. On the “PHONE” screen, the screen

changes to the “Options” screen when you

select the

key.

Options (volume settings) screen

5-78

No. Function

Adjust the ringtone volume. The “−”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume

levels)

Adjust the receive volume. The “−”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume

levels)

Adjust the transmit volume. The “−”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 3 out of a total of 5 volume

levels)

NOTE

. Depending on the type of phone,

certain functions may not be available.

. Contact data is managed indepen-

dently for every registered phone.

When one phone is connected, another

phone’s registered data cannot be

read.

! Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP

(Phone Book Access Profile) compatible

and PBAP incompatible but OPP (Object

Push Profile) compatible Bluetooth

phones.

1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to

“How to change the hands-free phone

system” F5-73.

2. Touch the “Contacts” key, and then

select the “Download Contacts” key.

Contacts screen (Download selection)

No. Function

Open the download confirmation

screen. Confirm whether or not to

download. If the downloaded contact

(s) already

exist(s), confirm whether or not to

overwrite the existing data.

Download one set of contact data. To

download the data, you need to

operate from the connected device.

Cancel the download. The screen

returns to the “Contacts” screen.

NOTE

. If your cell phone is neither PBAP

nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-

not be transferred.

. When you are transferring the con-

tacts data, you may have to operate the

cell phone, depending on the type of

cell phone.

. Depending on the type of cell phone,

some functions may not be supported.

! For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones

1. Select the “Download Contacts” or

“Download 1 Entry” key. Contacts are

transferred automatically.

2. Check that a confirmation screen is

displayed when the operation is complete.

. This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the type of cell phone.

. If another Bluetooth device is con-

nected when transferring contact data,

depending on the phone, the con-

nected Bluetooth device may need to

be disconnected.

Audio/Hands–free phone system

– CONTINUED –

5-79

Audio/Voice command system

! For PBAP incompatible but OPP

compatible Bluetooth phones

1. Select the “Download 1 Entry” key.

2. Transfer the contact data to the sys-

tem using a Bluetooth phone.

. This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the type of cell phone.

. To cancel this function, select the

“Cancel” key.

3. Check that a confirmation screen is

displayed when the operation is complete.

NOTE

To download all items, you may need to

change the settings in your cell phone

beforehand.

! Deleting the contact data

You can delete the phonebook data stored

in the audio set.

1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to

“How to change the hands-free phone

system” F5-73.

2. Touch the “Contacts” key, and then

select the “Delete All” key.

3. Select the “OK” key when the con-

firmation screen appears.

NOTE

. Manual transfer operation cannot be

performed while driving.

. If your cell phone is neither PBAP

nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-

not be transferred.

. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone:

– It may be necessary to perform

additional steps on the phone when

transferring contact data.

Voice command system

The voice command system enables the

audio, hands-free phone system, etc. to

be operated using voice commands.

Refer to the “Command list” F5-84 for

samples of voice commands.

Voice commands can be used even when

you set the system to another language.

For details about setting language, refer to

“General settings” F5-19.

& Using the voice command

system

! Steering switch

1) Talk switch

5-80

Action Function

Press

Start the voice com-

mand system.

Press and hold

Cancel voice recogni-

tion.

! Microphone

Type A

Type B

It is unnecessary to speak directly into the

microphone when giving a command.

NOTE

. Wait for the confirmation beep be-

fore speaking a command.

. Voice commands may not be recog-

nized if:

– Spoken too quickly.

– Spoken at a low or high volume.

– The moonroof or windows are

open.

– Passengers are talking while

voice commands are spoken.

– The air conditioning speed is set

high.

– The air conditioning vents are

turned towards the microphone.

. In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not recognize the command

properly and using voice commands

may not be possible:

– The command is incorrect or

unclear. Note that certain words,

accents or speech patterns may be

difficult for the system to recognize.

– There is excessive background

noise, such as wind noise.

Audio/Voice command system

– CONTINUED –

5-81

Audio/Voice command system

& Voice command system op-

eration

1. Press the talk switch on the steering

wheel.

After the voice command top screen has

been displayed, speech guidance will

commence.

NOTE

When the voice command mode is

audio mode, voice guidance for the

voice command system can be skipped

by pressing the talk switch on the

steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Example (Say “PHONE”)

NOTE

. Commands related with each func-

tion are displayed on the screen of the

each function tab. Some co mmonly

used commands are displayed on the

screen of the main tab. Even if any tab

is selected, all commands can be

operated.

. Saying

“Help”

prompts guidance to

offer examples of commands and op-

eration methods.

. To cancel voice recognition, select

“6”, or press and hold the talk switch

on the steering wheel.

. If the system does not respond or

the confirmation screen does not dis-

appear, press the talk switch on the

steering wheel and try again.

. The notations used in the com-

mands are as follows.

– < >: Numbers, titles or names to

be spoken

! Voice command example: Call

name

1. Press the talk switch on the steering

wheel.

2. Say

“Call <contacts>”

. A confirmation screen will be dis-

played showing the recognition re-

sults. If multiple matching items are

found, a s election screen will be

displayed. Say

“<number>”

or select

the number.

NOTE

. In the same manner as it is dis-

played on the screen, “Call <con-

tacts>”, after saying

“Call a contact”

say the name of a contact. For exam-

ple:

“Call a contact”

“John Smith ”

“Call a contact”

“Mary Davis”

. Short or abbreviated names in the

contacts list may not be recognized.

Change names in the contacts list to

full names.

. Sometimes a voice recognition re-

sult confirmation screen will be dis-

played. After confirming the result, say

5-82

“Yes”

“No”

. When the system recognizes multi-

ple names from the contacts list, a

name candidate list will be displayed

on the screen. If the desired name is

not displayed on the top of the screen,

say or select the number of the name

from the candidate list (number 1,

number 2, etc.) to select a name from

the candidate list.

. When a contact has multiple phone

numbers registered in the contacts list,

a candidate list will be displayed. If the

desired phone number is not displayed

on the top of the screen, say or select

the number of the desired phone

number from the candidate list (num-

ber 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone

number from the candidate list.

! Voice command example: Dial

number

1. Press the talk switch on the steering

wheel.

2. Say

“Dial number”

3. Say

“Dial <number>”

For example, if the phone number is

2345678:

Say

“two three four five six seven

eight”

Do not say

“twenty three forty five sixty

seven eight”

4. Say

“Dial”

or press the off hook switch

on the steering wheel.

NOTE

. When the system recognizes multi-

ple phone numbers, a phone number

candidate list will be displayed on the

screen. Pressing the off hook switch on

the steering wheel makes a call to the

top entry on the list. If the desired

phone number is not displayed on the

top of the screen, say the number of

the desired phone number from the

candidate list to select a phone number

from the candidate list.

. Calling to the following phone num-

bers

– 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)

– 7 digit numbers (Local phone

numbers)

– 10 digit numbers (Area code +

Local phone number)

– 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area

code + Local phone number)

. As the system cannot recognize

additional numbers, say the complete

number without stopping.

! Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recogni-

tion technology, this system enables re-

cognition of a command when spoken

naturally. However, the system cannot

recognize every variation of each com-

mand. In some situations, it is possible to

omit the command for the procedure and

directly state the desired operation. Not all

voice commands are di splayed in t he

function menu.

NOTE

If the command cannot be recognized

completely, the command input screen

will be displayed. (Search results will

be shown based on the part of the

command that was recognized.)

! Expression examples for each

function

Command Expression examples

“Dial <phone num-

ber>”

Phone <phone num-

ber>.

Audio/Voice command system

– CONTINUED –

5-83

Audio/Voice command system

& Command list

Recognizable voice commands and their

actions are shown below.

NOTE

. Some voice commands may not be

available dependin g on the market,

vehicle specifications or the device

connection status.

. Frequently used commands are

listed in the following tables.

. For devices that are not installed in

the vehicle, the related commands will

not be displayed on the screen. Also,

according to conditions, other com-

mands may not be displayed on the

screen.

. The functions available may vary

according to the system installed.

. Voice recognition language can be

changed. Refer to “Unit settings ” F5-

18.

. The notations used in the com-

mands are as follows.

– <

>: Numbers, titles or

names to be spoken

– (

): There is no need to

speak the command, the voice

command system will recognize

the content.

! Basic command

Voice command Function

Back

Go back one hierar-

chy or cancel the

voice recognition

(voice command top

screen)

Help

Ask for help with the

current task

Cancel, Close

Cancel the current

task

Yes

Display OFF Turns the display off

Audio ON

Turns the audio sys-

tem on

Audio OFF

Turns the audio sys-

tem off

STARLINK

Switch to APPS mode

! Commands for changing the audio

mode

Voice command Function

Change to AM Switch to AM mode

Change to AM1

Switch to AM mode

band 1

Change to AM2

Switch to AM mode

band 2

Change to FM Switch to FM mode

Change to FM1

Switch to FM mode

band 1

Change to FM2

Switch to FM mode

band 2

Change to FM3

Switch to FM mode

band 3

Change to SiriusXM Switch to XM mode

Change to BT Audio

Switch to Bluetooth

Audio mode

Change to CD Switch to CD mode

Change to USB Switch to USB mode

Change to iPod Switch to iPod mode

Change to aha

Switch to aha radio

mode

Change to Pandora

Switch to Pandora

mode

Change to AUX

Switch to AUX mode

5-84

! Commands for hands-free phone

Voice command Function

Dial Number ? <0-9,

+, *, #> ? Change

number, Dial

Places a call to the

said phone number

Dial <0-9, +, *, #> ?

Change number, Dial

Contacts, Phonebook

? <Name> ? <1-5>

? Dial

Make a call by using

the phonebook

Call <Name> ?

<1-5> ? Dial

Call History ? In-

coming call, Outgoing

call ? Next (page),

Previous (page) ?

<1-5> ? Dial

Make a call by using

the call history

Incoming Calls

Display the call his-

tory screen

Outgoing Calls

Display the call his-

tory screen

Redial

Places a call to the

phone number of the

latest outgoing call

Callback

Places a call to the

phone number of the

latest incoming call

Select Phone ?

<1-5>

Display the phone

select screen

Phone Menu

Display the hands

free top screen

! Commands for Pandora

Voice command Function

Like Mark “Like” flag

Dislike Mark “Dislike” flag

Skip, Next

Skip to the next song

! Commands for aha

Voice command Function

Thumbs Up, Heart,

Mark “Like” flag

Thumbs Down, Ban,

Dislike

Mark “Dislike” flag

Refresh, update

Refresh the selected

station to get the lat-

est information

Content Up

Playback next Con-

tent

Content Down

Playback previous

Content

! Commands for AM/FM control

Voice command Function

Seek Up

Tunes in the higher

frequency direction

Seek Down

Tunes in the lower

frequency direction

Scan

Switch to the scan

mode

Tune to <Frequency>

Designate the fre-

quency to switch to a

specific radio station

Preset <preset num-

ber>

Designate the preset

channel to switch to

specific radio station

Tag

iTunes Tagging for

HD Radio

! Commands for SiriusXM radio con-

trol

Voice command Function

Preset <preset num-

ber>

Designate the preset

channel to switch to

specific radio station

Scan

Switch to the scan

mode

Channel <Channel

number>

Designate the chan-

nel to switch to spe-

cific radio station

Audio/Voice command system

– CONTINUED –

5-85

Audio/Voice command system

Voice command Function

Category ? Next

(page), Previous

(page), <1-5> ? Next

(page), Previous

(page), <1-5>

Displays the category

list screen

! Commands for CD control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down

Select the current

track

Scan

Switch to the scan

mode

Repeat ? 1 Track

Repeat, Repeat All

Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle

Plays randomly

! Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC,

USB control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down

Select the current

track

Folder Up

Plays from the start of

the next folder

Folder Down

Plays from the start of

the previous folder

Scan

Switch to the scan

mode

Repeat ? 1 Track

Repeat, Repeat

Folder, Repeat All

Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat Folder Repeat of the folder

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle ? Shuffle

Folder, Shuffle All

Select a random play

mode

Shuffle Folder

Plays randomly of the

folder

Shuffle All

Plays randomly

! Commands for iPod Control

Voice command Function

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down

Select the current

track

Repeat ? Repeat

One, Repeat All

Select a repeat mode

Repeat One Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Shuffle ? Shuffle

Track, Shuffle Album,

Shuffle OFF

Select a random play

mode

Shuffle Track Shuffle all tracks

Shuffle Album Shuffle all tracks

Shuffle OFF

Turn off shuffle

5-86

! Commands for Bluetooth audio

control

Voice command Function

Pause Pause play

Track Up Select the next track

Track Down

Select the current

track

Repeat ? 1 track

Repeat, Repeat All,

Group Repeat

Select a repeat mode

1 Track Repeat Repeat single track

Repeat All Repeat all tracks

Group Repeat

Repeat tracks on

group

Shuffle ? Shuffle All,

Group Shuffle, Shuf-

fle OFF

Select a random play

mode

Shuffle All Shuffle all tracks

Group Shuffle

Shuffle tracks on

group

Shuffle OFF

Turn off shuffle

Audio/Voice command system

5-87

Audio/What to do if...

What to do if...

& Troubleshooting

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

The hands-free system or Bluetooth

device does not work.

The connected device may not be a

compatible Bluetooth cell phone.

For USA customers, please visit

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the

USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm

whether or not the device can be paired with

the vehicle.

* —

The Bluetooth version of the connected

cell phone may be older than the

specified version.

Use a cell phone with Bluetooth version 1.1 or

higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or

higher).

5-67

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

5-88

When registering/connecting a cell phone

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

A cell phone cannot be registered.

An incorrect passcode was entered

on the cell phone.

Enter the correct passcode on the cell phone. * —

The registration operation has not

been completed on the cell phone

side.

Complete the registration operation on the cell

phone (approve registration on the phone).

* —

Old registration information remains

on either this system or the cell

phone.

Delete the existing registration information from

both this system and the cell phone, then register

the cell phone you wish to connect to this system.

*5-68

A Bluetooth connection cannot be

made.

Another Bluetooth device is already

connected.

Manually connect the cell phone you wish to use to

this system.

— 5-68

Bluetooth function is not enabled on

the cell phone.

Enable the Bluetooth function on the cell phone. * —

Automatic Bluetooth connection on

this system is set to off.

Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system

to on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

—

5-68

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

Audio/What to do if...

– CONTINUED –

5-89

Audio/What to do if...

When using the phonebook

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

Phonebook data cannot be trans-

ferred manually.

The profile version of the connected cell

phone may not be compatible with

transferring phonebook data.

For USA customers, please visit

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the

USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm

whether or not the device can be paired with

the vehicle.

* —

Transfer operation on the cell phone has

not completed.

Complete transfer operation on the cell phone

(approve transfer operation on the phone).

* —

Phonebook data cannot be edited.

Editing function is not available on this

system.

——

5-78

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

5-90

In other situations

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cell

phone

This

system

Even though all conceivable mea-

sures have been taken, the symptom

status does not change.

The cell phone is not close enough to

this system.

Bring the cell phone closer to this system. ——

The cell phone is the most likely cause

of the symptom.

Turn the cell phone off, remove and reinstall

the battery pack, and then restart the cell

phone.

* —

Enable the cell phone’s Bluetooth connection. * —

Stop the cell phone’s security software and

close all applications.

* —

Before using an application installed on the

cell phone, carefully check its source and how

its operation might affect this system.

—

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.

Audio/What to do if...

5-91

Audio/Appendix

Appendix

& Certification

. Bluetooth

The Bluetooth word mark and logo are

registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion

Co., Ltd. is under license.

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if

equipped)

SiriusXM

and all related marks and

logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio

. Pandora (if equipped)

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and other

Pandora marks are trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc.,

or its subsidiaries worldwide.

If you have any issues with the Pandora

application on your mobile phone, please

direct them to

[email protected].

. iPod

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”

mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to

iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been

certified by the developer to meet Apple

performance standards. Apple is not

responsible for the operation of this device

or its compliance with safety and regula-

tory standards. Please note that the use of

this accessory with iPod or iPhone may

affect wireless performance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,

iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

. How to get the source code using

the open source

This system implements software using

the open source. For customers who

would like to get the source code of the

software, it is available by downloading it

from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd.

For details, refer to the following web site.

http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/in-

dex.html

& Certification for the Hands-

free system

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC

Rules and Industry Canada licence-ex-

empt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

Le présent appareil est conforme à la

partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-

reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-

tion est autorisée aux deux conditions

suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur

de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage

radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage

est susceptible d’en compromet tre le

fonctionnement.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment and meets the

FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65

and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

5-92

(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has

very low levels of RF energy that it

deemed to comply without maximum

permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées

pour un environnement non contrôlé et

respecte les lignes directrices d’exposition

aux fréquences radioélectriqu es de la

FCC dans le Supplément C à OET65 et

d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectri-

ques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipe-

ment émet une énergie RF très faible qui

est considérée conforme sans évaluation

de l’exposition maximale autorisée.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible f or

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This transmitter must not be co-located or

operated in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

& Certification for Mexico mod-

els

. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-250

Clarion PF-3547

. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-253

Clarion PF-3688

Audio/Appendix

5-93

————————————————————————————————————————

Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2

Map lights ........................................................... 6-2

OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3

Sun visor extension plate (models with the

EyeSight system) .............................................. 6-4

Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-4

Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5

Glove box ........................................................... 6-5

Center console.................................................... 6-5

Cup holders ......................................................... 6-6

Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-6

Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-7

Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-7

Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-8

Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped)............... 6-9

Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-10

Floor mat (if equipped)...................................... 6-10

Coat hook........................................................... 6-11

Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-12

Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-12

How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-14

Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-14

Help line............................................................ 6-15

Interior equipment

Interior equipment/Interior lights

Interior lights

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the lights are tur ned off to

avoid battery discharge.

& Dome light

1) ON

2) DOOR

3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following

three positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously.

OFF: The light remains off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically in the following cases.

. Any of the doors is opened.

. The doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function (if equipped).

Refer to “Locking and unlocking with

“keyless access” entry function” F2-13.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system” F2-21.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

& Map lights

Type A

Type B

To turn on the map light, push the switch.

To turn it off, push the switch again.

6-2

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the

lights are turned off to avoid battery

discharge.

! Automatic illumination (type A map

lights)

The map lights illuminate automatically in

the following cases.

. Any of the doors is opened.

. The doors a re unlock ed usin g the

keyless access function (if equipped).

Refer to “Locking and unlocking with

“keyless access” entry function” F2-13.

. The doors a re unlock ed usin g the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

& OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

. dome light (when the dome light switch

is in the “DOOR” position)

. map light (type A)

After being illuminated automatically,

these lights remain on for several seconds

and then gradually turn off after all doors

are closed.

While the lights are illuminated, if any of

the following operations are performed,

the lights turn off immediately.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

. All doors are locked using the keyless

access function (if equipped).

. All doors are locked using the remote

keyless entry system.

The setting for the period of time in which

the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also,

the setting can be changed by operating

the multi function display. For details, refer

to “Interior light off delay timer setting” F3-

89.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

Interior equipment/Sun visors

– CONTINUED –

6-3

Interior equipment/Sun visors

& Sun visor extension plate

(models with the EyeSight

system)

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, y ou can use the sun visor

extension plate to prevent glare through

the gap between the sun visor and center

pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it

toward the rear of the vehicle. When you

have finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

would obstruct your view of the rear

view mirror.

& Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the vehicle is being driven to

avoid being temporarily blinded by

the glare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

6-4

Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the stora ge compart-

ment.

& Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward. When

the light control switch is in the “

” or

“

” position (or when the headlight

indicator light

illuminates in the

combination meter if the light control

switch is in the “AUTO” position), the

glove box light will illuminate if the lid is

opened.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,

insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

& Center console

To open the lid, pull up the lock release.

Interior equipment/Storage compartment

6-5

Interior equipment/Cup holders

Cup holders

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,

if hot, might burn you and/or your

passengers. Spilled beverages may

also damage upholstery, carpets or

audio equipment.

& Front passenger’s cup holder

CAUTION

Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an accident.

! Except STI

Type A

Type B

A dual cup holder is built into the center

console.

! STI

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console near the parking brake lever.

To access the cup holder, pull the lid

toward the rear.

6-6

The divider in the cup holder can be pulled

out and inserted in a different position

(further toward the front or rear) to enable

cups of different sizes to be held.

NOTE

With the divider taken out, the cup

holder can be used as a storage box.

& Rear passenger’s cup holder

CAUTION

When not in use, always keep the

cup holder stored while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the event

of a sudden stop or an accident.

A dual cup holder is located at the back of

the center console. To use the cup holder,

open the lid by pulling its upper edge.

Bottle holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could burn

you and/or your passengers.

The bottle holder equipped on each door

Interior equipment/Bottle holders

– CONTINUED –

6-7

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

trim can be used to hold a beverage bottle

and other items.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlet below the climate control

dials

Power outlet in the center console

Accessory power outlets are provided

below the climate control dials and in the

center console. Electrical power (12V DC)

from the battery is available at any of the

outlets when the ignition switch is in either

the “ACC” or “ON” position.

You can use an in-vehicle electrical

appliance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120W.Do

not use an appliance which exceeds the

indicated wattage for each outlet.

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not

exceed 120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not

in use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

6-8

appliance that can be connected

is 120W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

When using appliances con-

nected to two or more outlets

simultaneously, the total power

consumed by them must not

exce ed 120W. Overloading the

accessory power outlet can

cause a short circuit. Do not use

double adapters or more than

one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord

on your electrical appliance will

not interfere with your shifting

gears and operating the accel-

erator and brake pedals. If they

do, do not use the electrical

appliance while driving.

& Use with a cigarette lighter (if

equipped)

To use the accessory power outlet as a

cigarette lighter socket, purchase the

cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional

accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is

available from your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the

knob and wait a few moments. It will

automatically spring up when ready for

use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp

the lighter by the end with the

heating element. Doing so could

result in injury and could also

damage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,

because it will overheat.

. The electrical pow er socket is

originally designed to use a gen-

uine SUBARU cigarette lighter

plug. Do not use a non-genuine

cigarette lighter plug in the sock-

et. Doing so may cause a short-

circuit and overheating, resulting

in a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for a

plug-in accessory such as a cell

phone, that may damage the

portion of the socket’s internal

mechanism that causes a cigar-

ette lighter plug to “pop out”

after its lighter element is heated.

Therefore, do not place a cigar-

ette lighter plug in a socket that

has been used, even once, to

power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick

and overheat, creating a potential

fire hazard.

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

6-9

Interior equipment/Ashtray

Ashtray (if equipped)

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This

could cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended

implement.

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

holders” F6-6. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6-

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the

ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Floor mat (if equipped)

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-

lent designed with grommets in

the correct locations.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed in its proper loca-

tion and is correctly secured on

its retaining pins.

6-10

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured

using the built-in grommets, by placing the

grommets over the pins and pushing them

downward.

Coat hook

The coat hook is attached to each rear

passenger’s hand grip.

WARNING

Do not place hangers or other hard

objects on the coat hooks. If such

items were hanging on the coat

hooks duri ng deployment of the

SRS curtain airbags, they could

cause serious injuries by coming

off the coat hooks and being thrown

through the cabin or by preventing

correct airbag deployment. Before

hanging clothing on the coat hooks,

make sure there are no pointed

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Interior equipment/Coat hook

6-11

Interior equipment/Under–floor storage compartment

Under-floor storage compart-

ment

The storage compartment is located under

the floor of the trunk and can be used to

store small items. Pull the strap to open

the trunk floor lid, and then remove the lid.

NOTE

. The shape of the storage compart-

ment may be different depending on

the model.

. When storing a flat tire, put the

storage tray in the trunk.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lids closed while

driving to reduce the risk of

injury in the event of a sudden

stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

Rear view camera (if

equipped)

A rear view camera is attached to the

trunk lid. When the ignition switch is “ON”

and the shift lever (MT models) or select

lever (CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear

view camera automatically displays the

rear view image behind the vehicle on the

monitor of the navigation system or the

audio display.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses

a wide-angle lens, the image on

the monitor is different from the

actual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range and field of view

6-12

of the image on the monitor is

limited, you should always check

the rear view and the surround-

ing area with your eyes and

mirrors, and move backward at

a slow speed. Moving backward

only by checking the rear view

image from the camera could

cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If

smoke comes out or you smell

a strange odor, stop using the

rear view camera immediate ly.

Contact your S UBARU deale r

for an inspection. Continued use

may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle is washed with a

high-pressure washer, do not

allow water to contact the camera

directly. Entry of water into the

camera lens may result in con-

densation, malfunction, fire or

electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful when removing it.

Otherwise, damage to the camera

may cause a fire or electric

shock. Pour water or lukewarm

water over the camera to remove

mud and ice, and wipe it with a

soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure

to use a fuse with the specified

rating. Use of a fuse with a

different rating may result in a

malfunction.

. If the rear view camera is used for

a long time while the engine is

not operated, the battery may

become completely discharged.

NOTE

. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with a

cloth moistened with a diluted neutral

detergent and then wipe it with a soft,

dry cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If it

comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

. The camera lens has a hard coating

to help prevent scratches. However,

when washing the vehicle or cleaning

the camera lens, be careful not to

scratch the camera lens. Do not use a

washing brush directly on the camera

lens. The image quality of the rear view

camera may deteriorate.

. Strong light shined on the camera

lens may develop vertical lines around

the light source. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

. Under fluorescent light, the display

may flicker. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. The image of the rear view camera

may be slightly different from the

actual color of the objects.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

– CONTINUED –

6-13

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

& How to use the rear view

camera

When the shift lever (MT models) or select

lever (CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear

view camera automatically displays the

rear view image from the vehicle. When

the lever is set to other positions, the

image before setting to “R” is displayed.

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Set the shift lever (MT models) or

select lever (CVT models) to “R”.

NOTE

. For models with the genuine

SUBARU navigation or audio system,

the image of the rear view camera has

priority over other screen displays.

Therefore, while the rear view camera

is in operation, the operations of other

screens are disabled. To operate other

screens, set the shift lever or select

lever to a position other than “R”.

. The image of the rear view camera

has priority over other screen displays.

. The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle rear view mirror or the

side view mirror.

. It may be difficult to see the image of

the rear view camera in the following

cases. This is not a malfunction of the

camera.

– The vehicle is in a dark place (at

night, in a tunnel, etc.).

– The vehicle is in an extremely hot

or cold place.

– An object (such as raindrops,

snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

view of the rear view camera sticks

to the lens of the camera.

– Strong light shined directly on

the camera lens (occasionally, there

are vertical lines on the screen).

& Viewing range on the screen

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly.

Range of view

6-14

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper

cannot be viewed.

Also, the image from the rear view camera

looks shorter than the actual distance.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a

wide projection on its upper part such as a

sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-

tion cannot be seen on the screen.

& Help line

The help line (distance marker and vehicle

width line) is a guide to help you realize

the actual distance from the screen image.

Help lines

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

4) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

5) Vehicle centerline

When the shift lever/select lever is set to

position “R”, the monitor screen displays

the help lines together with the rear view

image.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

– CONTINUED –

6-15

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the help lines.

. The actual position may be dif-

ferent from the indication of the

help lines.

. Differences may occur due to

number of passengers or loaded

cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or

when the vehicle is inclined

against the road, the indication

is different from the actual posi-

tion.

. Be sure to observe the displayed

warning message of “Check Sur-

roundings Before Backing Up”.

NOTE

If you shift to the “R” range within

several seconds after turning on the

ignition switch, the warning message

may not be displayed. Wait for several

seconds after turning on the ignition

switch before shifting to the “R” range.

The warning message will then be

displayed.

! Difference between screen image

and actual road

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading condi-

tions or road conditions.

! When there is an upward slope at

the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

6-16

! When there is a downward slope

at the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance as in an

upward slope.

! Feature of distance marker

1) 3 feet (1 m) line

2) 10 feet (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or other object

close behind, distance cannot be correctly

displayed.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

6-17

————————————————————————————————————————

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3

Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-5

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7

Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8

Starting and stopping the engine (models

without push-button start system).................. 7-9

General precautions when starting/stopping

engine .............................................................. 7-9

Starting engine................................................... 7-10

Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11

Starting and stopping engine (models with

push-button start system) .............................. 7-12

Safety precautions ............................................. 7-12

Operating range for push-button start

system............................................................. 7-12

Starting engine................................................... 7-12

Stopping engine ................................................. 7-14

When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-14

Remote engine start syste m (dealer

option).............................................................. 7-15

Models with “keyless access with push-button

start system” ................................................... 7-15

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote

start................................................................. 7-16

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start

shutdown......................................................... 7-17

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the

vehicle ............................................................. 7-17

System maintenance .......................................... 7-17

Manual transmission ......................................... 7-17

Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-18

Driving tips........................................................ 7-19

Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/

DCCD) (STI) ..................................................... 7-19

To change mode of driver’s control center

differential ....................................................... 7-20

Auto mode ........................................................ 7-21

Manual mode..................................................... 7-22

Temporary release ............................................. 7-23

Continuously variable transmission................. 7-24

Select lever ....................................................... 7-25

Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-26

Shift lock function ............................................. 7-28

Driving tips........................................................ 7-29

SI-DRIVE (if equipped)....................................... 7-29

Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-29

Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-30

Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-30

SI-DRIVE selector (STI) ...................................... 7-31

SI-DRIVE switches (except STI) .......................... 7-32

Limited slip differential (LSD) (STI) .................. 7-33

Power steering................................................... 7-33

STI .................................................................... 7-33

Except STI......................................................... 7-33

Braking ............................................................... 7-34

Braking tips....................................................... 7-34

Brake system .................................................... 7-35

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-35

Starting and operating

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................... 7-36

ABS self-check................................................... 7-36

ABS warning light .............................................. 7-36

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ............................................................. 7-37

Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions........... 7-37

Vehicle Dynamics Control system .................... 7-38

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-40

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-40

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models) ......................................... 7-42

Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-43

Parking brake (models without electronic parking

brake system) .................................................. 7-44

Electronic parking brake (models with electronic

parking brake system)...................................... 7-44

Parking tips ....................................................... 7-48

Hill start assist system (models without

electronic parking brake system) .................. 7-49

To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist

system............................................................. 7-50

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF

indicator light................................................... 7-52

Cruise control..................................................... 7-52

To set cruise control .......................................... 7-52

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-53

To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-54

To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-54

Cruise control indicator ..................................... 7-55

Cruise control set indicator................................ 7-55

BSD/RCTA (if equipped) .................................... 7-55

System features................................................. 7-56

System operation............................................... 7-58

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning

buzzer ............................................................. 7-59

BSD/RCTA warning indicator.............................. 7-61

BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 7-62

Certification for the BSD/RCTA........................... 7-62

Handling of radar sensors.................................. 7-63

Reverse Autom atic Braking System (if

equipped) ........................................................ 7-64

Reverse Automatic Braking System overview ..... 7-64

Operating conditions ......................................... 7-65

Reverse Automatic Braking System

operation......................................................... 7-67

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system

operation......................................................... 7-70

Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF

setting............................................................. 7-70

RAB warning indicator ....................................... 7-71

Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 7-71

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel

additive may cause engine damage.

& Fuel requirements

! STI

The engine is designed to operate at

maximum performance using unleaded

gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI

(98 RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON)

fuel is not readily available in your area,

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

91 AKI (95 RON) may be used with no

detriment to engine durability or driveabil-

ity. However, you may notice a slight

decrease in maximum engine perfor-

mance while using 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel.

Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect

your warranty coverage.

! Except STI

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher. If 91 AKI

(95 RON) fuel is not readily available,

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

87 AKI (90 RON) may be used.

Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher may

also be used. Using regular unleaded

gasoline will not be detrimental to engine

durability, nor will it affect your warranty

coverage. However, depending on your

driving habits and conditions, you may

notice a decrease in maximum engine

performance, fuel economy or slight en-

gine vibration or knocking. If you experi-

ence any of these conditions while using a

lower octane rated fuel, you may want to

return to using 91 AKI (95 RON) octane

rated fuel as soon as possible. Addition-

ally, if your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently, the use of 91 AKI (95 RON)

or higher grade unl eaded ga solin e is

required.

! Fuel octane rating

Using a gasoline with a lower octane

rating can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle

sometimes knocks lightly when you drive

up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact

your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with

the specified octane rati ng and your

vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane

Number.

! AKI

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane

numbers and is commonly referred to as

the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Gasoline for California-certified

LEV

If your vehicle was certified to California’s

low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as

indicated on the underhood tune-up label,

it is designed to optimize engine and

emission performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-

fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state than Cali fornia, your

vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting

Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-

side California is permitted to have higher

sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

Starting and operating/Fuel

– CONTINUED –

7-3

Starting and operating/Fuel

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not

be covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent

additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in

your vehicle, but should contain no more

than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the

proper operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 10% ethanol, including from

any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85

(which are only some examples of fuel

containing more than 10% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following description.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcohol may cause paint

damage, which is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

7-4

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor

at the left of the driver’s seat.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any

static electricity that may be present

on your body. If your body is carry-

ing an electrostatic charge, there is

a possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1) Open

2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

first stop the engine and close all

vehicle doors and windows.

Make sure that there are no

lighted cigarettes, open flames

or electrical sparks in the adja-

cent area. Only handle fuel out-

doors. Quickly wipe up any

spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the

Starting and operating/Fuel

– CONTINUED –

7-5

Starting and operating/Fuel

left. Do not remove the cap

quickly. Fuel may be under pres-

sure and spray out of the fuel

filler neck, especially in hot

weather. If you hear a hissing

sound while you are removing

the cap, wait for the sound to

stop and then slowly open the

cap to prevent fuel from spraying

out and creating a fire hazard.

3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the painted

surface, rinse it off immediately.

Otherwise, the painted surface

could be damaged.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK

ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-

dicator light” F3-16.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap

clockwise until it clicks to ensure

that it is fully tightened. If the cap

is not securely tighten ed, fuel

may leak out while the vehicle is

being driven or fuel spillage

could occur in the event of an

accident, creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

7-6

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel fill er cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting and your fuel tank

and emission control system

may be damaged. It could also

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a r esult of an empty tank

could cause damage to the en-

gine. Continuing to operate your

vehicle at an extremely low fuel

level may result in a reduction of

engine performance.

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model

must NEVER be performed on a

single two-wheel dynamometer. At-

tempting to do so will result in

uncontrolled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your ins pection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspec-

tion of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-

function indicator light (MIL) and an

examination of the OBDII system with an

electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle

passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

served, there are no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness

monitors are all complete.

Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)

– CONTINUED –

7-7

Starting and operating/Preparing to drive

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not

properly operating (light is illuminated or is

not working due to a burned out bulb) or

there is one or more diagnostic trouble

codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT

READY” is greater than on e. If the

vehicle’s battery has been recently re-

placed or disconnected, the OBDII system

inspection may indicate that the vehicle is

not ready for the emission test. Under this

condition, the vehicle driver should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to reset the readiness monitors and

return for an emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector

not to plac e your SUBARU

AWD v ehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks, and check that no small animal is

under the vehicle.

4. Check that no small animal enters the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the hood and trunk lid are

fully closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside

and outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

7-8

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and belts of the engine may

result in a malfunction. Check that

no small animal enters the engine

compartment and under the vehicle

before starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

Starting and stopping the

engine (models without

push-button start system)

& General precautions when

starting/stopping engine

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out-

side the vehicle. It may result in

an accident.

. Do not leave the engine running

in locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors.

The exhaust gas may enter the

vehicle or indoors, and it may

result in carbon monoxide poi-

soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flam-

mable substances. The exhaust

pipe and exhaust emissions can

create a fire hazard at high

temperatures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during

driving, the catalyst may over-

heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine

start system).

NOTE

. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-

eration immediately after the engine

has started.

. For a short time after the engine has

started, the engine speed is kept high.

When the warm-up is completed, the

engine speed lowers automatically.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel and the usage condition (repeated

driving of a distance in which the

engine has not warmed up sufficiently).

In such a case, it is recommended that

you change to a different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine when

the accelerator is operated rapidly

such as a rapid start-up and a rapid

acceleration. This is not a malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and rear

window defogger are turned off.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)

– CONTINUED –

7-9

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)

& Starting engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

NOTE

It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

! MT models

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor

and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold

the clutch pedal to the floor while starting

the engine.

The starter motor will only operate when

the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the

floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” F3-13.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the i gnition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

! CVT models

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”

position

(preferably the “P” position).

The starter motor will only operate when

the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

7-10

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” F3-13.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK ”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the select lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the select lever of a

moving vehicle into the “P” posi-

tion.

& Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK” position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)

7-11

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

Starting and stopping engine

(models with push-button

start system)

& Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

Refer to “Operating range for push-button

start system” F3-6.

& Starting engine

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefull y read the precautions

descr ibed in “Starting engine”

F7-10.

. If the indicator on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in

green after the engine has

started, never drive the vehicle.

The steering is still locked, and it

may result in an accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be

a malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

. If the indicator on the push-

button ignition switch is flashing

in green after the engine has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. Depress the brake

pedal while moving the steering

wheel to the right and left, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

. Do not continue pushing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop push-

ing the push-button ignition

switch. Instead, press the push-

button ignition switch without

depressing the brake peda l to

switch the power status to

“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and

then push the push-button igni-

tion switch to start the engine.

NOTE

. When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the clutch pedal (MT models) or the

brake pedal (CVT models), the engine

starter operates for a maximum of 10

seconds and after starting the engine,

the starter stops automatically.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the clutch pedal (MT models) or the

brake pedal (CVT models), the engine

can be started regardless of the status

of the push-button ignition switch.

. If the security indicator light illumi-

nates when you attempt to start the

engine but the engine does not start,

press the push-button ignition switch

to switch the power to “OFF” and then

try to start the engine again.

. If the engine does not start, press

the push-button ignition switch without

depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-

els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to

switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while

depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-

els) or the brake pedal (CVT models)

more forcefully, press the push-button

ignition switch.

. The engine start procedures may

not function depending on the radio

wave conditions around the vehicle. In

7-12

such a case, refer to “Starting engine”

F9-17.

. If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the steering cannot be unlocked.

Charge the battery.

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high until the engine

has warmed up sufficiently.

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the clutch pedal

(MT models)/brake pedal (CVT models),

the engine will start. The start procedure

of the engine is as follows.

! MT models

1. Carry the access key, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the shift lever in neutral.

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Depress the clutch pedal until the

indicator on the push-button ignition

switch turns green.

6. While depressing the clutch pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

In case the engine does not start by the

normal engine start procedure, move

the shift lever to the neutral position,

and switch the power to “ACC”. De-

press the clutch pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least

15 seconds. The engine may start. Only

use this engine start procedure in case

of emergency.

! CVT models

1. Carry the access key, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the select lever in the “P” posi-

tion. The engine can also start when the

select lever is in the “N” position, however,

for safety reasons, start in the “P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When starting

with the select lever in the “N” position, the

indicator does not turn green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

. While pressing the select lever but-

ton in, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

. In case the engine does not start by

the normal engine start procedure,

move the select lever to the “P” posi-

tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.

Depress the brake pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least

15 seconds. The engine may start. Only

use this engine start procedure in case

of emergency.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

– CONTINUED –

7-13

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

. When the engine is not started, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a

case, depress the brake pedal more

forcefully than usual. Check that the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green, and press

the push-button ignition switch to start

the engine.

& Stopping engine

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched to “OFF”.

WARNING

. Do not touch the p ush-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the engine will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake

booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required

on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater

force will be required to steer,

and it may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a

safe location, and contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

For CVT models:

. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position, the power

will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is

left in this condition, the battery

may be discharged.

NOTE

Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine during

driving except in an emergency.

& When access key does not

operate properly

Refer to “Access key – if access key does

not operate properly” F9-16.

7-14

Remote engine start system

(dealer option)

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefull y read the precautions

described in “General precau-

tions when starting/stopping en-

gine” F7-9.

. Do not remote start a vehicle in

an enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a motor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of Carbon

Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of Carbon Monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

. Before performing any servicing

of the vehicle, temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent the

system from unexpectedly start-

ing the engine.

The remote engine start system allows

you to start the engine from outside the

vehicle. In addition, the remote engine

start system can activate the heater or air

conditioner, providing you with a comfor-

table cabin upon entry.

NOTE

The length of time for which it is

acceptable to allow the engine to

remain idling may be governed by local

laws and regulations. Check the local

rules when using the remote engine

start system.

& Models with “keyless access

with push-button start sys-

tem”

NOTE

For more details, refer to the Owner ’s

Manual supplement for the remote

engine start system.

Access key

1) Lock button

An access key can be used as the remote

engine start transmitter. Operate the lock

button to start or stop the engine as

follows.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

– CONTINUED –

7-15

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

! Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. All doors are closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position.

! Starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock

button briefly again. The hazard warning

flashers then flash once again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard warning

flashers then flash once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine will

then start successfully.

! Stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

! Automatic engine shutdown

Theremoteenginestartsystemwill

automatically shut down or will not start

the engine under the following conditions.

. The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes.

. Any door is opened.

. The select lever is moved to any

position other than “P”.

. The engine hood is opened.

. Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis

pressed.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or

more.

The time setting until the engine auto-

matically stops can be changed. To

change it, please contact your SUBARU

dealer. Note that some settings may

violate state, provincial, or local laws and

regulations. Check the laws in your area to

determine which setting is permitted.

& Entering the vehicle while it

is running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function. If the vehicle’s

doors are unlocked manually using the

key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger

(if the alarm system is armed prior to

activating the remote engine start system)

and the engine will turn off. Perform either

of the following procedures to disarm the

alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”

F2-25.

. Switch the ignition to the “ACC” or

“ON” state by pressing the push-button

ignition switch once or twice, respec-

tively.

. Press any button on the access key/

transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle.

3. The engine will shut down when any

door is opened.

4. Press the push-button ignition switch

while depressing the brake pedal to restart

the engine.

7-16

& Entering the vehicle follow-

ing remote engine start shut-

down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the remote keyless entry

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting

and operation. After the system starts the

engine, the heater or air conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

& System maintenance

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing battery of access key” F11-50.

Manual transmission

This manual transmission is a completely

synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift

lever knob.

1) Slider

You must raise the slider and hold it in that

position before you can move the shift

lever to the “R” position.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch

pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually

let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

– CONTINUED –

7-17

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

WARNING

. Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or

with the shift lever in the neutral

position. Engine braking has no

effect in either of these condi-

tions and the risk of an accident

is consequently increased.

. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,

release the clutch peda l) sud-

denly when starting the vehicle.

By doing so the vehicle might

unexpectedly accelerate or the

transmission could malfunction.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th

50 (80)

! Shift-up indicator (STI)

The shift-up indicator appears to inform

the driver about the upshift timing.

The shift-up indicator can be activated or

deactivated. For details, refer to “Gear

position indicator (MT models)/Shift-up

indicator (STI)” F3-34.

! Maximum allowable speeds

The following table shows the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will

enter the red area if these speeds are

exceeded.

With the exception of cases where sudden

acceleration is required, the vehicle

should not be driven with the tachometer’s

needle inside the red area. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

excessive eng ine wear and poor fuel

economy.

Gear

STI

mph (km/h)

Except STI

mph (km/h)

1st 31 (50) 31 (49)

2nd 51 (82) 55 (88)

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

7-18

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

NOTE

Never exceed the posted speed limit.

& Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep d owngrades, downshi ft the

transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear

as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock

when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or

rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This

phenomenon is not an indication of a

problem in your vehicle.

Driver’s Control Center Dif-

ferential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care when

driving. Being overconfident be-

cause you are driving a vehicle with

a driver’s control center differential

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)

– CONTINUED –

7-19

Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)

CAUTION

. All the indicators will flash in the

event that the driver’scontrol

center differential has a malfunc-

tion. Have the vehicle inspected

by your SUBARU dealer.

. If a malfunction occurs in the

vehicle (for example, when the

rear differential oil temperature

warning light illuminates), all of

the indicators may disappear and

the setting value for the initial

limited slip differential (LSD) tor-

que of the driver’s control center

differential (C.DIFF /DCCD) may

be cancelled. However, it does

not indicate a malfunction of the

C.DIFF/DCCD itself.

The driver’s control center differential

allows you to freely change the degree

of limitation of the differential action

(limited slip differential (LSD) torque) of

your vehicle’s center differential.

By using the center differential control

switch, you can set an initial LSD torque to

match the road surface conditions, driving

conditions and your driving style.

1) LSD torque

2) Traction torque

3) Initial LSD torque (maximum)

4) Initial LSD torque (minimum)

A) Initial LSD torque (adjustable)

B) Mechanical LSD torque

The driver’s control center differential has

an auto mode and a manual mode. In the

auto mode, the system automatically

adjusts the initial LSD torque. In the

manual mode, you can change to the

desired mode manually by using the

center differential control switch.

NOTE

If you rapidly depress and release the

accelerator pedal while driving at low

speed, you may hear a knocking sound

from the vicinity of the center differen-

tial and rear differential. This sound

occurs because of the structure of the

center differential. It does not indicate a

problem.

& To change mode of driver’s

control center differential

Press the “AUTO-MANU” switch on the

center console to switch from auto mode

to manual mode or vice versa. When you

select the auto mode, the “AUTO” indica-

tor appears. When you select the manual

mode, the “AUTO” indicator disappears.

7-20

& Auto mode

In the auto mode, the system estimates

the driving and road conditions using

signals from the wheel speed sensor,

throttle posit ion sensor, steering angle

sensor and brake switch, etc. According

to the result, it electronically and auto-

matically controls the degree of limitation

of the differential action (LSD torque) to

optimize the differential action of the

center differential. When the ignition

switch is turned ON, the “AUTO” indicator

on the combination meter appears.

The auto mode has 3 modes as follows.

Mode Operation

AUTO [+] This mode emphasizes traction

control and strengthens the

limitation of differential action

that is suitable for driving on

slippery roads for vehicle stabi-

lity.

AUTO This mode is suitable for most

driving situations.

AUTO [−] This mode is suitable when you

seek quick response from the

steering wheel and smooth

driving.

! Mode setting method

In most situations, it is recommended that

the “AUTO” mode is selected.

Push the control switch forward to select

the “AUTO [+]” mode. After setting the

mode, “AUTO [+]” appears.

Pull the control switch rearward to select

the “AUTO [−]” mode. After setting the

mode, “AUTO [−]” appears.

When the “AUTO [+]” mode is selected,

pull the control switch rearward to change

to the “AUTO” mode. When the “AUTO

[−]” mode is set, push the control switch

forward to change to the “AUTO” mode.

Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)

– CONTINUED –

7-21

Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)

& Manual mode

In the manual mode, you can use the

center differential control switch to adjust

the initial LSD torque as desired. When

this mode is selected, the “AUTO” indica-

tor disappears.

! Center differential control switch

and indicator

The control switch is located beside the

parking brake lever. By pushing the

control switch forward or pulling it rear-

ward, it is possible to change the initial

LSD torque.

The center differential indicator on the

com bination meter gives si x levels of

indication. The indicator and control

switch are linked; when the switch is

pushed or pulled to change the initial

LSD torque, the indicator changes accord-

ingly.

Push the switch forward to increase the

initial LSD torque; when the “LOCK”

indicator appears, the initial LSD torque

setting is maximum. The center differential

will then be almost completely locked.

7-22

Pull the switch rearward to reduce the

initial LSD torque. When the lowest posi-

tion of the driver’s control center differen-

tial indicator is displayed, the initial LSD

torque will be minimum. Under this condi-

tion, only the Mechanical LSD torque will

limit the differential action.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the control switch

when a wheel slippage occurs.

Wait until the wheelspin has been

brought under control.

. Under any of the following con-

ditions after setting to the man-

ual mode, pull the center differ-

ential control switch to minimize

the initial LSD torque:

– When a temporary spare tire

is installed

– When your vehicle is towed

– When the vehicle is stopped

with the manual mode se-

lected

NOTE

. A higher initial LSD torque setting

gives the vehicle greater traction when

driving straight ahead but makes cor-

nering more difficult. Remember this

when adjusting the initial LSD torque.

In general, higher initial LSD torque

settings assist driving on slippery

roads and lower settings for non-slip-

pery roads. When the vehicle is stuck

in snow or mud, setting the initial LSD

torque to the maximum will help to free

the vehicle.

. The setting of the initial LSD torque

will remain even when the auto mode is

selected or the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. How-

ever, the initial LSD torque will be

minimized when the battery is discon-

nected and reconnected.

. During cornering or when making

turns (especially when going into the

garage), the rotational difference be-

tween the front and rear wheels may

cause a braking effect accompanied by

vibration and noise. This does not

indicate a problem. The phenomenon

will disappear when setting the initial

LSD torque to the minimum.

In the auto mode, it controls the initial

LSD torque automatically. While in the

auto mode, this phenomenon some-

times occurs depending on the driving

condition, however, it does not indicate

a problem.

. Use the center differential indicator

only as a rough indication of the initial

LSD torque.

. If you operate the center differential

control switch while quickly accelerat-

ing or turning a tight corner, you may

feel slight shocks. This is due to

differential action by the center differ-

ential and does not indicate a problem.

& Temporary release

When the driver stops the vehicle and

pulls the parking brake lever after manu-

ally setting the initial LSD torque, the LSD

torque is temporarily minimized. However

the indicator on the combination meter

continues to show the driver’s selected

initial LSD torque. When the driver re-

leases the parking brake lever, the initial

LSD torque set by the driver is restored.

Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)

7-23

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

Continuously variable trans-

mission

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P ” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is applied or

when chocks are used in the

wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Never move the vehicle rearward

by inertia with the select lever set

in a forward position or move the

vehicle forward by inertia with

the select lever set in the reverse

position. Doing so may result in

an unexpected accident or mal-

function.

. Do not shift from the “D” position

into the “R ” position or vice

versa until the vehicle has com-

pletely stopped. Such shifting

may cause damage to the trans-

mission.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for

a long time with the select lever

in any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, the transmission will

upshift to higher engine speeds than

when the coolant temperature is suffi-

ciently high in order to shorten the

warm-up time and improve driveability.

The gearshift timing will automatically

shift to the normal timing after the

engine has warmed up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalidation

of data which the on-board computer

has collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

. When driving a CVT model under

continuous heavy load conditions such

as when climbing a long, steep hill, the

engine speed or the vehicle speed may

automatically be reduced. This is not a

malfunction. This phenomenon results

from the engine control function main-

taining the cooling performance of the

vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed

will return to a normal speed when the

engine is able to maintain the optimum

cooling performance after the heavy

load decreases. Driving under a heavy

load must be performed with extreme

care.

. The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that

provides superior transmission effi-

ciency for maximum fuel economy. At

times, depending on varying driving

conditions, a chain operating noise

may be heard that is characteristic of

7-24

this type of system.

& Select lever

1) Select lever button

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button

in.

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in.

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button.

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “M” position

for using the manual mode.

NOTE

For some models, to protect the engine

while the select lever is in the “P ” or

“N” position, the engine is controlled

so that the engine speed may not

become too high even if the accelerator

pedal is depressed hard.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmis-

sion.

To shift the select lever from the “P”

position to any other position, you should

depress the brake pedal fully then move

the select lever. This prevents the vehicle

from lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement

of the select lever from the “N” to “R”

position is possible for a limited time

period by depressing the brake pedal,

and then it becomes impossible. For

details, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-28.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

– CONTINUED –

7-25

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission is

neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

NOTE

If the select lever is in the “N” position

when you stop the engine for parking,

you may not subsequently be able to

move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If

this happens, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position. You will then be able

to move the select lever to the “P”

position.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require. Also, while driving up and

down a hill, the transmission assists and

controls the driving performance and

engine braking while corresponding to

the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in the

“D” position, depress the accelerator

peda l fully to the floor and hold that

position. The transmission will automati-

cally downshift. If the Intelligent (I) mode

or the Sport (S) mode has been selected,

the transmission will operate like a con-

ventional automatic transmission. When

you release the pedal, the transmission

will return to the original gear position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the

steering wheel is operated while driving in

the “D” position, the transmission will

temporarily switch to the manual mode.

In this mode, you can shift into any gear

position using the shift paddles. For de-

tails about the manual mode, refer to

“Selection of manual mode” F7-26. Once

the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmis-

sion will switch from the manual mode

back to the “D” position for normal driving.

& Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select the

manual mode.

7-26

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter appear.

The gear position indicator shows the

currently selected gear in the following

range.

. 1st-to-8th-gear range (when the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode is selected)

. 1st-to-6th-gear range (in other situa-

tions)

The upshift and downshift indicators show

when a gear shift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “

” appears, upshifting is

possible. When the downshift indicator

“

” appears, downshifting is possible.

When both indicators appear, upshifting

and downshifting are both possible. When

the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”

indicated on it.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on

the shift paddles. Doing so may

result in accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when

the engine speed is too high, i.e., when

a downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-

sion.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the transmis-

sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT

OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-

nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe location

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

. By selecting the Sport Sharp (S#)

mode, upshifting will not occur auto-

matically. According to the road condi-

tions, shift change manually so that the

tachometer needle does not enter the

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

– CONTINUED –

7-27

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

red zone. Also, if the engine revolu-

tions reach the specified number, the

fuel supply will be cut. In this case,

perform shift up operation.

! To deselect the manual mode

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D” position from the “M”

position.

& Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P” position to any other position

before the brake pedal is depressed.

Depress the brake pedal first, and then

operate the select lever.

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the ignition switch from the “ACC” position

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove

the key from the ignition switch.

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select

lever is in the “N” position, the select lever

may not be moved to the “P” position after

a period of time. Therefore, move the

select lever to the “P” position with the

brake pedal dep ressed soon after the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

! Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

theignitionswitchbacktothe“ON ”

position then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the select lever button

pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, perform

the following steps.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P ” to “N”:

Refer

to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button” F7-28.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N ” to “R”, “P”:

Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-

tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the

select lever to the “P” position with the

select lever button pressed and brake

pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure,

the shift lock system (or the vehicle control

system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, refer to

“Shift lock release using the shift lock

release button” F7-28.

! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to

remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock

release button is located under the shift

lock cover.

7-28

3. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert a screwdriver into the hole, press

the shift lock release button using a

screwdriver, and then move the select

lever.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection

as soon as possible.

& Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are de pressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Always apply the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the mechanical friction

of the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D” position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

malfunction.

SI-DRIVE (if equipped)

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)

works to maximize engine performance,

control and efficiency.

This system consists of three modes:

Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp

(S#). By adjusting the SI-DRIVE selector,

the character of the power unit changes.

& Intelligent (I) mode

! For smooth, efficient performance

driving

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-

balanced performance with greater fuel

efficiency and smooth driveability without

stress. Power delivery is moderate during

acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE

– CONTINUED –

7-29

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE

This is ideal for around-town driving and

situations that do not require full power

output. It provides better control in difficult

driving conditions, such as slippery roads

or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle

response.

STI:

When the Intelligent (I) mode is selected,

a shift-up indicator “

” on the combina-

tion meter will blink to signal the best time

to shift gears for maximum fuel efficiency.

Except STI:

The linear acceleration characteristic of

the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal

driving usage.

& Sport (S) mode

! For all-around performance driving

The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

power desired by those who want to make

the driving experience their own personal

adventure.

STI:

The linear acceleration characteristic of

this versatile mode is ideal for normal

driving use.

& Sport Sharp (S#) mode

! For maximum performance driving

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating

level of engine performance and control.

The throttle becomes more responsive

regardless of the engine speed. Delivering

maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is

ideal for tackling twisting roads and for

merging or overtaking other vehicles on

the freeway with confidence.

Except STI:

When you select the Sport Sharp (S#)

mode while the select lever is in the “D”

position, the transmission gear ratio will

shift from variable speed to eight-speed.

The select lever/gear position indicator

display will change from “D” to the gear

7-30

position.

When selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

the following controls will be applied.

. Uphill control

Prevents unnecessary shift-up/shift-down

during ascent.

. Cornering control

While turning, if there is a large centrifugal

force, shift-up will not occur: during re-

acceleration.

. Braking control

At the beginning of corners etc., heavy

application of the brake pedal will cause

automatic downshift and gently re-accel-

erate.

. Sudden acceleration return control

During acceleration, if acceleration pedal

is returned suddenly (for example, at

corners etc.), shift-up will not be applied.

& SI-DRIVE selector (STI)

When you rotate the SI-DRIVE selector to

the left, the current SI-DRIVE mode

changes to the Sport (S) mode. When

yourotateittotheright,themode

changes to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

and when you push it, the mode changes

to the Intelligent (I) mode. After performing

this operation, the switch returns to its

original location.

NOTE

. The next time you turn on the

engine, after you turned off the engine

in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-

DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)

mode.

. The next time you turn on the

engine, after you turned off the engine

in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)

mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in

the same mode as when the engine

was turned off.

. While the engine is running, if the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator light illuminates, the SI-

DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)

mode. In this case, it is not possible to

change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or

Intelligent (I) mode.

. If there is a possibility that the

engine could overheat because of a

temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it is not possible to change to

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the

vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

it changes to the Sport (S) mode when

the engine coolant temperature in-

creases.

. If an y of the SI-DRIVE indicators

blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU

dealer.

. While the engine is cool, you cannot

change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE

– CONTINUED –

7-31

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE

& SI-DRIVE switches (except

STI)

SI-DRIVE switches

To select the Intelligent (I) mode, perform

either of the following procedures.

. Press the “S/I” switch when the Sport

(S) mode is selected

. Press the “S#/I” switch when the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode is selected

To select the Sport (S) mode, press the “S/

I” switch when any mode other than Sport

(S) mode is selected.

To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

press the “S#/I” switch when any mode

other than Sport Sharp (S #) mode is

selected.

NOTE

. The next time you turn on the

engine, after you turned off the engine

in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-

DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)

mode.

. The next time you turn on the

engine, after you turned off the engine

in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)

mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in

the same mode as when the engine

was turned off.

. While the engine is running, if the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator light illuminates, the SI-

DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)

mode. In this case, it is not possible to

change to another mode.

. If there is a possibility that the

engine could overheat because of a

temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it is not possible to change to

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the

vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

it changes to the Sport (S) mode when

the engine coolant temperature in-

creases.

. While the engine is cool, you cannot

change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.

. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators

blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU

dealer.

7-32

Limited slip differential (LSD)

(STI)

The LSD provides optimum distribution of

power according to the difference in

revolutions between the right and left

wheels that may be caused by certain

driving conditions, thereby improving driv-

ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or

other slippery roads or when high speed

driving.

CAUTION

. Never start the engine while a tire

on one side is jacked up, as the

vehicle may move.

. If one tire is spinning in mud,

avoid continued spinning at high

speed as this could adversely

affect the LSD.

. If you use a temporary spare tire

to replace a flat tire, be sure to

use the original temporary spare

tire stored in the vehicle. Using

other sizes will adversely affect

the LSD.

Power steering

& STI

The vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic

power steering system. The power steer-

ing system operates only when the engine

is running.

If you lose power steering assist because

the engine stops or the system fails to

function, you can steer but it will take

much more effort.

CAUTION

Do not hold the steering wheel at the

fully locked position left or right for

more than 5 seconds. This may

damage the power steering pump.

NOTE

Right after the engine has been started

and before it has warmed up, you may

hear a noise coming from areas adja-

cent to the power steering pump which

is located at the right-front area of the

engine compartment. This noise is

normal. I t does not indicate power

steering system trouble.

& Except STI

Power steering warning light

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. The power steer-

ing system operates only while the engine

is running. When the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, the power

steering warning light on the combination

meter illuminates to inform the driver that

the warning system is functioning properly.

Then, if the engine started, the warning

light turns off to inform the driver that the

steering power assist is operational.

CAUTION

While the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

Starting and operating/Limited slip differential (LSD) (STI)

– CONTINUED –

7-33

Starting and operating/Braking

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the n earest SUBAR U dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period

of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too fre-

quently, this may result in a malfunc-

tion of the power steering control

system.

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing

the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

7-34

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit

brake systems. Each circuit works diag-

onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of

the brake system should fail, the other half

of the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. Do not

turn off the engine while driving because

that will turn off the brake booster, result-

ing in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to depress the pedal much

harder than normal and the braking dis-

tance will increase.

! Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to obtain the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the followi ng

phenomena occur. However, even

though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal

is applied by lighter force and gener-

ates a greater braking force.

. You might hear an ABS operating

noise from the engine compartment.

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

Starting and operating/Braking

7-35

Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System)

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when

the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving a vehicle with the

ABS could easily lead to a serious

accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. When driving under

these conditions, therefore, re-

duce your speed and leave ample

distance from other vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS system.

& ABS self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may

feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar

to when the ABS operates, and you may

also hear the sound of the ABS working

from the engine compartment. This is

caused by an automatic functional test of

the ABS being carried out and does not

indicate any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-20.

7-36

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

system malfunction, the EBD system also

stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD system

malfunctions

Brake and ABS warning light

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the

conventional braking system will still func-

tion. However, the rear wheels will be

more prone to locking when the brakes

are applied harder than usual and the

vehicle’s motion may therefore become

somewhat harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat location.

2. Apply the parking brake and turn off

the engine.

3. Restart the engine.

4. Release the parking brake.

Even if both warning lights turn off:

The EBD system may be malfunctioning.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after restarting

the engine:

1. Turn off the engine again.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Check the brake fluid level. For details

about checking the brake fluid level, refer

to “Checking the fluid level” F11-25.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

– CONTINUED –

7-37

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Drivi ng with the brake system

warning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brake

system may not be working

properly. If the light remains

illuminated, have the brakes in-

spected by a SUBARU dealer

immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving a vehicle with the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle, have an inspection of

that system performed by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all

four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

– Use only the specified tem-

porary spare tire to replace a

flat tire. With a temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness

7-38

of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system i s reduced and

this should be taken into ac-

count when driving the vehi-

cle in such a condition.

. If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

. The Vehicle Dy namics Control

system helps prevent unstable

vehicle motion such as skidding

using control of the brakes and

engine power. Do not turn off the

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem unless it is absolutely ne-

cessary. If you must turn off the

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem, drive very carefully accord-

ing to the road surface condition.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi-

cator light

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating sound from the

engine compartment is heard

briefly when starting the engine

and when driving off after starting

the engine.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

engine.

. In the circumstances shown in the

following list, the vehicle may be less

stable than it feels to the driver. The

Vehicle Dynamics Control System may

therefore operate. Such operation does

not indicate a system malfunction.

– on gravel-covered or rutted

roads

– on unfinished roads

– when the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

– CONTINUED –

7-39

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if your vehicle is equipped with

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire. Failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light” F3-26 and “Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/

Traction mode indicator light” F3-27.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch

1) Traction mode indicator light

2) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

When the switch is pressed briefly or for

more than approximately 2 seconds dur-

ing engine operation, the mode of the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be

changed.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control mode

When the ignition switch is on, this mode

is selected.

This mode enables all controls for ABS,

the Traction Control System, and the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Select

this mode for most driving situations.

When this mode is selected, both indicator

lights on the combination meter turn off.

7-40

! Traction mode

This mode restricts the functions of the

Traction Control Sys tem and Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and thus delays

utilizing their functions as a reaction to

vehicle behavior in comparison with the

Vehicle Dynamics Control mod e. This

mode should be used in driving situations

where the vehicle dynamic performance

will improve without decreasing engine

torque control.

When the switch is pressed briefly during

engine operation, the traction mode in-

dicator light and the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator light on the combi-

nation meter illuminate. When the switch

is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle

Dynam ics Control system, the traction

mode indicator light and the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turn

off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

mode

This mode allows only the ABS control.

When the switch is pressed for more than

approximately 2 seconds during engine

operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light on the combination

meter illuminates. When the switch is

pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

turns off.

Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by

deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system temporarily may help to escape

from the following situations. Use the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as

necessary.

. a standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

You should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

the above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position with the Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control system deacti-

vated, the system will be automatically

reactivated the next time the engine is

started.

. If the switch is held down for 30

seconds or longer, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF indicator light

turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any further pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the

engine.

. When the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF mode is selected, the vehicle’s

running performanc e is compara ble

with that of a vehicle that does not

have a Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem. Do not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except when

absolutely necessary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF mode is selected, compo-

nents of the brake control system may

still activate. When the brake control

system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator

light illuminates.

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

7-41

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.

models)

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a

sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise, an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on

the tire placard. Refer to “Tires

and wheels” F11-31. The tire

pressure monitoring system

does not function when the ve-

hicle is stationary. After adjusting

the tire pressures, increase the

vehicle speed to at least 20 mph

(32 km/h) to start the TPMS

rechecking of the tire inflation

pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should

turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tir e

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

7-42

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off. Do not inject any tire

liquid or aerosol tire sealant into

the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors. If the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system in-

spected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts in the trunk. This may cause

poor reception of the signals from

the tire pressure sensors, and the

tire pressure monitoring system will

not function properly.

FCC ID: CWTWD1U781

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Parking your vehicle

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, occu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

7-43

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

& Parking brake (models with-

out electronic parking brake

system)

To set the parking brake, depress the

brake pedal firmly and hold it down until

the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.

To release the parking brake, perform the

following procedure.

1. Pull the lever up slightly.

2. Press the release button.

3. Lower the lever whi le keeping the

button pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake

warning light i llumi nates. After starting

the vehicle, be sure that the warning light

has turned off before the vehicle is driven.

Refer to “Parking brake indicator (models

without electronic parking brake system)”

F3-21.

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brake

is set because this will cause un-

necessary wear on the brake lin-

ings. Before starting to drive, always

make sure that the parking brake

has been fully released.

& Electronic parking brake

(models with electronic

parking brake system)

1) Parking brake switch

2) Indicator light

3) Release the electronic parking brake

4) Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, make

sure that you turn off the engine.

Otherwise, the parking brake

may be released and an accident

may occur.

. If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunc-

tioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in a safe location, use

tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

. If the electronic parking brake is

operated when the brake is over-

heated or the vehicle is on a

steep slope, the electronic park-

ing brake indicator light may

flash. In this case, the vehicle

may start to move and it may lead

to an accident. Always use the

tire stops.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parking

brake system has a malfunction

and the parking brake cannot be

7-44

applied, contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately for an inspec-

tion. If you have to park your

vehicle in such conditions, per-

form the following procedure.

– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.

– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position. When the select le-

ver cannot be shifted into the

“P” position, you must re-

lease shift lock. Refer to “Shift

lock function” F7-28.

– Use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

. Never drive while the parking

brake is applied because this will

cause unnecessary wear on the

brake linings. Before starting to

drive, always make sure that the

parking brake has been released

and the brake system warning

light has turned off.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

parking brake. You can apply/release the

parking brake by operating the parking

brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and

pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake

switch firmly while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

When the parking brake is applied while

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the electronic parking brake indicator light

and the indicator light on the parking brake

switch illuminate. Refer to “Brake system

warning light” F3-21.

NOTE

. If the parking brake switch is

pressed with the ignition switch in the

“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the

parking brake is not released.

. If the parking brake switch is

pressed without depressing the brake

pedal, the parking brake is not re-

leased.

. The electronic parking brake system

uses motors to apply the parking

brake. Therefore, operating sounds

from the motors will be heard when

applying or releasing the parking

brake. Make sure that the motor

sounds are heard when applying or

releasing the parking brake.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction or the elec-

tronic parking brake operation is pro-

hibited temporarily, if the parking brake

switch is operated, a chirp sound is

heard and the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes.

. When you cannot release the park-

ing brake due to, for example, a system

malfunction, contact your SUBARU

dealer and have your SUBARU dealer

release the parking brake.

. If the operat ion of the electronic

parking brake switch is stopped mid-

way or performed extremely slowly, the

system may detect an error and turn on

the brake system warning light. How-

ever, this does not indicate a malfunc-

tion if the brake system warning light

turns off after operating the switch.

. When the electronic parking brake

has not been used for a long period of

time, the electronic parking brake may

operate automatically after the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position. This occurs due to checking

the proper operation of the electronic

parking brake and does not indicate a

malfunction.

. If the electronic parking brake

switch is malfunctioning and the elec-

tronic parking brake cannot be re-

leased, refer to the instructions de-

scribed in “Automatic release function

by accelerator pedal” F7-46.

After activating the EPB, you may hear

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

7-45

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

a short sound several minutes after the

electronic parking brake indicator light

illuminates as the system confirms

proper engagement. This sound is

different from the apply and release

sound.

This can occur:

– If the brakes are extremely hot.

– If the car is parked on a steep

incline.

– If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch is

turned OFF.

This is a normal operating sound under

any of these conditions.

! Automatic release function by ac-

celerator pedal

The electronic parking brake system has

an automatic release function. The park-

ing brake will be automatically released by

depressing the accelerator pedal. How-

ever, the automatic release function does

not operate under the following conditions.

. Any door (other than the trunk lid) is

open.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

If the parking brake is automatically

released, the electronic parking brake

indicator light and the indicator light on

the parking brake switch turn off.

NOTE

Even if you have applied the parking

brake, the parking brake will be auto-

matically released when the accelera-

tor pedal is depressed.

! Hill Holder function

The electronic parking brake system has a

Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder

function is activated, the parking brake

will be automatically applied when stop-

ping on an uphill slope with the brake

pedal depressed. In this case, the electro-

nic parking brake indicator light and the

indicator light on the parking brake switch

illuminate.

The Hill Holder function also operates

while driving uphill in reverse.

NOTE

. The Hill Holder function may not

activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this

case , manua lly apply the elec tronic

parking brake.

. If you do not depr ess the bra ke

pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder func-

tion may not operate properly. How-

ever, this is not a malfunction. When

stopping on an uphill slope, depress

the brake pedal firmly and release it

after the electronic parking brake in-

dicator light illuminates.

. Depending on the condition of the

road surface and braking force, the

brakes operate temporarily and feel

different than usual.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction while the Hill

Holder function is activated, a chirp

sound is heard, the Hill Holder indica-

tor light turns off and the brake system

warning light turns on.

. When the hill holder activates on a

slope, the electronic parking brake is

engaged. The electronic parking brake

will release when you accelerate from

the stop. If you manually release the

electronic parking brake while the hill

holder is activated, the hill holder

function is cancelled and will not re-

engage until the vehicle has moved

some distance. In that case, you will

need to manually engage the electronic

parking brake if needed.

7-46

! Hill Holder switch

WARNING

When stopping on an uphill slope

with the Hill Holder function acti-

vated, release the brake pedal after

the electronic parking brake indica-

tor light has illuminated. Otherwise,

the Hill Holder function may not

operate properly and an accident

may occur.

You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder

function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.

To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.

To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder

switch again.

Deactivate the Hill Holder function under

the following conditions.

. When carrying a heavy load

. When you do not frequently use the

parking brake when stopping on an uphill

slope

NOTE

. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed

for more than 30 s econds, the Hill

Holder indicator light turns off, and

the system ignores any further press-

ing of the switch. To activate the switch

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the

engine.

. When the Hill Holder funct ion is

deactivated while the Hill Holder func-

tion has a malfunction, if you press the

Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.

! Hill Holder indicator light

When the Hill Holder function is activated,

the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.

Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light (models

with electronic parking brake system)”

F3-24.

! Emergency brake

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in

case of an emergency. If the emer-

gency brake is excessively used,

the brake part s will wear down

faster or the brake may not work

sufficiently due to brake overheat-

ing.

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

7-47

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

NOTE

. While using the emergency brake,

the electronic parking brake indicator

light and the indicator light on the

parking brake switch illuminate and a

chirp sounds.

. While using the emergency brake, a

sound may be heard from the engine

compartment. This is the operating

sound of the brake that is activated by

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

and does not indicate a malfunction.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you

can stop the vehicle by pulling the parking

brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light and

the indicator light on the parking brake

switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

CAUTION

If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing. Immediately stop your vehicle

in the nearest safe location and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system, the brake system

warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic

parking brake indicator light (models with

electronic parking brake system)” F3-23.

& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake firmly.

. For MT models, put the shift lever in the

“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a

downgrade.

. For CVT models, put the select lever in

the “P” (Park) position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of

the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels should

be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

7-48

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, occu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under-

spoiler and rear underspoiler (both

optional), pay attention to blocks

and other obstructi ons on the

ground when parking. The under-

spoilers could be damaged by con-

tact with them.

Hill start assist system

(models without electronic

parking brake system)

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver

to START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents

when the vehicle is parked on a

slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the

parking brake, make sure that the

vehicle remains stationary when

the clutch pedal (MT models) and

brake pedal (both MT and CVT

models) are released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the Hill start assist system is

operating. The Hill start assist

system will be deactivated, caus-

ing an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations

easier.

1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill

A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT

models)

B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)

In both these cases, the Hill start assist

system operates under the following con-

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (models without electronic parking brake system)

– CONTINUED –

7-49

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (models without electronic parking brake system)

ditions.

. when the clutch pedal is depressed

while the brake pedal is also depressed

(MT models)

. when the vehicle has stopped with the

brake pedal depressed (CVT models)

Braking power is maintained temporarily

(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill

start assist system after the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle in the same way as on a

level grade, just using the clutch pedal

(MT models only) and accelerator pedal

(all models).

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal

is released, apply more braking power by

depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.

. when starting backward facing uphill

. when starting forward facing downhill

. while the parking brake is applied

. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF” position

. while the Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator light is

illuminated

When using the Hill start assist system, a

braking effect may be felt even after the

brake pedal has been released. However,

this braking effect should disappear once

the clutch pedal is released.

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

& To activate/deactivate the Hill

start assist system

CAUTION

While the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, when starting on an

uphill grade, braking power is not

maintained if the brake pedal is

released. Start on an uphill grade

by using the parking brake.

You can activate/deactivate the Hill start

assist system according to the following

procedure.

NOTE

If you make an error when performing

any steps in the following procedure,

7-50

placetheignitionswitchinthe

“LOCK”/“OFF” position once and then

start over again.

! To deactivate

1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe

location and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

3. Restart the engine.

4. Confirm the following items.

(1) The Brake system warning light

illuminates.

(2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light turns off.

(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light turns off.

(4) The ABS warning light turns off.

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch and hold it until the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light “

”

on the combination meter illuminates for

several seconds and then turns off.

6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF switch.

Hill start assist OFF indicator light

7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch,

press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

switch once again. Then the Hill start

assist OFF indicator light illuminates.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position. The hill start assist system

has now been deactivated.

NOTE

While the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates continuously.

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (models without electronic parking brake system)

– CONTINUED –

7-51

Starting and operating/Cruise control

! To activate

When the procedure to deactivate the Hill

start assist system is performed again, the

system is activated. When the Hill start

assist system is activated, the Hill start

assist OFF indicator light turns off.

& Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator

light

Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill

start assist OFF indicator light (models

without electronic parking brake system)”

F3-24.

Cruise control

NOTE

For models with EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions.

These may cause loss of vehicle

control.

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or winding

roads

. driving in heavy traffic

NOTE

. On uphill and downhill slopes, de-

pending on the degree of the slope and

the load of the vehicle, there may be

cases when a constant speed cannot

be guaranteed.

. If the cruise control indicator does

not appear even after pressing the

cruise control main button, it is possi-

ble that there is a malfunction in the

system. We recommend that you con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an in-

spection.

. Make sure the cruise control system

is turned off when the cruise control is

not in use to avoid unintentionally

setting the cruise control.

& To set cruise control

Cruise control main button

1. Press the cruise control main button.

7-52

Cruise control indicator

The cruise control indicator on the combi-

nation meter will appear.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the “RES/SET ” switch to the

“SET” side and release it. Then release

the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control set indicator

At this time, the cruise control set indicator

appears in the combination meter.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving wi th the cruise

control activated. Sim ply depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle wil l return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

NOTE

For CVT models, when you set the

desired speed while the Sport Sharp

(S#) mode is selected, the select lever/

gear position indicator will change

from the current gear position indica-

tion to the “D” indication.

& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

The cruise control can be temporarily

canceled in the following ways.

. Press the “CANCEL” button.

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models

only).

WARNING

For CVT models, you can cancel the

cruise control by shifting the select

lever into the “N” position. However,

Starting and operating/Cruise control

– CONTINUED –

7-53

Starting and operating/Cruise control

do not shift the lever into the “N”

position while driving except in case

of emergency. If the select lever is

shifted into the “N” position, the

engine brake will no longer work.

This could result in an accident.

The cruise control set indicator in the

combination meter disappears when the

cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30

km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES” side to return to the

original cruising speed automatically.

The cruise control set indicator in the

combination meter will automatically ap-

pear at this time.

& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

. Press the cruise control main button

again.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the

vehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by the “RES/

SET” switch)

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

The set speed can be increased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) or 1km/h (0.6mph) each time by

pressing the “RES/SET” swit ch t o the

“RES” side quickly.

! To increase the speed (by accel-

erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to

accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the

“SET” side once. Now the desired speed

is set and the vehicle will keep running at

that speed without depressing the accel-

erator pedal.

NOTE

CVT models:

. If you depress the accelerator pedal

while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is

selected, the select lever/gear position

indicator may change from the “D”

indication to the current gear position

indication.

. If you depress the accelerator pedal

fully while the Intelligent (I) mode or the

Sport (S) mode is selected, the trans-

mission will operate like a conventional

automatic transmission.

7-54

! To decrease the speed (by the

“RES/SET” switch)

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

The set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6

km/h) or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time by

pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the

“SET” side quickly.

! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “SET” side once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without de-

pressing the accelerator pedal.

& Cruise control indicator

Refer to “Cruise control indicator” F3-35.

& Cruise control set indicator

Refer to “Cruise control set indicator” F3-

35.

BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with

Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to

detect objects or vehicles to the rear,

drawing attention to the driver when

changing a lane o r when driving in

reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the

vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver by monitoring the rear and

side areas of the vehicle during a

lane change or reversing. However,

you cannot rely on this system

alone in assuring the safety during

a lane change or reversing. Over-

confidence in this system could

result in an accident and lead to

serious injury or death. Since the

system operation has various limita-

tions, the flashing or illumination of

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may be delayed or it may not

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

– CONTINUED –

7-55

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

operate at all even when a vehicle is

present in a neighboring lane or

approaching from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

& System features

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-

tions.

. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an

adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at

high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind

Spot Detection)

. To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the vehicle

(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the

following features.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by the radio wave related laws

of the U.S. and Canada. When driving

in other countries, certification of the

country where the vehicle is driven

must be obtained. For certification in

the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-

tion for the BSD/RCTA” F7-62.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

existing in the blind area. If the system

detects a vehicle existing in the blind area,

it warns the driver of dangers by illuminat-

ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s). If the

driver operates the turn signal lever in the

direction where the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light is illuminating, the system

warns the driver of dangers by flashing the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

approaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes. If the system detects

a vehicle approaching at a high speed in

the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver

of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light(s) on the outside

mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn

signal lever in the direction where the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is

illuminating, the system warns the driver

of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light.

7-56

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

. The BS D/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

A) Vehicle that may be detected

WARNING

In parking areas in which parking

lots are located diagonally to driving

lanes as indicated in the illustration

above, the system may detect a

vehicle (A) that is coming across

the front of your vehicle in some

cases. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

reversing the vehicle, because the

detectability of RCTA is limited.

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

2) The out of detection range of the radar

sensors

B) Vehicle that may not be detected

WARNING

The approaching vehicle (B) may

not be detected because the vehicle

reversing is blocked by a parked

vehicle. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

reversing the vehicle, because the

detectability of RCTA is limited.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

– CONTINUED –

7-57

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

& System operation

! Operating conditions

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of

the following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing).

. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”

position (RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ap-

pears.

. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator does not appear (except when

reversing).

NOTE

. When a malfunction occurs in the

system (including the BSD/RCTA ap-

proach indicator light), the BSD/RCTA

will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA

warning indicator will appear. If the

BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,

have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will temporarily stop operating

(or may stop operating) and the BSD/

RCTA warning indicator will appear.

The BSD/RCTA will resume operation

once these conditions are corrected,

and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator

will disappear. However, if the BSD/

RCTA warning indicator has appeared

for a prolonged time, have the system

inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the or-

ientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for any reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-

face around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an envir-

onment in which there are no

objects around (such as in a desert)

for a long time

– When the temperature around

the radar sensors increased exces-

sively due to long driving on uphill

grades in summer, etc.

– When the temperature around

the radar sensors becomes extre-

mely low

– When the vehicle battery voltage

lowers

– When the vehicle battery be-

comes overvoltage

. The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-

tection may be impaired and the sys-

tem may not operate properly under the

following conditions.

– When the rear bumper around

the radar sensors is distorted

– When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface around

the radar sensors

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

– During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads and

through puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the fol-

lowing vehicles and objects.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians, stationary objects on the

road or road side and etc.

– Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehicles

with lower body height such as a

7-58

trailer with no cargo and sports

cars)

– Vehicles that are not approach-

ing your vehicle even though they

are in the detection area (either on a

neighboring lane to the rear or

beside your vehicle when rever-

sing) (The system determines the

presence of approaching vehicles

based on data detected by the radar

sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving i n parallel at

almost the same speed as your

vehicle for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that yo u are

trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles

driving in a lane next to the neighbor-

ing lane.

& BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light/warning buzzer

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-

ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver:

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light (when there are vehicles in the

neighboring lanes).

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle

is approaching from the left or right side

while reversing)

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted in each side of the outside

mirrors and will illuminate when a vehicle

approaching from behind is detected. If an

indicator light illuminates and the turn

signal lever is operated toward the side

in which this light turned on, the indicator

light flashes to warn the driver of dangers.

When reversing the vehicle, the indicator

light flashes when the system detects a

vehicle approaching from either side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

. When affected by direct sunlight,

you may have difficu lty recognizing

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

. When affected by the headlight

beams from the vehicles behind, you

may have difficulty recognizing the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

. While the illumination brightness

control dial is in the fully upward

position, even if the headligh ts are

turned on, the brightness of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will not

be reduced. For details about the

illumination brightness control dial,

refer to “Illumination brightness con-

trol” F3-100.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

– CONTINUED –

7-59

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-

zer (only when reversing)

A w arning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the multi

information display of t he combination

meter. For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”

F3-49.

! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

. In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and

the warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the

neighboring lane from a lane next to

the neighboring lane

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and downhill

grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring lane

are driving on the far side of each lane.

– When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersection)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neighbor-

ing lane

– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA

OFF switch

– Immediately after the shi ft lever/

select lever is shifted to the “R”

position

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the trunk

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may illuminate when driving close to

solid objects on the road or road side

(such as guardrails, tunnels and side-

walls).

. When turning at an intersection in

urban areas, or a multilane intersection,

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may flash.

. If a building or a wall exists in the

reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA ap-

proach indicator light may flash and the

warning buzzer may sound.

. In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

– When your vehicle drives on the

near side of its lane from the corre-

sponding vehicle

7-60

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

away drives on the near side of its lane

from your vehicle

& BSD/RCTA warning indicator

! System temporary stop indicator

System temporary stop indicator

This indicator appears when the system is

used under the following conditions.

. Extremely high or low temperatures

. When abnormal voltage exists for the

vehicle battery

. When the radar sensor is significantly

misaligned

Once these conditions are corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will

disappear. If the indicator remains dis-

played for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stop indicator

due to reduced radar sensitivity

System temporary stop indicator due to

reduced radar sensitivity

This indicator appears when the detect-

ability of the radar sensors is reduced.

Once the condition is corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will

disappear. If the indicator remains dis-

played for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System malfunction indicator

System malfunction indicator

1) At first, this message will appear

2) Then this message will appear

This indicator appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

– CONTINUED –

7-61

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

& BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,

the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on

the multi information display of the combi-

nation meter, and the BSD/RCTA is

deactivated.

Press the switch again to activate the

BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor disappears.

NOTE

. In the following cases, press the

BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivate

the system. The system may not oper-

ate properly due to blocked radar

waves.

– When a bicycle carrier or other

item is fitted to the rear of the

vehicle

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When running the engine and

making the wheels rotate while

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known

status of the system is maintained. For

example, if the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA

remains deactivated the next time the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. If the vehicle battery is disconnected

due to situations such as battery

terminal or fuse replacement, after the

battery is reconnected, the BSD/RCTA

will be activated.

& Certification for the BSD/

RCTA

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard

(s). Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

7-62

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Le présent appareil est conform e aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux

appareils radio exempts de licence. L’ex-

ploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-

tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur

de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage

radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage

est susceptible d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

& Handling of radar sensors

Radar sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of

the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

NOTE

. To ensure correct operation of the

BSD/RCTA, observe the following pre-

cautions.

– Always keep the bumper surface

near the radar sensors clean.

– Do not affix any stickers or other

items on the bumper surface near

the radar sensors.

– Do not modify the bumper near

the radar sensors.

– Do not paint the bumper near the

radar sensors.

– Do not expose the bumper near

the radar sensors to strong im-

pacts. If a sensor becomes misa-

ligned, a system malfunction may

occur, including the inability to

detect vehicles entering the detec-

tion areas. If any strong shock is

applied to the bumper, be sure to

contact your SUBARU dealer for

inspection.

– Do not disassemble the radar

sensors.

. If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the radar s ensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-63

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

Reverse Automatic Braking

System (if equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking is a system

designed to help avoid collisions or reduce

collision damage when reversing the

vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected

in the reversing direction, the system will

notify the driver with a warning sound and

may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto-

matically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking is not

a system intended to replace the

driver’s responsibility to check

surrounding areas for vehicles or

obstacles to avoid a collision.

. The driver is responsible for

driving safely. Always be sure to

check the surroundings visually

when reversing the vehicle.

. Since the system operation has

various limitations, the warning

sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate at

all even when an obstacle is

present in the reversing direc-

tion.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including chil-

dren), animals or other moving

objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi-

tion or the surrounding environ-

ment, the sonar sensor’s ability

to detect objects may become

unstable.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys-

tem records and stores the following

data when automatic braking operates.

It does not record conversations, per-

sonal information or other audio data.

. Distance from the object

. Vehicle speed

. Accelerator pedal operation status

. Brake pedal operation status

. Select lever position

. Outside temperature

. The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parti es con-

tracted by SUBARU may acquire

and use the recorded data for the

purpose of vehicle r esearch and

development. SUBARU and third

parties contracted by SUBARU will

not disclose or provide the acquired

data to any other third party except

under the following conditions.

– The vehicle owner has given his/

her consent.

– The disclosure/provision is

based on a court order or other

legally enforceable request.

– Data that has been modified so

that the user and vehicle cannot be

identified is provided to a research

institution for statistical processing

or similar purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

System overview

The system detects objects using sonar

sensors installed in the rear bumper. If the

system determines a possible collision

with an object in the reversing direction,

automatic deceleration will be activated.

Also, beeping sounds will activate. If the

vehicle is further reversed, automatic hard

braking will be applied and a continuous

beeping sound will activate.

7-64

! Detecting range

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately

5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-

road crossing and you are trying to

escape by reve rsing through the

crossing gate, the system may re-

cognize the crossing ga te as an

obstacle and the brakes may acti-

vate. In this case, remain calm and

either continue to depress the accel-

erator pedal or cancel the system.

To cancel the system, refer to “Can-

celing the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing system operation ” F7-70.

& Operating conditions

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

will operate when all of the following

conditions are met.

. Theignitionswitchisinthe“ON”

position

. The EyeSight warning indicator is off

. The Reverse Automatic Braking fail

indicator is off

. HALT (Rever se Automatic Braking

system OFF) indicator is off

. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem is set to on

. The select lever is in the “R” position

. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9

mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)

NOTE

. When the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing fail indicator is illuminated, the

Reverse Automatic Braking system

cannot be operated. Promptly contact

a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

. When the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing system OFF indicator is illumi-

nated, the Reverse Automatic Braking

system cannot be operated.

. In the following cases, the system

may not be able to properly detect an

obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the rear bumper near the

sonar sensor

– The rear bumper is modified

– The rear bumper has been re-

moved and reattached

– The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading condi-

tion or modification

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the rear bumper near the sonar

sensor

– The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper is

deformed

. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-

matic braking ability will be reduced.

. The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed is

less than approximately 3 mph (5

km/h). However, the system does not

guarantee that the vehicle will be able

to avoid collisions in any situation.

. If the vehicle is reversed at an

extremely slow speed, the driver ’s

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

– CONTINUED –

7-65

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

operation may be prioritized. In this

case, automatic braking will not oper-

ate.

. Thesystemmaynotbeableto

detect the following objects

– Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor

– Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select lever is

set to the “R” position

– Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor such as a

chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed

to detect

– Pedestrians

– Moving objects including moving

vehicles

– Objects which absorb sound

waves such as cloth or snow

– Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle

– Objects that are low to the

ground such as parking blocks

– Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above

. The system may not be able to

properly detect objects or may cause

a system malfunction when the follow-

ing conditions exist

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby

– Horn sound from another vehicle

– Engine sound from other vehi-

cles

– Sound of an air brake

– Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle

– A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted nearby

– A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction

Weather conditions

– Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area near

the sonar sensor becomes too hot

or too cold to operate

– The rear bumper near the sonar

sensors is exposed to heavy rain or

a significant amount of water

– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

– Air is moving rapidly such as

when a strong wind is blowing

Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor

– Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna) or

commercial attachment parts (trai-

ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper

guard) are attached

– Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached

Vehicle conditions

– The vehicle is significantly in-

clined

– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s

loading condition, etc.

– When

the sonar sensor is mis-

aligned due to a collision or an

accident

Surrounding environment

– A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars

are present in the reversing direc-

tion

– When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area

– When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to the

vehicle such as narrow tunnels,

narrow bridges, narrow roads or

7-66

narrow garages

– Wheel tracks or a hole is present

in the ground of the reversing

direction

– When reversing over a drainage

cover (grate cover)

– The path of the reversing direc-

tion is inclined such as on a steep

uphill

– A curb is present in the reversing

direction

– When reversing downhill

& Reverse Automatic Braking

System operation

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

System is in operation, the range between

the vehicle and the detected object will be

indicated on the multi function display.

Also, warning sounds will activate in 3

levels to warn the driver of a potential

collision.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

– CONTINUED –

7-67

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

Guideline of detecting range

Alarm pattern Range of detected object* Distance indicator Warning sounds

Long proximity warn-

ing (Obstacle detect

warning)

35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity

warning (First braking

and warning - yellow)

28 to 35 inches (70 to 90

cm)

Yellow + Green Short beeps

Short proximity warn-

ing (First braking and

warning - orange)

20 to 28 inches (50 to 70

cm)

Orange + Yellow +

Green

Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity

warning (Second

braking and warning)

20 inches (50 cm) or less

Red + Orange +

Yellow + Green

Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

Range of detected object

1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more

1) Obstacle detect warning:

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object

will be indicated on the multi function

display.

7-68

Range of detected object

1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)

2) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)

Warning message

2) First braking and warning:

When the system detects an object, if the

vehicle keeps reversing, the system de-

termines a collision with an object may

occur. In this case, short warning beeps

will sound and automatic deceleration will

be activated. Also, a warning message

and the range of detected object will be

indicated on the multi function display.

Range of detected object

1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less

Warning message

3) Second braking and warning:

When the system has detected an object,

if the vehicle is further reversed and the

system determines that a collision is

highly likely to occur, a continuous warn-

ing beep will sound and automatic hard

braking will be applied.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

– CONTINUED –

7-69

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

4) After the vehicle has been stopped by

the system:

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

after the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is

depressed, a message will be displayed

on the multi function display and the

continuous beep will remain sounding.

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF

indicator will illuminate and the system will

temporarily stop operating. The Reverse

Automatic Braking system OFF indicator

will turn off when the select lever is shifted

to a position other than the “R” position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to “R”

position.

NOTE

. In the following cases, after the

vehicle has been stopped by the Re-

verse Automatic Braking system, brake

control is released and the electronic

parking brake operates. For de tails

about releasing the parking brake, refer

to “Electronic parking brake (models

with electronic parking brake system)”

F7-44.

– When 2 minutes pass after the

vehicle is stopped

– When any door is opened

– When the EyeSight system mal-

functions

– When the EyeSight system stops

temporarily

– When the Reverse Automatic

Braking system malfunctions

– When the Reverse Automatic

Braking system stops temporarily

& Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking system opera-

tion

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

can be temporarily cancelled by any of the

following operations.

. While automatic braking is in operation,

the brake pedal is depressed

. While automatic braking is in operation,

the accelerator pedal is depressed

. When automatic deceleration is in

activation, the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed hard

. The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position

NOTE

The system will be cancelled if the

object is no longer detected.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

system ON/OFF setting

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the Re-

verse Automatic Braking system can be

set by operating the multi function display.

For details about how to operate the multi

function display, refer to “Basic operation”

F3-50.

7-70

1) ON/OFF setting of Reverse Automatic

Braking

2) ON/OFF setting of the object detection

warning sound

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem settings that are changed by the

multi function display will be restored

to default (ON setting) the next time the

select lever is shifted to “R” position.

& RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunctions, the above indicator illumi-

nates on the combination meter. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Handling of the sonar sen-

sors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the

rear bumper. To ensure the proper opera-

tion of the Reverse Automatic Braking

system, observe the following precau-

tions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the sonar

sensors.

. Always keep the rear bumper surface

near the sonar sensors clean.

. Do not modify the rear bumper.

. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar

sensors.

. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

– CONTINUED –

7-71

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunction may occur, including inability

to detect objects in the reversing direction.

If any strong impact is applied to the rear

bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors re-

quires repair, p aintwork or replace-

ment, contact your SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

7-72

New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2

Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3

Periodic ins pections ........................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4

Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5

Driving precaution............................................... 8-6

Winter driving ...................................................... 8-6

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-6

Driving on snowy and icy roads ........................... 8-8

Corrosion protection............................................ 8-9

Snow tires ........................................................... 8-9

Tire chains ........................................................ 8-10

Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-10

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-10

Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-11

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-12

Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-12

Driving tips

Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

New vehicle break-in driving

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid

acceleration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an

emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly

mounted engine or when brake pads or

brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save

fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

. The indication of the ECO gauge

shows a reference for saving fuel. For

details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-12.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorle ss

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

8-2

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

STI

Except STI

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust

gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-

ter:

. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small

amount of leaded fuel will damage the

catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.,

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

Driving tips/Catalytic converter

– CONTINUED –

8-3

Driving tips/Periodic inspections

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Mainten ance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements ” F7-3.

. Comply with all regulations and re-

quirements of each country.

8-4

Driving tips for AWD models

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are drivi ng an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. When you replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

bottom of driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

for items (a) to (h), there is a

possibility that serious mechan-

ical damage could occur to the

drive train of your car, and affect

the following.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored

in the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD models

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.

By shifting power between the front and

rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during acceleration

and added engine braking force during

deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the

following tips in mind.

. An AWD model is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models

– CONTINUED –

8-5

Driving tips/Driving precaution

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is li ttle difference in handling,

however, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an

ample distance from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire placard, which is located under the

door latch on the driver’s side.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of the follow-

ing items than that specified in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

– Rear differential gear oil

– Manual transmission oil (MT mod-

els)

– Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models)

– Front differential gear oil (CVT

models)

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detailed information, refer to “Towing”

F9-12.

Driving precaution

Water entering the engine air intake or the

exhaust pipe or water splashing onto

electrical parts may damage your vehicle

and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to

drive through rushing water; regardless of

its depth, it can wash away the ground

from under your tires, resulting in possible

loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.

Winter driving

& Operation during cold

weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand,

flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold

temperatures reduce battery capacity.

The battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strip s

around the door. If the door is frozen,

use hot water to melt the ice, and after-

wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

8-6

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100%

−498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

thepipingistoolowfortheoutside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and

driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has

accumulated under the fenders to avoid

making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake

when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze

in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in

snow or when it snows, raise the

wiper blades off the glass to

prevent damage to them.

. When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads heavily

covered with snow, or has been

left parked during a snowstorm,

icing may develop on the brake

system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow

Driving tips/Winter driving

– CONTINUED –

8-7

Driving tips/Winter driving

or ice buildup on the suspension,

disc brakes and brake hoses

underneath the vehicle. If there

is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the

disc brakes and brake hoses and

ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the following

tips.

1. For MT models, place the shift lever in

the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models,

place the select lever in the “P” position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. Wh en an

antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used

for an extended period, it is best to have

the fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your ve hicle’s b raking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information on braking on slippery sur-

faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)” F7-36 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control system” F7-38.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of

vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to the

windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blades are frozen to th e

win dshield, use the defroster and the

temperature set for maximum warmth until

the wiper blades are completely thawed.

Refer to “Climate control” F4-1.

If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-

ger and deicer” F3-114.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

and the temperature set for maximum

warmth. After the windshield gets warmed

enough to melt the frozen snow on it,

wash it away using the windshield washer.

Refer to “Windshield washer” F3-105.

8-8

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and freez-

ing temperatures. Blades of this type give

superior wiping performance in snowy

conditions. Be sure to use blades that

are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During hig h-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protection

Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When you replacing or installing

winter tire(s), all four tires must

be the same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

bottom of driver’s door pillar.

If all of four winter tires are not

the same for items (a) to (h), there

is a possibility that serious me-

chanical damage could occur to

the drive train of your car, and

affect the following.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a co mbination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “summer

tires” as original equipment, which are

inadequate for driving on slippery roads

such as on snow-covered or icy roads.

When you choose to install winter tires on

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

Driving tips/Winter driving

– CONTINUED –

8-9

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of

clearance between the tires and

vehicle body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use

of another type of traction device (such

as spring chains) may be acceptable if

use on your vehicle is recommended

by the device manufacturer, taking into

account tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with

a traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the shift

lever/select lever back and forth between

“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than in 1st (MT models and CVT

models).

If your veh icle is a CVT model, for

information about holding the transmission

in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of

manual mode” F7-26.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride

on a folded rear seatback or in

the trunk. Doing so may result in

serious injury.

. Never stack l uggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

. Stow cargo and luggage in the

trunk whenever possible.

8-10

. To prevent cargo and luggage

from sliding forward during brak-

ing, do not stack anything in the

enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and

luggage low, as close to the floor

as possible.

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place cargo or luggage in

or on the following locations as

the item may get under the

clutch, brake, or accelerator ped-

al and prevent the pedals from

being depressed properly, block

the driver’s vision, or hit the

driver or passengers, causing

an accident:

– At the feet of the driver

– On the front passenger or rear

seats (when stacking items)

– On the rear shelf

– On the instrument panel

– On the dashboard

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your veh icle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a roof rack or bike carrier, etc.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

8-11

Driving tips/Trailer towing

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR

(Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, and

any optional equipment. Therefore, the

GVW changes depending on the situation.

The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual

weight of your vehicle – including standard

equipment, fluids, emergency tools and

spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle

capacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a

vehicle scale, found at a commercial

weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Trailer towing

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither designed nor

intended to be used for trailer tow-

ing. Therefore, never tow a trailer

with your vehicle.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that may result

from trailer towing, from any trailer towing

equipment or from any errors or omissions

in the instructions accompanying such

equipment. SUBARU warranties do not

apply to vehicle damage or malfunction

caused by trailer towing.

8-12

If you park your vehicle in case of an

emergency ........................................................ 9-2

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2

Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3

Flat tires............................................................... 9-4

Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-8

Jump starting ...................................................... 9-9

How to jump start................................................ 9-9

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-11

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-11

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-11

Towing................................................................. 9-12

Towing and tie-down hooks ................................ 9-12

Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-14

Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-15

Electronic parking brake – if the electronic

parking brake cannot be released

(models with electronic parking brake

system)............................................................ 9-16

Access key – if access key does not

operate properly ............................................. 9-16

Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-16

Switching power status...................................... 9-16

Starting engine .................................................. 9-17

Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof

does not close ................................................ 9-18

If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-18

In case of emergency

In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

If you park your vehicle in

case of an emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) is unable to monitor all four

road wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for tire

and sensor replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.

CAUTION

. Never use any temporary spare

tire other than the original. Using

other sizes may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle.

. Always conform to the following

instructions when using the tem-

porary spare tire. Otherwise, a

seriously dangerous situation

may occur.

9-2

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. The correct pressure is

as follows.

Mexico models: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3

kgf/cm

)

Other models: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2

kgf/cm

)

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

. Drive with caution when temporary

spare tire is fitted. Avoid hard acceleration

and braking, or fast cornering, as control

of the vehicle may be lost.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

. Always set the driver’s control center

differential to the manual mode and adjust

the initial LSD torque to the minimum.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

– CONTINUED –

9-3

In case of emergency/Flat tires

1) Jack handle

1) Under-floor storage compartment (if

equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage

compartment” F6-12.)

2) Tool bucket

3) Spare tire

1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver

3) Jack

4) Towing hook (eye bolt)

A jack handle is stored under the floor of

the trunk. A jack and a towing hook are

stored in the tool bucket that is located in

the recess of the spare tire wheel. A

screwdriver and a wheel nut wrench are

stored in the vinyl bag. These tools can

also be stored in the tool bucket.

NOTE

For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat

tires” F9-4.

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in a

severe accident.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get

under the vehicle while support-

ing the vehicle with this jack.

. Before using the jack, be sure

that there are no occupants or

cargo in the vehicle.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

9-4

the jack. The jack can come out

of the jacking point due to a jolt

and this can result in a severe

accident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Set the parking brake securely and

shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)

or the select lever to the “P” (Park)

position (CVT models).

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher

and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the floor of the trunk. Refer to

“Maintenance tools” F9-3.

NOTE

Make sure that the jack is well lubri-

cated before using it.

6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the

attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take

the spare tire out.

NOTE

If the spare tire provided in your vehicle

is a temporary spare tire, carefully read

“Temporary spare tire” F 9-2 and

strictly follow the instructions.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Jack-up points

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

– CONTINUED –

9-5

In case of emergency/Flat tires

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

11. Before putting the spare tire on, per-

form the following steps.

. Clean the mounting surface of the

wheel and hub with a cloth.

. Clean the threaded parts with a

cloth and check the conditions there.

CAUTION

If the threaded part was damaged,

you should immediately contact

your SUBARU dealer.

12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

9-6

14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer

to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

Except STI

15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. For except STI models, put

in the spacer and tighten the attaching bolt

firmly.

Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel

nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

. Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compart-

ment after changing wheels. In a

sudden stop or collision, loose

equipment could strike occu-

pants and cause injury. Store

the tire and all tools in the proper

place.

. When you store a flat tire, be sure

to set the rear seatback to the

upright position. If you fold down

the seatback, an accident or

injury may occur when the flat

tire suddenly moves.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

– CONTINUED –

9-7

In case of emergency/Flat tires

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.

models)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused by running

over a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving af ter adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

9-8

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,

thoroughly flush the exposed

area with water immediately. Get

medical help if the fluid has

entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medic al

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around

a battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not ha ve

loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative termina l is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

In case of emergency/Jump starting

– CONTINUED –

9-9

In case of emergency/Jump starting

A) Booster battery

B) Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged

battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) term-

inal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of the oth er

cable to the negative (−) terminal of

the booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle

with the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-10

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap while the engine is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe

location.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

. Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-

er.

& If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine run ning at id ling

speed.

2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compart ment. Refer to “Engine

hood” F11-9.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact a n authorized

SUBARU dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If temperature gauge stays in the over-

heated zone, turn off the engine. Refer to

“Temperature gauge” F3-11.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank. If the coolant level is below the

“LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”

mark.

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine coolant” F11-18.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

In case of emergency/Engine overheating

9-11

In case of emergency/Towing

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

WARNING

Never tow AWD models (both CVT

and MT models) with the front

wheels raised off the ground while

the rear wheels are on the ground,

or with the rear wheels raised off the

ground while the front wheels are on

the ground. This will cause the

vehicle to spin away due to the

operation or deterioration of the

center differential.

& Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hook and tie-down hook. Never

use suspension parts or other

parts of the body for towing or

tie-down purposes.

. To prevent deformation to the

front bumper and the towing

hook, do not apply excessive

lateral load to the towing hook.

Front towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and

wheel nut wrench out of the tool bucket.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head

screwdriver into the cutout of the cover

and pry open the cover.

9-12

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

Rear towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and

wheel nut wrench out of the tool bucket.

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a

threaded hole for attaching the towing

hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the wheel nut wrench.

In case of emergency/Towing

– CONTINUED –

9-13

In case of emergency/Towing

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

Do not use the towing hook except

when towing your vehicle.

Be sure to remove the towing hook

after towing. Leaving the towing

hook mounted on the vehicle could

interfere with proper operation of

the fuel pump shut off function

when the vehicle is struck from

behind.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Rear tie-down holes:

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove

the plugs. After using the rear tie-down

holes, return the plugs to their original

places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the “P”

9-14

position for CVT models. Shift the shift

lever into the “1st” position for MT models.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under-

spoiler and rear underspoiler (both

optional), be careful not to scrape

them when placing the vehicle on

the carrier and when removing the

vehicle from the carrier.

& Towing with all wheels on the

ground

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in the “N”/neutral position.

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the

direction of the wheels will be

locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not

running. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. For CVT models, the traveling

speed must be limited to less

than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the

traveling distance to less than 31

miles (50 km). For greater speeds

and distances, transport your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

In case of emergency/Towing

9-15

In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released (models with electronic parking

brake system)

Electronic parking brake – if

the electronic parking brake

cannot be released (models

with electronic parking brake

system)

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have

your SUBARU dealer release the electro-

nic parking brake.

Access key – if access key

does not operate properly

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters

away from the area between the

access key and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key and the push-button

ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or the access key

battery being low.

. Locking/unlocking doors

. Switching power status

. Starting the engine

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the access

key is discharged, replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access

key” F11-50.

& Locking and unlocking

1) Release button

2) Mechanical key

While pressing the release button of the

access key, take out the mechanical key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

mechanical key.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

reinsert the mechanical key into the

access key.

& Switching power status

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT

models) or the select lever into the “P”

position (CVT models).

9-16

3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models)

or brake pedal (CVT models).

4. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button

ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key and the vehicle is completed,

a chime (ding) will sound. At the same

time, the status of the push-button ignition

switch changes to either of the following.

. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

“ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated, press

the push-button ignition switch with the

clutch pedal (MT models) or brake pedal

(CVT models) released. The status of the

push-button ignition switch then changes

to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Starting engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT

models) or the select lever into the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).

5. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button

ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key and the vehicle is completed,

a chime (ding) will sound. At the same

time, the push-button ignition switch turns

to the “ACC” or “ON” position.

6. Within 5 seconds after the push-button

ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or “ON”

position, while depressing the brake pedal

(all models) and the clutch pedal (MT

models), press the push-button ignition

switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

In case of emergency/Access key – if access key does not operate properly

9-17

In case of emergency/Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close

Moonroof (if equipped) – if

the moonroof does not close

If the moonroof does not close, we

recommend that you have the system

checked by a SUBARU dealer.

If your vehicle is involved in

an accident

CAUTION

If yo ur vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the engine. If you find that

fuel has leaked on the ground, do

not try to restart the engine. The fuel

system has been damaged and is in

need of repair. Immediately contact

the nearest automotive service facil-

ity. We recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. To minimize the risk of fire due to

fuel leakage when your vehicle is subject

to impact from an accident or another

factor, the system stops supplying fuel.

However, depending on the impact condi-

tions at the time of collision, the fuel pump

shut-off system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to re-

start the engine after the system is

activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position.

2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the engine.

9-18

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing............................................................. 10-2

Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4

To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5

Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5

Monitor.............................................................. 10-6

Appearance care

Appearance care/Exterior care

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes,

drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the

brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and area adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction

of electrical equipment.

. When washing the inner fenders,

underbody, bumpers and pro-

truding objects such as exhaust

pipes and exhaust finishers, be

careful to avoid contact with any

sharp ends in order to prevent

injuries.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car wash is of

suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree

sap, and bird droppings should be washed

off by using a light detergent, as required.

If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly rinsed

off the surface and not allowed to dry

there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with

plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand

brush when washing down underbody,

inner fenders and suspension to remove

mud and dirt effectively.

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-

pension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or

sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off

the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-

sion and axle parts, as they are particu-

larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do

not use a sharp-edged tool to remove

caked mud.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor ha rnesses, and

other parts when washing sus-

10-2

pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as moldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the

surface with a fine-grained compound.

Never polish just the affected area, but

include the surrounding area as well.

Always polish in only one direction. A

No. 2000 grain compound is recom-

mended. Never use a coarse-grained

compound. Coarse-graine d compounds

have a smaller grain-size number and

could damage the paint. After polishing

with a compound, coat with wax to restore

the original luster. Frequent polishing with

acompoundoranincorrectpolishing

technique will result in removing the paint

layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your

SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-

list.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax w ith organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

& Cleaning aluminum wheels

. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels

clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt

is left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to

clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-

num wheels) with water as soon as

possible when it has been splashed with

sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or other

agents.

Appearance care/Exterior care

10-3

Appearance care/Corrosion protection

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of

corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where

there is more salt in the air, or in areas

where there is considerable industrial

pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving o n any of the

following surfaces.

. roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. mud, sand, or gravel

. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to

make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventil ated

garage. In such a garage, corrosion can

be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle

into the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, and hood latch should

be inspected and lubricated periodically.

10-4

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric

thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe

using a solution of mild soap and luke-

warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use

the cleaner on a hidden place and make

sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.

Use the cleaner according to its instruc-

tions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and head restraints be

covered, or the windows shaded, to

prevent fading or shrinkage. Seat covers

and head restraint covers should be

removed before operating the vehicle.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characteristic of

genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or fuel must never be used

on leather or synthetic interior ma-

terials. Doing so could damage the

surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,

console panel, and switches

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

– CONTINUED –

10-5

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or fuel, or

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents

that contain silicone on the vehi-

cle audio system, electrical com-

ponents of the air-conditioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

& Monitor

To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-

tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone

cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is

extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth

moistened with neutral detergent then

carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the monitor. Doing

so could damage the monitor’s

components.

. Do not wipe the monitor with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, fuel, or any

other volatile substance. Such

cleaning fluid could erase the

lettering on the switches at the

bottom of the monitor.

10-6

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-4

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-5

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5

Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-6

Removing and reinstalling clips .......................... 11-6

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-9

Engine compartment overview........................ 11-11

STI................................................................... 11-11

Except STI ....................................................... 11-12

Engine oil.......................................................... 11-13

Engine oil consumption.................................... 11-13

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-13

Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-15

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16

Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-17

Cooling system ................................................ 11-17

Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-17

Engine coolant ................................................. 11-18

Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-19

Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-19

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-21

Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-21

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-22

Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-23

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-23

Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... 11-23

Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and

rear different ial gear oil................................ 11-23

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-23

Power steering fluid (STI) ............................... 11-24

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-24

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-25

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-25

Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-25

Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-26

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-26

Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-26

Brake booster .................................................. 11-27

Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-27

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-27

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-28

Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-28

Checking the clutch function............................ 11-28

Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-28

Hill start assist system.................................... 11-29

Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-29

Breaking-in of new brake pads (models with

electronic parking brake system).................... 11-29

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings

(models without electronic parking brake

system) ......................................................... 11-30

Parking brake stroke (models without

electronic parking brake system) ................ 11-30

Maintenance and service

Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-31

Types of tires ................................................... 11-31

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if

equipped)....................................................... 11-31

Tire inspection ................................................. 11-32

Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-33

Wheel balance.................................................. 11-35

Wear indicators ................................................ 11-35

Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-36

Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-36

Tire replacement .............................................. 11-36

Wheel replacement........................................... 11-37

Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-38

Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-38

Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-39

Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-40

Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-40

Battery .............................................................. 11-41

Fuses ................................................................ 11-42

Installation of accessories .............................. 11-44

Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-44

Headlights (models with LED headlights).......... 11-44

High beam headlight ........................................ 11-44

Low beam headlight (models without LED

headlights), front side marker light (if

equipped), parking light (models without LED

headlights) and front turn signal light............. 11-46

Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-47

Rear combination lights ................................... 11-48

License plate light ........................................... 11-49

Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-49

Replacing battery............................................. 11-50

Replacing battery of access key....................... 11-50

Replacing transmitter battery ........................... 11-51

Maintenance schedule

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. For details, read the separate

“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada models

Some items of your vehicle are required to

be serviced at scheduled intervals. For

details about your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

NOTE

For models with a multi function dis-

play, you can set a reminder to be

displayed when a scheduled mainte-

nance item is almost due. For details,

refer to “Maintenance settings” F3-81.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-W heel Drive

model must NEVER be per-

formed on a single two-wheel

dynamometer or similar appara-

tus. Attempting to do so will

result in transmission damage

and in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an

accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule

– CONTINUED –

11-3

Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. NEVER use a circuit

tester for this wiring. If your

SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-

sioner needs service, consult

your nearest SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake to prevent the

vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after

the engine has stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan

may operate suddenly even

when the engine is stopped. If

your body or clothes come into

contact with a rotating fan, that

could result in serious injury. To

avoid risk of injury, perform the

following precautions.

– Models with push-button start

system:

Always turn the push-button

ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take

the access key out from the

vehicle.

– Models without push-button

start system:

Always remove the key from

the ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicing

on a vehicle equipped with a

remote engine start system (a

dealer option) temporarily place

that system in the service mode

to prevent it from unexpectedly

starting the engine.

11-4

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

CAUTION

. Do not contact the drive belt

cover while checking the compo-

nents in the engine compart-

ment. Doing so may cause your

hand to slip off the cover and

result in an unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a

burn or other injury. Note that the

oil filter becomes very hot when

the engine is running and re-

mains hot for some time after

the engine has stopped.

. Do not apply force on the fender

insulator by placing your hands

on it, etc. Deformation of the

insulator and its mount may

occur.

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

while the engine is running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, drive belt and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions

11-5

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

Maintenance tips

Some clips and fender linings must be

removed before replacing the air cleaner

elements or specific bulbs.

& Removing and reinstalling

clips

! Removing clips

There are several types of clips used for

your vehicle.

! Type A clips

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

2.Removetheclipswithaflat-head

screwdriver using leverage.

3. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

! Type B clips

! Type C clips

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in

the illustration.

2. Pull the protruded center portion to

remove the entire body of the clip.

! Type D clips

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center portion

of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

11-6

! Type E clips

1. Push the center portion of the clip

using a Phillips screwdriver until the clip is

raised.

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

! Type F clips

1. Pull out the head of the clip using a

flat-head screwdriver as shown in the

illustration.

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

! Reinstalling clips

! Type A clips

! Type B clips

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

– CONTINUED –

11-7

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

! Type C clips

! Type D clips

! Type E clips

Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of

the clip into the hole.

! Type F clips

Insert the clip without the head first and

then push the head of the clip into the

hole.

11-8

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

position.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front

grille and the hood toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 11.8 in (30 cm) above its closed

position and then let it drop.

2. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not push

the hood forcibly to close it. It could

deform the metal.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

CAUTION

. When you open the engine hood,

do not stand the wiper blades up.

Furthermore, while the hood is

open, do not operate the wind-

shield wipers. Doing so could

result in damage to the engine

hood and wiper blades.

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the

metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

Maintenance and service/Engine hood

– CONTINUED –

11-9

Maintenance and service/Engine hood

than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine

hood becomes too heavy, the

stay may not be able to support

holding it open.

11-10

Engine compartment overview

& STI

1) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-24)

2) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

(page 11-25)

3) Fuse box (page 11-42)

4) Battery (page 11-41)

5) Windshield washer tank (page 11-38)

6) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-13)

7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-18)

8) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-13)

9) Coolant filler tank cap (page 11-18)

10) Air cleaner case (page 11-19)

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview

– CONTINUED –

11-11

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview

& Except STI

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

(MT models) (page 11-25)

2) Fuse box (page 11-42)

3) Battery (page 11-41)

4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-38)

5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-13)

6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-18)

7) Radiator cap (page 11-18)

8) Engine oil filter (page 11-15)

9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-13)

10) Air cleaner case (page 11-19)

11-12

Engine oil

CAUTION

. If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then pull it out. Other-

wise, you may be injured acci-

dentally straining yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine oil consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance

intervals:

. When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

. When engine braking is employed

(repeatedly)

. When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds (for extended periods of

time)

. When the engine is operated under

heavy loads (for extended periods of time)

. When the engine idles for extended

periods of time

. When the vehicle is operated in stop

and go and/or heavy traffic situations

. When the vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions

. When the vehic le accelerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil

more frequently. Different drivers in the

same car may experience different results.

If your oil consumption rate is greater than

expected, contact your authorized

SUBARU retailer who may perform a test

under controlled conditions.

& Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine. If you check the oil level

just after stopping the engine, wait a few

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan before checking the level.

STI

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

– CONTINUED –

11-13

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

Except STI

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

3) Oil filter

CAUTION

If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then pull it out. Otherwise,

you may be injured accidentally

straining yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

STI

1) Notch

2) Full level

3) Low level

4) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

Except STI

1) Full level

2) Low level

3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. STI:

Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil

level is below the low level mark, add oil

so that the full level is reached.

Except STI:

Check the oil levels on both sides of the

level gauge. The engine oil level must be

judged by the lowest of the two levels. If

the oil level is below the low level mark,

add oil so that the full level is reached.

11-14

CAUTION

. For models except STI, be careful

not to touch the engine oil filter

when removing the oil filler cap.

Doing so may result in a burn, a

pinched finger, or may cause

some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

For models STI, just after driving or while

the engine is warm, the engine oil level

reading may be in a range between the

upper level and the notch mark. This is

caused by the rmal expansion of the

engine oil.

NOTE

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do

not add any additional oil above the

upper level when the engine is cold.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained

expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for changing the engine oil and oil filter.

Fully trained mechanics are on standby

at a SUBARU dealer to ut ilize the

special tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also,

used oils are properly disposed of.

. If performing oil replacement your-

self, observe the local regulations and

dispose of waste oil properly.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driv ing in

extremely cold weather.

! Changing the oil filter

It may be difficult to change the oil filter.

Have the oil filter changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

! Changing the oil

1. Warm up the engine by letting the

engine idle for approximately 10 minutes

to ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

STI

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

– CONTINUED –

11-15

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

Except STI

4. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still

warm. The used oil should be drained into

an appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself with

hot engine oil.

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain

plug with a clean cloth and tighten it

securely with a new sealing washer after

the oil has completely drained out.

CAUTION

Thoroughly wipe off any engine oil

that has spilled over the exhaust

pipe and/or under-cover. If spilled oil

is not promptly wiped up, the oil

could cause a fire.

6. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to

“Engine oil” F12-4.

The oil quantity indicated above is only

guideline.

The necessary quantity of oil depends on

the quantity of oil that has been drained.

The quantity of drained oil differs slightly

depending on the temperature of the oil

and the time the oil is left flowing out. After

refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you

must use the level gauge to confirm that

the level is correct.

7. Start the engine and make sure that no

oil leaks appear around the drain plug.

8. Run the engine until it reaches the

normal operating temperature. Then stop

the engine and wait a few minutes to allow

the oil drain back. Check the oil level

again and if necessary, add more engine

oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

11-16

& Synthetic oil

You must follow the oil and filter changing

intervals shown in the Warranty and

Maintenance booklet.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

Cooling system

WARNING

. Never attempt to remove the

radiator cap until the engine has

been shut off and has cooled

down completely. Since the cool-

ant is under pressure, you may

suffer serious burns from a spray

of boiling hot coolant when the

cap is removed.

. Be careful of the rotating cooling

fan when the engine hood is

open. When the engine tempera-

ture is high, the cooling fan in the

engine compartment may oper-

ate when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, even

if the engine is stopped. Touch-

ing the cooling fan while it is

rotating may result in injury.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU Super Coolant that

does not require the first change

for 11 years/137,500 miles (11

years/220,000 km). This coolant

should not be mixed with any

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. Should it be

necessary to top up the coolant

for any reason, use only

SUBARU Super Coolant.

If the SUBARU Super Coolant is

diluted w ith another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Refer to “Temperature gauge”

F3-11.

Maintenance and service/Cooling system

– CONTINUED –

11-17

Maintenance and service/Cooling system

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses” F11-42 and “Fuses and

circuits” F12-10.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling

system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

coolant up to just below the filler neck as

shown in the following illustration.

STI

1) Fill up to this level

Except STI

1) Fill up to this level

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

11-18

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters

intake air but also stops flames if

the engine backfires. If the a ir

cleaner element is not installed

when the engine backfires, you

could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo-

rated or removed, engine wear will be

excessive and engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the air

cleaner element.

& Replacing the air cleaner

element

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-

der extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

! STI

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air

intake duct.

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

– CONTINUED –

11-19

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

1) Connector cable

2) Guides

3) Clips

2. Remove the connector cable from the

guides of the air cleaner case.

3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case cover.

4. Open the air cleaner case and remove

the air cleaner element.

5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

and case cover with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

6. Install the removed or loosened parts

in the reverse order of removal.

! Except STI

1) Clips

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case cover.

11-20

1) Air cleaner case

2) Air cleaner case cover

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the

cover rearward while lifting it up.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

and case cover with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case cover,

insert the projections on the air cleaner

case cover into the slits on the air cleaner

case. The illustration above shows an

example in which the projections are not

fitted into the slits correctly.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

& Recommended spark plugs

For the recommended spark plugs, refer

to “Electrical system” F12-8.

Maintenance and service/Spark plugs

11-21

Maintenance and service/Drive belts

Drive belts

NOTE

For models except STI, it is unneces-

sary to check the deflection of the drive

belt periodically because this engine is

equipped with an automatic belt ten-

sion adjuster. However, replacement of

the belt should be done according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for replace-

ment.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or

worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.

STI

1) Power steering oil pump pulley

2) Front side belt

3) Alternator pulley

4) Air conditioner compressor pulley

5) Rear side belt

6) Crank pulley

A) 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf)

CAUTION

The front side belt, which runs in

conjunction with the following com-

ponents, must be used within the

specified deflection.

. Power steering oil pump pulley

. Alternator pulley

. Crank pulley

Check the deflection of the front

side belt and if there is any loosen-

ess, cracks, wear or unusual noise

on the front side belt, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Continuing to use the vehicle with

the belt outside of the specification

may cause the engine to malfunc-

tion and the above components to

malfunction.

To check the deflection of the front side

belt, place a straightedge (ruler) across

two adjacent pulleys (alternator pulley and

crank pulley) and apply a force of 22 lbf

(98 N, 10 kgf) midway between the pulleys

by using a spring scale. The belt deflec-

tion should be the amount specified. If the

front side belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

in (mm)

Deflection

New belt

Used belt

0.28 – 0.35

(7.0 – 9.0)

0.35 – 0.43

(9.0 – 11.0)

The rear side belt is a stretch-type belt,

therefore the deflection does not need to

be checked. If there are cracks or wear

confirmed on the belts and a squeaking

noise is heard from them, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

11-22

Manual transmission oil

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion oil level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

oil inspection should be performed ac-

cording to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual tr ansmission , front differential

and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.

Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion fluid level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

fluid inspec tion should be performed

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for

details.

Front differential gear oil

(CVT models) and rear differ-

ential gear oil

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands t ogether. For details, refer to

“Manual transmission, front differential

and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause a

decline in vehicle performance.

Maintenance and service/Manual transmission oil

11-23

Maintenance and service/Power steering fluid (STI)

Power steering fluid (STI)

& Checking the fluid level

The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level

differs according to fluid temperature.

Therefore, t he reservoir tank has two

different checking ranges for hot and cold

fluids.

Check the power steering fluid level

monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,

and stop the engine.

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank.

When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has

been run: Check that the oil level is

between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on

the surface of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is

run: Check that the oil level is between

“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the

surface of the reservoir tank.

3. If the fluid level is lower than the

applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-

mended fluid as necessary to bring the

level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extremely low, it may

indicate possible leakage. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself

because the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION

. When power steering fluid is

being added, use only clean fluid,

and be careful not to allow any

dirt into the tank. And never use

different brands together.

. Be careful not to spill power

steering fluid when adding it. If

power steering fluid touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, an d/or a fire. If

power steering fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

& Recommended fluid

Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.

11-24

Brake fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

1) “MAX” level line

2) The brake fluid level must be checked in

this area.

3) “MIN” level line

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the brake system

at the front part of the reservoir (shaded

area in the illustration). If the fluid level is

below “MIN”, add the recommended brake

fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended brake fluid

Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Maintenance and service/Brake fluid

11-25

Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)

Clutch fluid (MT models)

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, w hen performing this

work, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

CAUTION

. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause improper clutch

operation.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

. When clutch fluid is added, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

. Never splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

. The fluid level for the clutch

system must be checked at the

inboard side of the reservoir. It

cannot be checked at the out-

board side of the reservoir.

1) “MAX” level line

2) The clutch fluid level must be checked in

this area.

3) “MIN” level line

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the clutch system

at the inboard side of the reservoir

(shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid

level is below “MIN”,addtherecom-

mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended clutch fluid

Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of clutch

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

11-26

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal should move

slightly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for

approximately one minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake

booster operates properly if the pedal

stroke decreases with each depression.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, you might feel

that lighter depression of the brake

pedal generat es a greater braking

force. However, even though these

occur, they do not indicate any mal-

functions, and the brake assist system

is operating properly.

Brake assist is not a system that brings

more braking ability to the vehicle

beyond its breaking capability.

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedal

free play

1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the

brake pedal up with one finger to check

the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf

(10 N, 1 kgf).

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Maintenance and service/Brake booster

– CONTINUED –

11-27

Maintenance and service/Clutch pedal (MT models)

& Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

Clutch pedal (MT models)

Check the clutch pedal free play according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-

gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch

pedal is depressed, and that shifting into

1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check that the e ngine a nd

transmission smoothly couple without

any sign of slippage.

& Checking the clutch pedal

free play

1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)

Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and

check the free play.

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

11-28

Hill start assist system

Ensure that the Hill start assist system

operates properly under the following

circumstances.

1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by

depressing the brake pedal (all models)

and clutch pedal (MT models only), with

the engine running.

2. Make sure that the vehicle does not

move backward for several seconds after

the brake pedal is released.

3. Then make sure the vehicle starts

climbing the grade by following the normal

starting procedures.

If the Hill start assist system does not

operate as described above, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

The disc brakes have audible wear

indicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

. It is recommended that you dis-

connect the vehicle battery be-

fore replacing the brake pad.

However, it is dangerous to dis-

connect the vehicle battery. We

recommend that you have your

SUBARU dealer replace the

brake pad.

. If you continue to drive despite

the scraping noise from the audi-

ble brake pad wear indicator, it

will result in the need for costly

brake rotor repair or replace-

ment.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads (models with electronic

parking brake system)

When replacing the brake pad, use only

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-

ment, the new parts must be broken in as

follows.

! Brake pad

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times. Also, apply and release the electro-

nic parking brake five or more times.

Maintenance and service/Hill start assist system

– CONTINUED –

11-29

Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke (models without electronic parking brake system)

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings (models

without electronic parking

brake system)

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After

replacement, the new parts must be

broken in as follows.

! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times.

! Parking brake lining

1.Drivethevehicleataspeedof

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever

SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a

force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,

15.3 kgf]).

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately

220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)

WARNING

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pulling the parking brake lever too

forcefully may cause the rear

wheels to lock. To avoid this, be

certain to pull the lever up slowly

and gently.

Parking brake stroke (models

without electronic parking

brake system)

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

When the parking brake is properly

adjusted, braking power is fully applied

by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches

gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200

N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever

stroke is not within the specified range,

have the brake system checked and

adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

11-30

Tires and wheels

& Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-

covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may

not react immediately to a sudden drop in

tire pressure (for example, a blow-out

caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on the

tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an

extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: 245/40R18 97W

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

308F(−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F(−128C) 38 (260, 2.6) 37 (255, 2.55)

−108F(−238C) 40 (275, 2.75)

39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not turn off,

the tire pressure monitoring system may

not be functioning normally. In this event,

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

– CONTINUED –

11-31

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

go to a SUBARU dealer to have the

system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by

an increase in the outside air temperature

or by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a

switch to snow tires) and new TPMS

valves are installed on the newly fitted

wheels. Have this work performed by a

SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-

ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

on the combination meter will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring Syst em checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a ti re may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

ill uminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

11-32

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on

other rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and

approach the curbs as squarely as

possible. Also, make sure the tires are

not pressed against the curb when you

park the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the

vehicle in a straight line, one of the

tires and/or wheels may be damaged.

Drive slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Tire placard

Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust

the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the

vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to

increase. Be careful not to mistakenly

release air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm

) when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

three hours or has been driven less

than one mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result

in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

– CONTINUED –

11-33

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

. Correct tire pressure (tread worn

evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so

fuel consumption is also lower.

. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road-surface

bumps and dips, possibly resulting in

vehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures for

the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the

tire pressures to the values that match

current loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

11-34

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes

the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not

correctly balanced, have them checked

and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire repairs

and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignment

causes the tires to wear on one side

and reduces the vehicle’s running

stability. Contact your SUBARU

dealer if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is designed to

hold each wheel at a certain alignment

(relative to the other wheels and to the

road) for optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

& Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible when

the depth of the tread grooves decreases

to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be

replaced when the tread wear indicator

appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn

beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With

a tire in this condition, driving at

high speeds in wet weather can

cause the veh icle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control

can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

– CONTINUED –

11-35

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

& Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front

If the tire has the rotation direction

specification, the tire rotation direction

mark is placed on its sidewall.

When you install a tire that has the tire

rotation direction mark, install the tire with

the direction mark facing forward.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-

tional tires

1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel.

Move the tires to the positions shown in

the illustration each time they are rotated.

For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tires at the time of rotation. After tire

rotation, adjust the tires pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

& Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design;

they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The

tires fit ted as standard eq uipment are

optimally matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and were selected to give

the best possible combination of running

performance, ride comfort, and service

life. It is essential for every tire to have a

size and construction matching those

shown on the tire placard and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

11-36

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’sground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at

the same time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), there is a possi-

bility that it may lead to serious

mechanical damage to the drive

train of your car and affect the

following factors.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can danger ously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to

change a flat tire, always check the

tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-

ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km).

If any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

11-37

Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels

Aluminum wheels

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and

damaged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change

a flat tire, always check the tightness of

the wheel nuts after driving approximately

600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for aluminum wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

When there is only a small amount of

washer flui d remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning indicator will illumi-

nate. When this occurs, refill the washer

fluid as follows.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add windshield w asher fluid until it

reaches the “FULL” mark on the tank. If

windshield washer fluid is unavailable use

clean water.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

11-38

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30%

10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

thepipingistoolowfortheoutside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the

outer surface of the windshield (or rear

window) and the wiper blades using a

sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when you rinse

the windshield with water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause de terioration of the

wiper blades.

. When you wish to raise the

passenger-side wiper arm, first

raise the driver-side wiper arm.

Otherwise, the passenger-s ide

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

– CONTINUED –

11-39

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its original position.

Otherwise, the passenger-side

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

. While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not

return the wiper arms to the

original positions. Otherwise,

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

. When returning the raised wiper

arms to the original positions,

carefully return the wiper arms

on the windshield by hand. You

should not return the wiper arms

to the windshield only by the

return spring. Otherwise, the wi-

per arms may be deformed and/

or the windshield surface may be

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

1) Stopper

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

holding its pivot area and pushing it in the

direction shown by the arrow while de-

pressing the wiper blade stopper.

3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

& Windshield wiper blade rub-

ber

1) Metal support

1. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the

metal support.

11-40

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

3. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slide

the blade rubber assembly into the metal

support until it locks.

1) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the metal support between the

stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the

rubber is not retained properly, the wiper

blade may scratch the windshield.

Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when work-

ing near any battery. Never lean

over a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

Maintenance and service/Battery

– CONTINUED –

11-41

Maintenance and service/Fuses

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the bat tery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer.

Wash hands after handling

1) Cap

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

11-42

1) Spare fuses

The other one (main fuse box) is housed

in the engine compartment. Also, the

spare fuses are stored in the fuse box

cover.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”

F12-10.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Maintenance and service/Fuses

11-43

Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

Replacing bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

. Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage.

Using a bulb of different wattage

could result in a fire. For the

specified wattage of each bulb,

refer to “Bulb chart” F12-16.

. Do not touch the glass portion of

the light bulb with bare hands.

When holding the glass portion

is unavoidable, hold it using with

a clean dry cloth to avoid getting

moisture and grease on the bulb.

If there is any fingerprints or

grease on the bulb surface, wipe

them away with a s oft cloth

moistened with alcohol. Also, if

the bulb is scratched or dropped,

it may blow out or crack.

& Headlights (models with LED

headlights)

The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.

Have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& High beam headlight

NOTE

. If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

. It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Perform the following steps to replace the

bulbs.

11-44

Left-hand side

1. Left-hand side: Use a screwdriver to

remove the secured clip of the washer

tank. To make it easy to access the bulb,

turn the neck of the washer fluid filler pipe

as illustrated.

Right-hand side

Right-hand side: Use a screwdriver to

undo the clips on the air intake duct, then

remove the air intake duct.

2. Disconnect the electr ical connector

from the bulb as pushing the tab.

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

3. Left-hand side: Remove the bulb

from the headlight assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

Right-hand side: Remove the bulb from

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

– CONTINUED –

11-45

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

the headlight assembly by turning it clock-

wise.

4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this

time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

5. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it to the reverse direction

until it clicks.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Left-hand side: Set the washer fluid

filler pipe to the original place and secure it

by clip.

Right-hand side: Install the air intake

duct with clips.

& Low beam headlight (models

without LED headlights),

front side marker light (if

equipped), parking light

(models without LED head-

lights) and front turn signal

light

NOTE

. If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

. It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

1. Start the engine and turn the steering

wheel fully in the opposite direction of the

bulb to be replaced.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Remove the clips from the mud guard.

4. Pull off the mud guard.

! Low beam headlight

1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb as pushing the tab.

11-46

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb with a new one. At

this time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

4. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

5. Reconnect the electrical connector.

6. Reattach the mud guard.

! Front side marker light, parking

light and front turn signal light

1) Front side marker light

2) Parking light

3) Front turn signal light

1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and

pull it out.

2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and

replace the bulb with a new one.

3. After replacing the bulb, reattach the

mud guard.

& Front fog light (if equipped)

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

– CONTINUED –

11-47

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

1. Remove the clips.

2. Turn over the mud guard.

3. Disconnect the electr ical connector

from the bulb as pushing the tab.

4. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-

clockwise.

5. Replace the bulb with a new one.

6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the

mud guard.

& Rear combination lights

1. Remove the clips from the trunk trim

with a flat-head screwdriver.

11-48

2. Open the rear portion of the trunk trim

panel as illustrated.

NOTE

Make sure that the “* ” part of the trunk

trim in the illustration does not contact

the trunk lid stay. If the “

*” part is bent,

the trunk trim may be torn.

1) Rear side marker light

2) Backup light

3) Rear turn signal light

3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

5. Set the bulb socket into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with

the clips.

NOTE

When replacing a bulb of the rear side

marker light, detach the bulb socket of

the backup light in advance. Af ter

replacing the bulb, first attach the side

marker light, and then attach the back-

up light.

& License plate light

1. Open the trunk and remove the clips

from the trunk lid trim with a flat-head

screwdriver.

2. Turn over the trunk lid trim.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. Install a new bulb.

6. Reinstall the bulb socket and the trunk

lid trim.

& Other bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

11-49

Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

Replacing battery

The access key / transmitter battery may

be discharged under the following condi-

tions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable

. The transmitter does not operate prop-

erly when used within the standard dis-

tance

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key/transmitter

when replacing battery.

. Be careful not to touch or da-

mage the printed circuit board in

the access key/transmitter when

replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

. Do not expose batteries to ex-

cessive heat such as bright sun-

light, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according

to local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals. It

may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

should be replaced by a SUBARU

dealer.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the access key/transmitter func-

tions properly.

& Replacing battery of access

key

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the

access key cover, make sure that

the plastic part does not come off or

become misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032

1) Release button

2) Mechanical key

1. Take out the mechanical key.

11-50

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to

remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key by

fitting the projections and recesses to-

gether.

& Replacing transmitter battery

1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

– CONTINUED –

11-51

Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a new

battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-

ing sure to install the new battery with the

negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “

” or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

11-52

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2

Engine ............................................................... 12-3

Fuel ................................................................... 12-3

Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4

Manual transmission, front differential and rear

differential gear oil ........................................... 12-6

Fluids ................................................................ 12-7

Engine coolant ................................................... 12-7

Electrical system................................................ 12-8

Tires .................................................................. 12-8

Temporary spare tires ........................................ 12-8

Brake disc ......................................................... 12-9

Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ................................................. 12-10

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ................................................. 12-12

Bulb chart......................................................... 12-16

Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-18

Specifications

Specifications/Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

in (mm)

Item STI Except STI

Overall length 180.9 (4,595)

Overall width 70.7 (1,795)

Overall height

58.1 (1,475)

Wheel base 104.3 (2,650)

Tread

Front 60.2 (1,530)

Rear 60.6 (1,540)

Ground clearance

4.9 (125)

12-2

& Engine

Model

STI Except STI

Engine model

EJ25

(2.5 L, DOHC, turbo)

FA20

(2.0 L, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke petrol engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 150 (2,457) 122 (1,998)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0) 3.39 6 3.39 (86.0 6 86.0)

Compression ratio 8.2 : 1 10.6 : 1

Firing order

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

& Fuel

NOTE

The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline.

Model Fuel Fuel tank capacity

STI

93 AKI (98 RON) or higher*

15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Except STI

91 AKI (95 RON) or higher*

*1: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be

used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability.

*2: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

may be used.

Specifications/Specifications

– CONTINUED –

12-3

Specifications/Specifications

& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-13.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended

that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

12-4

! Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

. Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on

the temperature and other factors.

. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower

viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the

engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.

. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SN with the

words “RESOURCE CONSER-

VING”

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-5, which can be identi-

fied with the ILSAC certification

mark (Starburst mark)

5W-30 synthetic oil is the required oil

for optimum engine performance and

protection. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-40 conventional oil may be used if

replenishment is needed but should be

changed to 5W-30 synthetic oil at the

next oil change.

STI:

· Adding the oil from L to F level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

· Changing the oil and oil filter:

4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)

· Changing the oil:

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Except STI:

· Adding the oil from L to F level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

· Changing the oil and oil filter:

5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)

· Changing the oil:

5.2 US qt (4.9 liters, 4.3 Imp qt)

Specifications/Specifications

– CONTINUED –

12-5

Specifications/Specifications

& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil

Oil Manual transmission oil

Front differential gear oil (CVT

models)

Rear differential gear oil

Oil

grade

STI

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)*

—

API classification GL-5

Except STI

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)*

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)

SAE viscosity No.

and applicable tem-

perature

——

. 75W-90*

. 90

*: recommended

Oil ca-

pacity*

STI 4.3 US qt (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt) — 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

Except STI 3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt) 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Manual transmission oil” F11-23

“Front differential gear oil (CVT

models) and rear differential

gear oil” F11-23

“Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear

differential gear oil” F11-23

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.

*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.

12-6

& Fluids

Fluid

Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models)

Consult your SUBARU dealer. 13.1 US qt (12.4 liters, 10.9 Imp qt)

“Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid” F11-23

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

–“Brake fluid” F11-25

Clutch fluid (MT models)

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

–

“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-

Power steering fluid (STI)

· SUBARU ATF

· “Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid

· IDEMITSU ATF HP

0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)

“Power steering fluid (STI)”

F11-24

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

& Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type

STI 8.2 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)

SUBARU Super Coolant

Except STI

MT models 8.7 US qt (8.2 liters, 7.2 Imp qt)

CVT models

8.9 US qt (8.4 liters, 7.4 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-17.

Specifications/Specifications

– CONTINUED –

12-7

Specifications/Specifications

& Electrical system

Battery type 55D23L

Alternator

STI 12V-110A

Except STI 12V-130A

Spark plugs

STI SILFR6A (NGK)

Except STI

ILKAR8H6 (NGK)

& Tires

Tire size 235/45R17 94W 245/40R18 97W

Wheel size

17 6 8J 18 6 8 1/2J

Pressure Front

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel

nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening

procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-4.

& Temporary spare tires

Temporary spare tire size T145/70D17 205/50R17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure

(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel

nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.

*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-4.

12-8

& Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.

Specifications/Specifications

12-9

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 20A

(Not available)

2 7.5A

. Combination meter

3 15A

. Door locking

4 10A

. Front wiper deicer relay

5 Empty

6 7.5A

. Remote control rear

view mirrors

. Seat heater relay

7 10A

. Combination meter

. Integrated unit

8 7.5A

. Stop light

9 7.5A

. Front wiper deicer

10 7.5A

. Power supply (battery)

11 7.5A

. Turn signal unit

12 15A

. Transmission control

unit

. Engine control unit

. Integrated unit

13 20A

. Accessory power outlet

(center console)

14 10A

. Parking light

. Tail light

. Rear combination light

12-10

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

15 10A

. Trunk light

. Keyless unit

16 7.5A

. Illumination

17 15A

. Seat heaters

18 10A

. Backup light

19 –

. Daytime running lights

20 10A

. Accessory power outlet

(instrument panel)

21 7.5A

. Starter relay

22 10A

. Air conditioner

. Rear window defogger

relay coil

23 Empty

24 10A

. Audio unit

. Navigation system (if

equipped)

25 15A

. SRS airbag system

26 7.5A

. Power window relay

. Radiator main fan relay

27 15A

. Blower fan

28 15A

. Blower fan

29 15A

. Fog light

30 Empty

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

31 7.5A

. Auto air conditioner unit

. Integrated unit

32 7.5A

. Clutch switch

. Steering lock control

unit

33 7.5A

. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol unit

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

– CONTINUED –

12-11

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

! STI

A) Main fuse

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 30A

. ABS unit

. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol unit

2 25A

. Main fan (cooling fan)

3 25A

. Sub fan (cooling fan)

Empty

25A

. Audio

30A

. Headlight (low beam)

15A

. Headlight (high beam)

8 20A

. Back-up

9 15A

. Horn

10 25A

. Rear window defogger

. Mirror heater

11 15A

. Fuel pump

12 10A

. Transmission control

unit

13 7.5A

. Engine control unit

14 15A

. Turn and hazard warn-

ing flasher

15 15A

. Tail and illumination re-

lay

16 7.5A

. Alternator

12-12

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

17 Empty

18 20A

. Injection

19 15A

. Headlight (low beam –

right hand)

20 15A

. Headlight (low beam –

left hand)

21 10A

. Secondary air combina-

tion valve

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

– CONTINUED –

12-13

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

! Except STI

A) Main fuse

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 30A

. ABS unit

. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol unit

2 25A

. Main fan (cooling fan)

3 25A

. Sub fan (cooling fan)

Empty

25A

. Audio

30A

. Headlight (low beam)

15A

. Headlight (high beam)

8 20A

. Back-up

9 15A

. Horn

10 25A

. Rear window defogger

. Mirror heater

11 15A

. Fuel pump

12 20A

. Transmission control

unit

13 7.5A

. Engine control unit

14 15A

. Turn and hazard warn-

ing flasher

15 15A

. Tail and illumination re-

lay

16 7.5A

. Alternator

12-14

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

17 Empty

18 20A

. Injection

19 15A

. Headlight (low beam –

right hand)

20 15A

. Headlight (low beam –

left hand)

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

12-15

Specifications/Bulb chart

Bulb chart

NOTE

Lights A, B and C are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

12-16

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3

2) Low beam headlight (models without LED headlights) 12V-55W H11

3) Parking light (models without LED headlights) 12V-5W W5W

4) Map light

12V-8W –

5) Dome light 12V-8W –

6) License plate light 12V-5W W5W

Trunk light 12V-5W W5W

Rear side marker light 12V-5W W5W

Backup light 12V-16W W16W

10)

Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W

11)

Vanity mirror light 12V-2W –

12)

Front side marker light (if equipped) 12V-5W W5W

13)

Front fog light (models without steering responsive fog

lights system)

12V-19W H16

Front fog light (models with steering responsive fog

lights system)

12V-55W H11

14)

Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W

Low beam headlight (models with LED headlights) ––

Parking light (models with LED headlights) ––

Side turn signal light (if equipped) ––

High-mounted stop light ––

Stop light/Tail light –

–

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

Specifications/Bulb chart

12-17

Specifications/Vehicle identification

Vehicle identification

1) Vehicle identification number (under the

floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)

2) Emission control label

3) Tire inflation pressure label

4) Certification label

5) Vehicle identification number plate

6) Model number label

7) Fuel label

8) Air conditioner label

12-18

For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2

Tire information .................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4

Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5

Tire care – maintenance and safety

practices........................................................ 13-10

Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities .............................................. 13-13

Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-14

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-14

Uniform tire quality gr ading standards .......... 13-15

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-15

Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-15

Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-16

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.

For U.S.A.

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Tire information

& Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These markings

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating De-

scriptions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

13-2

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs

(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580

kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original c ondition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review

of the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufact urer ’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

! Other markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “300 kPa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-3

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg

(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cord

material u sed in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-

WALL 2 POLYESTER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading standards” F13-15

& Recommended tire inflation

pressure

! Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure

For recommended cold tire inflation

pressure for your vehicle’s tires,

refer to “Tires” F12-8

! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

13-4

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected

by the outside temperature. It is

best to check tire pressure out-

doors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-5

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has

a particular side that must al-

ways face outward when mount-

ing on a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

13-6

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special

trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim widt h

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or

protective bands.

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber com-

pound from the cord material in

the sidewall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes

into contact with the road.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-7

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separ ation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

. Vehicle maximum load on the

tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is ap-

pended to the end of this section)

and dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

13-8

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-9

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’streadwear

indicator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehiclecontrolcanleadtoan

accident.

. Replace any damaged or un-

evenly worn tires at the time of

rotation. For information about the

tire rotation order, r efer to “Tire

rotation” F11-36

. After tire rotation,

adjust the tire pressures and make

sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened. For information about

the tightening torque and tighten-

ing sequence for the wheel nuts,

refer to “Flat tires” F9-4

& Vehicle load limit – how to

determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the

statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle’s placard.

Thevehicleplacardalsoshows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a roof rack or bike carrier, etc.

Therefore cargo capacity can be

calculated by the following method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment)

For information about vehicle load-

ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”

F8-10

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither de-

signed nor intended to be

used for trailer towing. There-

fore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.

13-10

! Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 900 lbs or

408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to two), the calcula-

tions are as follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-11

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

CAUTION

Yourvehicleisneitherde-

signed nor intended to be

used for trailer towing. There-

fore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a

trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).

10% of the trailer weight is applied

to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue

load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

13-12

Example 2B

CAUTION

Yourvehicleisneitherde-

signed nor intended to be

used for trailer towing. There-

fore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’smaximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label affixed to

the driver’s door.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-13

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and

on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle

handli ng, stopping distance, and

vehicle and tire performance in the

following ways. This could lead to

an accident and possibly result in

severe personal injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other body parts could break or

experience accelerated wear that

will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150

lb passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

13-14

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. Howe ver, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplan-

ing, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

& Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards

– CONTINUED –

13-15

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or ex-

cessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possi-

ble tire failure.

Reporting safety defects

(U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehi-

cles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Subaru of

America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,

you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200

New Jersey Avenue, SE, West

Building, Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

13-16

Index

14-2 Index

Abbreviation ................................................................... 3

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-36

Warning light ......................................................... 3-20

Access key ................................................................. 2-9

Warning light ................................................. 3-28, 3-29

Accessories.............................................................. 11-44

Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-8

Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-19

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control .......................................... 4-5

Manual climate control.............................................. 4-6

Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-6

Alarm system ............................................................ 2-25

All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-25

Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-38

Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3

Antenna

Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ............................... 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-36

Arming the system ..................................................... 2-27

Ashtray..................................................................... 6-10

AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-18

Audio

aha

by HARMAN................................................ 5-43

AM/FM radio ......................................................... 5-27

Antenna system....................................................... 5-2

AUX..................................................................... 5-60

Base display audio set.............................................. 5-3

Basic operation...................................................... 5-17

Bluetooth audio...................................................... 5-57

CD ....................................................................... 5-52

iPod...................................................................... 5-55

Pandora

.............................................................. 5-49

SiriusXM Satellite Radio .......................................... 5-36

STARLINK

7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set................ 5-5

Steering switches for audio...................................... 5-62

SUBARU STARLINK............................................... 5-25

Unit setting ............................................................ 5-18

USB memory ......................................................... 5-54

Auto-dimming mirror/compass .......................... 3-106, 3-107

Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................... 3-101

Warning light.......................................................... 3-35

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ................................................ 1-13

Automatic transmission

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-18

Battery .................................................................... 11-41

Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-7

Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9

Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-50

Replacement (keyless access with push-button

start system) .............................................. 2-18, 11-50

Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .... 2-24, 11-51

Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-51

Bluetooth

Audio .................................................................... 5-57

Hands-free phone system........................................ 5-70

Bluetooth

settings ..................................................... 5-65

Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device .................. 5-65

Setting Bluetooth details ......................................... 5-68

Booster seat.............................................................. 1-28

Bottle holder................................................................ 6-7

Brake

Assist ................................................................... 7-35

Booster........................................................ 7-35, 11-27

Disc ..................................................................... 12-9

Fluid............................................................ 11-25, 12-7

Pad and lining ...................................................... 11-30

Parking........................................................ 7-44, 11-30

Pedal .................................................................. 11-27

System ................................................................. 7-35

Brake pedal

Free play ............................................................. 11-27

Reserve distance .................................................. 11-28

Brake system ............................................................ 7-35

Warning light ......................................................... 3-21

Braking..................................................................... 7-34

Tips ...................................................................... 7-34

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-30

BSD/RCTA................................................................ 7-55

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer.... 7-59

BSD/RCTA OFF switch........................................... 7-62

BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................... 7-61

Bulb

Chart.................................................................. 12-16

Replacing............................................................. 11-44

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3

Center

Console ................................................................. 6-5

Changing

Coolant ............................................................... 11-19

Flat tire .................................................................. 9-4

Oil and oil filter..................................................... 11-15

Charge warning light ................................................... 3-17

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light ....................................................................... 3-16

Checking

Brake pedal free play............................................ 11-27

Brake pedal reserve distance................................. 11-28

Clutch function ..................................................... 11-28

Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-28

Coolant level........................................................ 11-18

Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-25

Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-26

Fluid level (power steering fluid) ............................. 11-24

Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-38

Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-13

Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-21

Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-28

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ............................ 1-25

Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-29

Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-32

Child safety ................................................................... 4

Locks....................................................................

2-32

Chime

Key........................................................................ 3-5

Light ..................................................................... 3-96

Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14

Index 14-3

14-4 Index

Cigarette lighter ........................................................... 6-9

Cleaning

Aluminum wheels................................................... 10-3

Interior.................................................................. 10-5

Ventilation grille ....................................................... 4-9

Climate control system ................................................. 4-3

Automatic................................................................ 4-5

Manual ................................................................... 4-6

Clock........................................................ 3-49, 3-64, 3-78

Clutch

Fluid............................................................ 11-26, 12-7

Pedal .................................................................. 11-28

Coat hook ................................................................. 6-11

Compass ....................................................... 3-106, 3-107

Console ...................................................................... 6-5

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-24

Fluid.................................................................... 11-23

Coolant............................................................ 11-18, 12-7

Cooling system ......................................................... 11-17

Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4

Cruise control ............................................................ 7-52

Indicator light......................................................... 3-35

Set indicator light ........................................... 3-35, 7-52

Cup holder .................................................................. 6-6

Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-6

Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-7

Daytime running light system....................................... 3-99

Defogger.................................................................. 3-114

Defrosting ................................................................... 4-9

Deicer ..................................................................... 3-114

Differential gear oil

Front........................................................... 11-23, 12-6

Rear ........................................................... 11-23, 12-6

Dimensions................................................................ 12-2

Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-29

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-35

Dome light .................................................................. 6-2

Door

Locks..................................................................... 2-5

Open warning light.................................................. 3-25

Double trip meter......................................................... 3-9

Drive belts ............................................................... 11-22

Driver’s Control Center Differential................................ 7-19

Auto indicator light.................................................. 3-35

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-36

Driving

All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-25

AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-5

Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7

Drinking..................................................................... 6

Drugs........................................................................

Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4

Pets.......................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads ............................................... 8-8

Tips ................................................. 7-19, 7-29, 8-2, 8-5

Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 6

Winter .................................................................... 8-6

ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-12

Electrical system........................................................ 12-8

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system........................................................... 3-22, 7-37

Electronic parking brake.............................................. 7-44

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal......... 7-46

Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-46

Warning ........................................................ 3-22, 7-48

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-13

Engine

Compartment overview .......................................... 11-11

Coolant........................................................ 11-18, 12-7

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 5, 8-2

Hood .................................................................... 11-9

Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-17

Oil............................................................... 11-13, 12-4

Overheating .......................................................... 9-11

Starting & stopping........................................... 7-9, 7-12

Event data recorder......................................................... 8

Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2

Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-4

Floor mat .................................................................. 6-10

Fluid level

Brake .................................................................. 11-25

Clutch.................................................................. 11-26

Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-23

Power steering ..................................................... 11-24

Fog light ................................................................. 3-101

Bulb .......................................................... 11-47, 12-16

Indicator light......................................................... 3-35

Switch................................................................. 3-101

Front

Differential gear oil........................................ 11-23, 12-6

Fog light.................................................... 3-101, 11-47

Fog light indicator light ............................................ 3-35

Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-17

Front fog light........................................................... 3-101

Switch................................................................. 3-101

Front seats ................................................................. 1-2

Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-4

Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-5

Power seat ............................................................. 1-5

Reclining ................................................................ 1-4

Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3

Consumption indicator..................................... 3-53, 3-56

Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2

Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-5

Gauge................................................................... 3-10

Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3

Fuses ..................................................................... 11-42

Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)...............................

8-12

Glove box................................................................... 6-5

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-12

Hands-free phone system............................................ 5-70

Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8, 9-2

Index 14-5

14-6 Index

Head restraint adjustment

Front seat ............................................................... 1-5

Rear seat................................................................ 1-8

Headlight

Beam leveler ....................................................... 3-101

Bulb replacement .................................................. 11-44

Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-44

Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-16

Control switch........................................................ 3-96

Flasher ................................................................. 3-98

Indicator light......................................................... 3-35

HID headlights.......................................................... 11-44

High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-35

High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-98

Hill Holder ................................................................. 7-46

Indicator light................................................. 3-24, 7-47

Switch .................................................................. 7-47

Hill start assist .................................................. 7-49, 11-29

OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-24

To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-50

Warning light ......................................................... 3-24

HomeLink

.............................................................. 3-107

Hook

Coat ..................................................................... 6-11

Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-12

Horn........................................................................ 3-116

Hose and connections ............................................... 11-17

Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-4

Light....................................................................... 3-6

Illumination brightness control .................................... 3-100

Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-3

Indicator light (security indicator light)........................ 3-33

Indicator light

BSD/RCTA OFF ..................................................... 3-37

BSD/RCTA warning ................................................ 3-37

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-35

Cruise control set ................................................... 3-35

Front fog light......................................................... 3-35

Headlight............................................................... 3-35

High beam............................................................. 3-35

Hill Holder ............................................................. 3-24

Hill start assist OFF ................................................ 3-24

Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-33

REV...................................................................... 3-37

Security................................................................. 3-33

Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-34

Shift-up ................................................................. 3-34

SI-DRIVE .............................................................. 3-34

Steering responsive fog lights OFF ........................... 3-37

Traction control OFF ............................................... 3-27

Turn signal ............................................................ 3-35

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-27

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-26

Inside mirror ............................................................ 3-105

Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2

Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-37

Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-4

Jump starting .............................................................. 9-9

Key............................................................................ 2-3

Number .................................................................. 2-3

Reminder chime....................................................... 3-5

Replacement ........................................................... 2-4

Keyless access entry function...................................... 2-13

Keyless access with push-button start system ................. 2-9

Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-16

Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-13

Opening trunk lid ................................................... 2-15

Warning chimes and warning light .................... 2-16, 3-28

When access key does not operate

properly ....................................... 2-18, 3-8, 7-14, 9-16

Lap belt pretensioner.................................................. 1-19

Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5

License plate light ..................................................... 11-49

Light

Control switch........................................................ 3-96

Daytime running..................................................... 3-99

Dome ..................................................................... 6-2

Front fog.................................................... 3-101, 11-47

Front position .............................................. 3-97, 3-101

Front side marker................................................. 12-16

Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-6

License plate........................................................ 11-49

Map ....................................................................... 6-2

Rear combination.................................................. 11-48

Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-48

Stop light ............................................................. 11-48

Tail light............................................................... 11-48

Turn signal .................................................. 3-99, 11-48

Limited slip differential (LSD)........................................ 7-33

Loading your vehicle................................................... 8-10

Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-24

Low tire pressure warning light ..................................... 3-19

Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-29

LSD (Limited slip differential)........................................ 7-33

Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3

Schedule ............................................................... 11-3

Seatbelt................................................................. 1-16

Tips ...................................................................... 11-6

Tools...................................................................... 9-3

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-16

Manual

Climate control .................................................. 4-5, 4-6

Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................. 7-26

Seat....................................................................... 1-4

Transmission ......................................................... 7-17

Transmission oil ........................................... 11-23, 12-6

Map light .................................................................... 6-2

Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-8

Mirror defogger ........................................................ 3-114

Mirrors .................................................................... 3-105

Moonroof........................................................... 2-39, 9-18

Multi

function display................................................... 3-49

Index 14-7

14-8 Index

New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2

Odometer.................................................................... 3-9

Oil filter.................................................................... 11-15

Oil level

Engine................................................................. 11-13

Front differential gear ............................................ 11-23

Manual transmission.............................................. 11-23

Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-23

Warning light ......................................................... 3-17

Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-17

Outside

Mirror defogger ..................................................... 3-114

Mirrors................................................................. 3-113

Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-54

Overheating engine .................................................... 9-11

Parking

Brake ................................................................... 7-44

Brake stroke......................................................... 11-30

Tips ...................................................................... 7-48

Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4

Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3

PIN Code Access ...................................................... 2-19

Power

Door locking switch .................................................. 2-8

Outlets .................................................................... 6-8

Outside mirrors ........................................... 3-113, 3-114

Seat....................................................................... 1-5

Steering ................................................................ 7-33

Steering fluid................................................ 11-24, 12-7

Steering warning light.............................................. 3-25

Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-21, 1-61

Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8

Push-button

Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6

Starting and stopping engine............................. 7-9, 7-12

Rear

Combination lights ................................................ 11-48

Differential gear oil........................................ 11-23, 12-6

Limited slip differential............................................. 7-33

Turn signal light.................................................... 11-48

Rear differential

Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-18

Rear seat ................................................................... 1-7

Folding down .......................................................... 1-9

Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-8

Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-12

How to adjust the rear view image............................ 5-24

Rear window

Defogger ............................................................. 3-114

Recommended

Brake fluid ............................................................. 12-7

Clutch fluid .................................................. 11-26, 12-7

Engine oil .............................................................. 12-4

Front differential gear oil.......................................... 12-6

Manual

transmission oil ........................................... 12-6

Power steering fluid................................................ 12-7

Rear differential gear oil.......................................... 12-6

Spark plugs........................................................... 12-8

Refueling .................................................................... 7-5

Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-15

Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-21

Replacement

Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-29

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-39

Replacing

Access key battery................................................ 11-50

Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-19

Battery (keyless access with push-button start

system)...................................................... 2-18, 11-50

Battery (remote keyless entry system) ............. 2-24, 11-51

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)......... 2-24

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery.................. 11-51

Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-44, 12-16

Front fog light ....................................................... 11-47

Headlight ............................................................. 11-44

License plate light ................................................. 11-49

Rear combination light ........................................... 11-48

Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-48

Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-48

Stop light ............................................................. 11-48

Tail light ............................................................... 11-48

REV indicator light and buzzer..................................... 3-12

Reverse Automatic Braking System.............................. 7-64

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-10

Safety

Precautions when driving............................................. 4

Symbol...................................................................... 2

Warnings ................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric ................................................................... 10-5

Front...................................................................... 1-2

Heater.................................................................... 1-6

Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4

Power .................................................................... 1-5

Rear ...................................................................... 1-7

Seatbelt................................................................. 4, 1-11

Fastening .............................................................. 1-13

Maintenance .......................................................... 1-16

Pretensioners......................................................... 1-17

Safety tips ............................................................. 1-11

Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-14

Security

Alarm system ......................................................... 2-25

Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-33

Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-31

Select lever

Position indicator .................................................... 3-34

Shift lock function ................................................... 7-28

Shift-up

indicator light.................................................. 3-34

Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-31

Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-17

SI-DRIVE

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-34

Index 14-9

14-10 Index

SI-DRIVE mode ......................................................... 7-29

Snow tires......................................................... 8-9, 11-31

Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-8

Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-23

Spark plugs...................................................... 11-21, 12-8

Specifications ............................................................ 12-2

Speedometer............................................................... 3-9

SRS

Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-50

Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-38

Side airbag ........................................................... 1-50

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-33

SRS airbag system

Monitors................................................................ 1-59

Servicing ............................................................... 1-60

Warning light ......................................................... 3-15

Starting & stopping engine .................................... 7-9, 7-12

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7

Steering responsive fog lights system ......................... 3-101

OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-37

Steering switches for audio ......................................... 5-62

Steering wheel

Power................................................................... 7-33

Tilt/telescopic........................................................ 3-115

Stop light ................................................................. 11-48

Storage compartment ................................................... 6-5

Sun shade ................................................................ 2-41

Sun visors................................................................... 6-3

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-33

Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5

Tachometer................................................................ 3-10

Temperature gauge..................................................... 3-11

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-18

Rear differential oil.................................................. 3-18

Temporary spare tire ............................................ 9-2, 12-8

Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-29, 1-32

Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-12

Tire ................................................................. 11-31, 12-8

Chains .................................................................. 8-10

Inspection............................................................ 11-32

Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-33

Replacement........................................................ 11-36

Rotation .............................................................. 11-36

Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8

Types.................................................................. 11-31

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-42, 9-8, 11-31

Warning light.......................................................... 3-19

Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-31

Tools.......................................................................... 9-3

Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-29, 1-32

Towing ...................................................................... 9-12

All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-15

Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-14

Hooks ...................................................................

9-12

Trailer

Towing .................................................................. 8-12

Trip meter................................................................... 3-9

Trunk lid .................................................................... 2-37

Release handle ...................................................... 2-37

Turn signal

Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-35

Lever.................................................................... 3-99

Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-12

Valet mode................................................................ 2-30

Vanity mirror................................................................ 6-4

Vehicle

Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-11

Identification ........................................................ 12-18

Symbols .................................................................... 3

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-27

OFF switch ........................................................... 7-40

Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-26

System ................................................................. 7-38

Warning light ......................................................... 3-26

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

Voice command system operation ................................ 5-80

Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-13

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-28

Warning light

ABS ..................................................................... 3-20

Access key ................................................... 3-28, 3-29

All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-25

AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-18

Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. 3-35

Brake system......................................................... 3-21

Charge.................................................................. 3-17

CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-16

Door open ............................................................. 3-25

Driver’s Control Center Differential............................ 3-36

Engine low oil level................................................. 3-17

Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-24

Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-28

Low fuel ................................................................ 3-24

Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-19

Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-17

Power steering ....................................................... 3-25

Rear differential oil temperature................................ 3-18

Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14

SRS airbag system................................................. 3-15

Vehicle Dynamics Control ........................................ 3-26

Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-18

Warranties ..................................................................... 1

Washing .................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3

Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-35

What to do if... ........................................................... 5-88

Troubleshooting...................................................... 5-88

Wheel

Aluminum ............................................................ 11-38

Balance...............................................................

11-35

Nut tightening torque........................................ 9-4, 12-8

Replacement........................................................ 11-37

Windows ................................................................... 2-32

Index 14-11

14-12 Index

Windshield

Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-38

Wiper and washer switches................................... 3-104

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-40

Wiper deicer......................................................... 3-114

Winter

Driving.................................................................... 8-6

Tires............................................................. 8-9, 11-31

Wiper and washer.................................................... 3-103

Wiper deicer............................................................. 3-114

————————————————————————————————————————

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel:

! STI

The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance

using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98

RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) fuel is not readily available

in your area, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI

(95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or

driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in

maximum engine performance while using 91 AKI (95 RON)

fuel. Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect your warranty

coverage.

! Except STI

Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95

RON) or higher. If 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel is not readily available,

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON)

may be used.

& Fuel octane rating:

! AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI).

! RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

& Fuel capacity:

15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

& Engine oil:

Use only the following oils.

. ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Starburst mark)

. or API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE

CONSERVING”

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”

F12-4.

& Engine oil capacity:

! STI

4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)

! Except STI

5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil

filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be

checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about

maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-13.

& Cold tire pressure:

Refer to “Tires” F12-8.

OWNER’S MANUAL

WRX

WRX STI

2017

2017 WRX / WRX STI Owner’s Manual

A1270BE-A

Issued March 2016

Printed in USA 03/16

2017A

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

TOKYO, JAPAN

Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza,

P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please see

your Subaru dealer for a Product Brochure

detailing all currently available models.

MSA5M1705A

Love. It’s what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.

2271137_17a_WRX_STi_OM.indd 1 5/17/16 5:00 PM

Subaru WRX 2017

Product's Documents

Owner's Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2017 WRX Questions and Answers

Related Products

Subaru 2017 WRX WRX STI

Subaru 2017 WRX WRX STI Limited

Subaru 2017 WRX WRX Premium

Subaru 2017 WRX WRX

Subaru 2017 WRX WRX Limited